Yt kt eee Lo” Bd ee Mise Cd / J] t i Pe ‘ ~ ‘ 4 i = ns r 1 { ri v 1 i bh PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 1897. COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION: THomaAs MEEHAN, CHARLES E. Smiru, Epwarp J. Nouay, M. D., GrorceE H. Horn, M. D., Henry SKINNER, M. D. Epitor: EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D. ee a PHILADELPHIA : | ACA DEMYSOR NATURAL SCIENCES, LOGAN SQUARE. 1898. Uy ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, February 3, 1898. I hereby certify that printed copies of the Proceedings of the Academy for 1897 have been presented to the meetings of the Academy and mailed as fol- lows :— Pages 9to 24 mailed February 23, 1897, presented February 23, 1897. «e 25 to 72 73 to 120 121 to 136 137 to 152 153 to 165 165 to 196 197 to 228 229 to 276 277 to 308 309 to 324 325 to 340 341 to 372 373 to 388 389 to 452 453 to 500 «¢ March ‘Search ‘« March eA rl 1 Atpril ‘cs = May sc May. June «« June “(July “< October «« November ‘« December ‘< December «¢ January DOCKER-FOSTER CO., PRINTERS, PHILA. 2, 1897, 4, 1897, 16, 1897, 21, 1897, 23, 1897, 10, 1897, 22, 1897, 15, 1897, 18, 1897, 19, 1897, 18, 1897, 23, 1897, 27, 1897, 13, 1897, 18, 1898, ce ec ce e¢ March 2, 1897. March 9, 1897. March 16, 1897. April 20, 1897. April 27, 1897: May 11, 1897. May 25, 1897. June 15, 1897. June 22, 1897. July 20, 1897. October 19, 1897. November 23, 1897. December 28, 1897. December 14, 1897. January 18, 1898. EDWARD J. NOLAN, Recording Secretary. LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS. With reference to the several articles contributed by each. For Verbal Communications, Announcements, ete., see General Index. ALLEN, Harrison, M. D. Observationson Tarsius fuscus . BENEDICT, JAMES E., Po. D. A Revision of the Genus Synapta . Brinton, Dante G., M.D. Dr. Allen’s Contributions to An- thropology CocKERELL, T. D. A. New andl Tittle: ine n North secon Bees 4 : : ; 3 CocKERELL, T. D. A. aud Wir. I. Fox. New Fossorial Hymen- optera from New Mexico Forp, JOHN. Cypreea lynx deformed by are Fox, WiLu1AM J. Contributions to a knowledge of the Hy men- optera of Brazil, No. 2—Pompilidee (Plate IV) Contributions to a knowledge of the Hymenoptera of Brazil, No. 3—Sphegide (sens. lat.) FRAZER, Dr. PerstFor. Geological Section fr om Meoneon to Siberia and Return HeatH, Haroip. External Besmules af Motrie ery noche (Plate VIII) : JORDAN, Davin SrarR and Game FEE. A @aileehon of Fishes made by Joseph Seed Roberts in Kingston, Jamaica KELLER, IDA A. Notes on Underground Runners (Plate ITT) Notes on Plant Monstrosities (Plate V) ; MEEHAN, THomAS. Contributions to the Life Histories of Plants, No. XII: The Fecundity of Heliophytum indicum; The Origin of the Forms of Flowers; Spines in the Citrus Fam- ily; Flowers and Flowering of Lamium purpureum; Cleistogamy in Umbelliferze ; Rhythmic Growth in Plants; Pellucid Dots in some Species of Hypericum; Honey Glands of Flowers; Varying Phyllotaxis in the Elm; Folial Origin of Cauline Structures ; Polarity in the Leaves of the Compass and other Plants; Hybrids in Nature; Origin and Nature of Glands in Plants; Nutrition as affecting the forms of Plants and their Floral Organs; Some Neglected Studies . Morris, CHARLES. The Primeval Ocean Nouan, Epw. J., M. D. Biographical Notices of Harrison ‘Allen and Gees Henry Horn Parmer, T. CHALKLEY. Demonstrations of iasernon of roe bon Dioxide and of the Generation of Oxygen by Diatoms. Pirspry, H. A. Descriptions of new South American Bulimuli. New Species of Mollusks from Uruguay (Plates VI and VII). New Achatinide and Helicide from Somaliland New Australian Mollusks (Plate IX) . New Brazilian Streptaxidee 4 Descriptions of two New Forms of Pendens Puspry, H. A. and Benjamin SHarp, M. D. Scaphopoda a the San Domingo Tertiary (Plates X and XI) : Pirspry, H. A. and E. G. Vanatra. Descriptions of two new Species of Cerion , 4 Ruoaps, SAMUEL N. A Dantnened "3 the iMammnalere of Northern New Jersey ; ; A Contribution to the Mammalogy of cena Bonsayieaen A new Southeastern Race of Little Brown Bat A Revision of the West American Flying Squirrels Notes on Living and Extinct Species of North American Bovidee (Plate XIT) : : ; : : : : Dr. Allen’s Zoological Work 2 : : 5 : : RHOADS, SAMUEL N, and Ropert T. Younc. Notes on a Collection of small Mammals from Northeastern North Carolina Ruttrer, CLoupsLEy. A Collection of Fishes obtained in Swatow, China, by Miss Adele M. Fielde ScuiveLy, Mary A., M, D. The Anatomy and Developuieae of Spirorbis Veni (Plates Iand IJ) , ; : ; SmirH, JoHN B, Dr, Horn’s Contributions to Coleopterology . SronE, Wirmer. The Genus Sturnella On the Annual Molt of the Sanderling : Van DeEnpurGH, JOHN. Reptiles from Sonora, Snalon anid Jalisco, with a Description of a new Species of Scelo- porus. : . : ‘ : : : : . 169 1Z 505 142 18 290 357 360 477 503 465 365 23 204 227 314 483 518 303 56 153. 529. 146 368. 460 PROC Hl DINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PAD EP ee JANUARY 59. Mr. CHar_es Morris in the Chair. Thirty-three persons present. A paper entitled “ A Contribution to the Mammalogy of Northern New Jersey,” by Samuel N. Rhoads, was presented for publication. The Council reported its organization and the appointment of the following Standing Committees to serve during the current year. :— On Liprary.—Charles P. Perot, Arthur Erwin Brown, Harrison Allen, M. D., Henry C. Chapman, M. D. and Henry A. Pilsbry. On Pusriicatrons.—Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith, George H. Horn, M. D., Edw. J. Nolan, M. D. and Henry Skinner, M. D. On Instruction.—Uselma C. Smith, Harrison Allen, M. D., George Vaux, Jr., Newlin Peirce, D. D. S. and Samuel N. Rhoads. CoMMITTEE or CounciL oN By-Laws.—lIsaac J. Wistar, Theodore D. Rand, William Sellers and Benjamin Tilghman. 2 10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897, JANUARY 12. The President, SAamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Thirty-seven persons present. The Affinities of Floridian Miocene Land Snails—Mr. Pitspry spoke of the Miocene Helices and Bulimi from the Silex-beds of Tampa, Florida, stating that the fauna was of as purely Antillean type as that of the Bahamas to-day. Helix latebrosa, instrumosa, erusta, ete., belonging to the Plagioptycha section of the genus Cep- olis. “ Helix” haruspica proved to belong, as Dall had suspected, to the genus Pleurodonta, and therein is about equally allied to Cuban, Jamaican and Caribbean forms now existing. The Bulimiform snails of the Silex-beds numbered some four or five species. They have a reflexed peristome, and a heavy deposit upon the parietal wall, which is most strongly developed toward the posterior angle of the aperture, but is there separated from the pos- terior termination of the outer lip by a narrow channel, somewhat as in certain European and Asiatic species of Buliminus, but entirely different from the structure of the same part of the shell in Ameri- ean Bulimulide. Ina species from the island of Fernando Nor- onha, however, an identical structure occurs. In fact, this species, the Bulimus ridleyi of Smith, is so similar to some of the Miocene forms of the Silex-beds that apart from size they are not readily dis- tinguishable. There can be no reasonable doubt, therefore, that B. ridleyi is a living representative of this Miocene group, preserved practically unchanged on the remote island of Fernando Noronha, while the group has been wholly crowded out of existence in the continental faunas. The name Hyperaulax was proposed for the group, which now in- cludes the following species: Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) ridleyt Smith (type). Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) floridanus Conrad. Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) heilprinianus Dall. Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) americanus Dall. Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) stearnsti Dall. All but the first of these being fossils of the Silex-beds. Hyperaulax may for the present be considered a subgenus of Bult- mulus; but the final position and rank of the group awaits invest- igation of the soft anatomy. It belongs to Division II of the speaker’s classification of Bulimuli, having vertically wave-wrinkled nepionic whorls. A similar reflexed peristome occurs in the sub- genus Rhinus, but that group wholly lacks the other special features of the aperture already alluded to. JANUARY 19. The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.. Twenty-seven persons present. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11 The deaths, on the 15th inst., of John H. Campbell and Charles H. Banes, members, were announced. The Gastropod Radula.—Mr. Pitspry spoke of the development and specialization of the radula in streptoneurous Gastropoda, show- ing that the law of mesometamorphosis, originally based upon ortho- neurous forms ( Helicide'), is equally applicable to the Prosobranchs. His remarks were illustrated by black-board diagrams and a series of specimens. JANUARY 26. The President, SamueL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Twenty-two persons present. Charles J. Pennock and Williams Biddle Cadwalader were elected members. The following were ordered to be printed :— ‘Guide to the Study of Helices, Man. Conch., ix, p. xiii, (1895). 12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. THE PRIMEVAL OCEAN. BY CHARLES MORRIS, In dealing with the conditions of the remote past it is impossible to avoid hypothesis, since exact knowledge is not within our reach. The best that can be done is to support hypothesis, as far as possi- ble, with facts drawn from experimental science. It is only in this way that we can deal with the problem of the Primeval Ocean, by seeking evidence for speculative conception in existing facts. The views which are entertained, for instance, concerning the former greatly heated condition of the earth, which must largely affect any hypothesis concerning the ocean, are mainly speculative. Yet there are so many facts to sustain them that they are generally accepted as well founded; and if we accept the view that the earth has gradually cooled to its present state from a former greatly heated or vaporized condition, certain conclusions concerning the former state of the ocean and atmosphere become inevitable. At one time, under such circumstances, there could have been no ocean, since all the water of the earth must have existed as atmos- pheric vapor. Still more remotely, perhaps, no water existed, the temperature being too high for that combination of oxygen and hy- drogen to which it is due. Such a condition probably exists now in the solar spheres, whose atmospheres contain an abundance of free hydrogen. As regards the oceanic and atmospheric conditions of an earth chemically like the one we inhabit, but differing from it greatly in temperature, there are certain conclusions which appear inevitable. If, for example, the surface of the earth should become so heated as to raise the oceanic waters to the temperature of 212° F., that is, to the boiling point under present atmospheric pressure, there would result a very considerable evaporation of the waters of the ocean, but by no means a total one. In fact, the great bulk of the ocean would remain in its bed, since the pressure of the atmosphere would be much enhanced by its increase of aqueous vapor, and the boiling point of water be correspondingly raised. Therefore, during the ancient cooling of the earth, the aqueous vapor of the atmosphere must have begun to condense into water long before the temperature 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13 sank to 212°, and the earliest ocean must have formed at a much higher temperature. We have experimental evidence of the boiling point of water under pressure up to a certain limit of temperature. Under a pres- sure of one atmosphere, as is well known, water boils at 212° F. With increase of pressure the boiling point rises, but not in an equivalent ratio, since the energy of evaporation increases more rapidly than that of pressure. For example, under five atmospheres of pressure water boils at about 300° F.; under fifteen atmospheres it boils at about 400° F.; under twenty-five atmospheres it boils at about 440° F. I have given approximate temperatures, so as to state them in round numbers, the actual temperatures differing slightly from those stated. It is evident from the figures given, that as the temperature rises the energy of evaporation steadily gains the ascendency over that of pressure. At 300°, one hundred degrees of temperature must be added to produce ten additional atmospheres of pressure. At 400° only forty degrees of temperature are needed for the same result. Experiment has gone no further, and we are not aware at what rate the temperature of the boiling point would increase under higher pressures. But if we may judge from the rapidly accelerated in- crease of evaporative energy with increase of temperature, it may be that at some point between 600° and 800°, all the waters of the ocean would be converted into vapor and form part of the atmos- phere. At the boiling point of 440°, which yields twenty-five atmos- pheres of pressure, one-twelfth of the oceanic waters would be con- verted into vapor, and eleven-twelfths continue as water. A total evaporation of the oceanic waters would produce a pressure of about three hundred atmospheres, or 4,500 pounds on each square inch of surface. The primeval pressure must have been still greater, since much water which has sunk into the earth’s crust and forms no part of the present ocean must then have added to the volume of atmos- pheric vapor. We cannot affirm at what limit of temperature this great pressure would be overcome, but, from the rapid rate of in- crease in evaporative energy observed between one and twenty-five atmospheres of pressure, it seems not improbable that this limit would be reached, as above said, at some point between 600° and 800°. At the period in question, when all the ocean was in the air, the enormous pressure must have exerted an important influence 14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. upon the surface conditions of the earth. There may have been then a very active tendency to volcanic or earthquake disturbances, but this tendency must have been held greatly in check by the pres- sure. This great pressure must also have exerted a vigorous influ- ence in condensing surface and aerial materials, converting vapors into liquids and liquids into solids, and thus have played its part in the formation of a solid crust. Again, the abundant aqueous vapor must have been active in the process of surface cooling, rising in heated winds and conveying heat to the upper air. Finally, as the temperature fell, the pressure of the vapor condensed some of its own material into water. The escape of heat then grew still more rapid, through the aid of evaporating water and falling rain, processes which may have long been incessant. As the surface cooled, through these and other influences, the conversion of yapor into water went on more rapidly, and the atmos- pheric pressure steadily decreased. This was probably attended with an increase in surface disturbances, the wave of disturbance growing in height as the pressure diminished. As the solid crust grew thicker and the rocks more rigid from progressive cooling, these seismic disturbances again diminished. There was thus prob- ably a cyele of change, from an originally level and quiescent sur- face to one of ridges and depressions with great disturbance, and again to one of growing quiescence and gradual reduction of ine- qualities. Of the chemical activity of water at a temperature of over 600° we have no knowledge, as water of this temperature has not been produced in laboratories under circumstances suitable for experi- ment. Its solvent powers would probably be very great, and many substances may have been held in solution in the waters of the primeval ocean which are insoluble at present temperatures. These substances were, probably, in part washed down from the air into the gathering ocean, in part dissolved from the surface. The bring- ing together of numerous elementary substances or simple compounds in a common menstruum was undoubtedly followed by great chemical activity, and numerous compounds of more or less intricacy were formed in the heated waters. Of these, some were insoluble and settled to the bottom ; others were soluble and continued in solution. The salts of the present ocean are doubtless, in great measure, the final outcome of these ancient solutions and chemical actions. They, in all probability, represent but a small fraction of the substances 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15 then held in solution by the heated oceanic waters, which, from their large percentage of foreign constituents, may have been almost jelly- like in consistency. It is impossible to estimate the chemical activity of that period. The high temperature of the waters greatly favored such action, and among the dissolved substances were probably many unoxydized materials, now first freely exposed to the assaults of oxygen. The energy of chemism that ensued was probably greater than had ever before or has ever since existed. In addition to simple oxides, many more complex substances were doubtless formed, and it may be that many of the constituents of the primeval rocks then and thus first came into existence. The story of chemical activity in the earth is, therefore, very closely connected with that of the ocean. It began, no doubt, in - the primeval atmosphere, but reached its culmination in the waters of the ocean. During the early period of the earth chemical inaction must have long prevailed, on account of high temperature and unfavorable physical conditions. Perhaps the principal chem- ical action of the primeval atmosphere was the combination of oxy- gen and hydrogen into water vapor. But, on the formation of an ocean of highly heated waters, holding in solution a considerable variety of elementary substances and simple compounds, chemism probably grew active, and in time became very energetic as the waters increased in depth and in the variety and volume of their contents. Many of the complex minerals were very likely then formed, and, being insoluble, were separated from the water and de- posited as rock formations. Only when the ocean became, in a measure, freed from its abundance of foreign material, did this ac- tivity of inorganic chemistry decrease. It has continued to decrease until the present time, when it has practically ceased to exist, oxida- tion having reduced nearly all substances to a state of chemical fixity. It has been succeeded by an era of organic chemical action, which is, at present, in a state of full activity, and promises long to con- tinue so. It began in the early seas, probably after their temperature had diminished to near or below the present boiling point. It grad- ually replaced inorganic chemism, and has long continued active, at first in the water, and later on the land also. It is now, and has long been, at its maximum activity, the quantity of new material produced in the plant and animal world being annually enormous. 16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Continued refrigeration must, in time, repress this organic activ- ity and bring it finally to an end, the chemical inertness once due to extreme heat being paralleled by a similar inertness due to extreme cold. The interval between is that of the earth’s chemical history. In the history of chemistry we perceive, therefore, two great cycles, an inorganic one, whose principal feature is oxidation, which reached its culmination in the remote past, and an organic one, whose prin- cipal feature is deoxidation, which is now at its culminating point. The question which naturally follows is: When did inorganic ac- tivity cease, and organic activity begin, and to what extent is the latter an outgrowth from the former? The reduction of the temper- ature of the ocean had much to do with this change, inorganic action being probably favored by a high temperature, while organic action may have been impossible in waters much above 212°. These two phases of chemical activity differ strikingly in one particular. In- organic chemism had a fixed period of duration, beyond which it could not exist. When there remained no more substance in con- dition to be seized upon by oxygen, this phase of chemical action necesssarily ceased. Organic chemism has no such limitation. It may continue in activity, under favorable conditions of temperature and sunlight, indefinitely, its material being practically inexhaust- ible. Only decrease in temperature can bring it to an end. As the waters of the primeval ocean slowly cooled, and inorganic chemism declined in activity, organic chemism probably set in, aided by the solar rays, then perhaps first freely reaching the waters. The material for this new phase of action had been prepared before and existed abundantly in the water and air. It may have had its origin in an early reaction between carbon dioxide and the elements of water, yielding the hydro-carbons; and subsequently between these and nitrogen, yielding the far more complex albuminous com- pounds. Certainly organic forms appeared in the waters of that period, and conditions favoring their formation must have existed. Wedo not know through what successive steps of chemical combination the complex organic molecules arose. We do know that many of the preceding mineral molecules were quite complex in composition, and can reasonably deduce from this that still more complex mole- cules arose under conditions restraining the activity of oxygen. Seed forms of organic substance may have first appeared—simple carbon compounds. These would serve as the basis of more complex ‘ 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17 molecules, and there may have been a long-continued process of de- oxidation and formation of higher carbon and nitrogen compounds, till true organic matter appeared and the chemistry of life came fairly into play. I have but one further suggestion to offer. That is, that the con- ditions favoring the development of organic material were transitory, and no longer exist. If living matter were now swept from the earth, it could not, in any probability, be restored. Its seed condi- tions have passed away. ‘They could not reappear in water of the temperature of the present ocean and the existing chemical rela- tions of inorganic matter. Organic chemistry emerged from a vitally active stage of inorganic chemistry. It could not well arise from the existing passive stage of inorganic chemistry. Fortunately, conditions favoring the origin of organized matter are no longer needed. Organisms have within themselves the power of inducing new chemical action to an indefinite extent. A plant is a natural or- ganic laboratory, within which new organic material is elaborated from elementary constituents which exist abundantly in air and water. From the plant the animal derives the more complex ma- terial it requires. Thus the process goes continually on, and can only be brought to an end by a fall in temperature below the point requisite for organic chemism. How far in the future this will be it is impossible to predict, but the reign of life, which has continued for many millions of years upon the earth, will, in all probability, continue for many millions of years to come. 18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SOUTH AMERICAN BULIMULI. BY H. A’ PILSBRY- The species described below have been found during the writer’s work on the group in the Manual of Conchology. Wlustrations of them will appear in due course in that series of monographs. — Bulimulus rushit, gorritiensis and corumbaénsis belong to the typi- cal section of the genus, characterized by densely wave-wrinkled apical sculpture. B. pachys, chrysaloides, glyptocephalus and sar- cochrous have separated, straight vertical riblets on the nepionic whorls, much as in the Galapagos group Nesiotes, or the northern Mexican and Lower Californian groups. Bulimulus rushii n. sp. Shell umbilicate, globose-ovate, rather thin but solid, light yellow- ish. Surface with inconspicuous growth-wrinkles and extremely fine, close incised spiral stric, visible only above the periphery. Spire very short, conic, the apex obtuse. Whorls slightly over 6, moderately convex, the sutureshallow but well marked. Aperture slightly oblique, ovate, a trifle over half the total length of shell ; peristome simple, unexpanded, the columellar margin broadly dilated above. Alt. 193, diam. 14 mill.; alt. of aperture 10 mill. Maldonado, Uruguay (Dr. W. H. Rush). Apparently allied to B. sporadicus and B. vesicalis, especially to the stouter variety of the latter species ; but conspicuously different in the very short spire, globose form and widely open, deeply pene- trating umbilicus. By an inadvertent exchange of labels, a wrong locality was given in the catalogue of Dr. Rush’s shells in the Nau- tilus. It has been figured but not described in the Manual of Con- chology, pl. 12, fig. 47. Bulimulus gorritiensis n. sp. B. gorritiensts Pils., Nautilus x, p. 78 (name only). Shell perforate, ovate-turreted, thin and fragile, corneous-brown or dirty corneous-whitish. Surface slightly shining, sculptured with irregular and rather coarse wrinkles of growth. Spire elevated, rather slender, the lateral outlines straight ; apex quite obtuse, the 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19 nepionic whorls shallowly, rather irregularly zig-zag wrinkled in the young, this sculpture lost with age. Whorls 63, convex, with well impressed sutures. Aperture ovate, rather wide, brownish inside, varying from slightly to decidedly under half the length of the shell; outer lip regularly arcuate, acute, unexpanded and fragile, columella slightly concave, the columellar margin narrowly reflexed above. Alt. 20 diam. 104 mill. ; alt. of aperture 9 mill. Alt. 174 diam. 8 mill. ; alt. of aperture 7 mill. Alt. 17 diam. 8% mill; alt. of aperture 8 mill. Gorriti Island, Maldonado Bay, Uruguay (Dr. Wm. H. Rush, WassN.): A smaller, thinner, more turreted shell than B. sporadicus or its varieties, the whorls more convex, apex blunter, the first whorl be- ing planorboid. The whorls are more convex and more wrinkled than in B. tenuissimus. Bulimulus corumbaensis n. n. Bulimus amenus Bonnet, Rey. et. Mag. de Zool., 1864, p. 70, pl. 6, f. 2. Not Bulimus amenus Pfr. The locality given by Bonnet for this species is incorrect. It oc- curs at Corumba, province of Matto Grosso, Brazil, where Mr. Herbert H. Smith found it common on walls, ete. B. corumbaénsis is closely allied to the typical form of B. sporadicus Orb., but it is a less elongated shell, solid, with distinctly expanded peristome and very widely dilated columellar lip, the umbilicus larger than in spor- adicus. The striped color pattern is a conspicuous but variable character. It belongs to the restricted subgenus Bulimulus (-++ Lep- tomerus ). It may be remarked here that but few of the localities given by Bonnet, for species described in the paper mentioned above, are cor- rect. His Helix vitreais not South American. Bulimus pictus is not Peruvian, being a form of Drymeus pecilus Orb. of Bolivia (Province Santa Cruz) and Matto Grosso. Pupa varius, said to be Tasmanian, is a mottled race of Cerion glans, of New Providence, Bahamas. Bulimulus angrandianus n. n. Bulimus radiatus Morelet, Séries Conchyliologiques, III, p. 188, pl. 9, f. 2. Not Bulimus radiatus Bruguiére. The name of this Peruvian species of the section Lissoacme being preoccupied, may be changed as above. 20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Bulimulus pachys n. sp. Shell umbilicate, ovate-conic, solid and strong; surface smoothish, with slight growth-wrinkles, rather regular and close on the spire and disposed to be interrupted. Spire acutely and straightly conic with subhorizontal sutures, the apex small, obtuse, earlier 1} whorls regularly and rather finely costulate vertically. Whorls 72, con- vex; sutures well impressed, the last hardly descending; last whorl regularly convex and inflated. Aperture subvertical, ovate, somewhat over half the length of shell, white inside; peristome unexpanded, rather blunt, the outer margin regularly arched, columella slightly concave, its margin broadly reflexed, with a salient angle at junction of reflexion with basal lip; parietal callus moderate; umbilicus deep and rounded. Alt. 323 diam. 20; alt. of aperture 18 mill. Province of Bahia, Brazil (v. d. Busch). The type is a faded, decolored specimen, showing traces of a median white girdle, brown above and slightly so below it, asin B. durus Spix. Itis considerably like B. heterotrichus in size and form, but is unlike that species in the less oblique aperture with blunt, un- expanded outer lip, the differently formed columella and the costu- late apical whorls. In general aspect it somewhat resembles Bin- ney’s B. patriarcha. ‘The columellar lip is pressed in above, unlike that of B. durus, which is, besides, a smaller species. Bulimulus chrysaloides n. sp. Shell perforate, oblong turreted, thin, deep reddish-chestnut, somewhat paler on the spire; surface lusterless, with irregular, indis- tinct growth wrinkles and microscopic crowded spiral striz, very superficial and probably cuticular. Spire long, the apex obtuse, 13 nepionic whorls regularly vertically costellate, the riblets straight, closer on the latter portion. Whorls 63, moderately convex, the last a trifle descending in front ; sutures impressed. Aperture small and short, slightly oblique, short-oval, contained slightly less than 2) times in length of shell, brownish-vinous with- in ; peristome thin, slightly expanded ; columellar margin expanded, not reflexed, forming a long triangular plate concave on the apertural side; the inner edge of columella rather acute, slightly concave. Alt. 22, diam. 10 mill.; alt. of aperture 83 mill. Alt. 183, diam. 9{ mill; alt. of aperture 84 mill. Martinique. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21 The nepionic whorls, when unworn, show a vertically ribbed sculpture very different from the reticulate apices of the B. exilis group, but like the apex of B. sanctelucie Smith. The peculiar columella also somewhat resembles that species, which in propor- tions is also quite similar, but the post-nepionic sculpture and dark color of chrysaloides are unlike Smith’s form. Bulimulus glyptocephalus n. sp. Shell narrowly perforated, long ovate, solid and thick, of chalky teature. White or bluish-white, the apical whorl buff, the next _ bluish below, paleabove. Surface irregularly and cvarsely wrinkle- striate and conspicuously malleated ; apical whorl with conspicuous, arcuate riblets, becoming closer and beaded on the second whorl. Spire conic, the apex very obtuse, sutures impressed; whorls 53, weakly convex, the last suture slightly more descending along the latter half, and consequently a trifle oblique to the others. Aperture a trifle exceeding half the total altitude of shell, sub- vertical, white inside, with a faint narrow band at position of the periphery and another wide one above; outer lip blunt, obtuse, not expanded ; columella concave below, straighter above, the columel- lar margin broadly dilated above, reducing the umbilicus to a chink ; parietal callus white, rather thin. Alt. 31, diam. 17 mill.; alt. of aperture 152 mill. Peru (A. Agassiz). A peculiar form unlike any Peruvian species known to me except the next, in the characters of the earlier whorls. It differs from the following species in its elliptical-ovate shape and larger aperture. Bulimulus sarcochrous n. sp. Shell narrowly umbilicated, ovate-conie, solid andstrong. Fleshy white, becoming flesh-pink and then brownish above, the earlier 2 whorls brown below, white above. Surface irregularly, weakly striate, more wrinkled below the sutures, faintly malleated on the body whorl; apical sculpture as in the preceding species, except that the riblets are less prominent and are much finer and closer on the second whorl. Spire straightly conic, the apex very obtuse; whorls 53, nearly flat, the last one not more rapidly descending than the rest. Aperture ovate, one-half the altitude of shell, vertical, light brown inside, with a faint, narrow light band at position of the periphery, and white within the lip-edge; outer lip obtuse and rather thick, not 22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. expanded ; columella with an oblique fold above, the columellar margin well dilated, rounded. Alt. 29,diam. 16 mill.; alt. of aper- ture 143 mill. Peru. Closely allied to the preceding species, but the spire is more slen- der, the umbilicus larger, surface less malleated and the columellar fold more conspicuous. The apical riblets are finer and closer, less coarsely granulated on the second whorl. Drymeus (Neopetreus) filiola n. sp. Shell acutely oblong-ovate, solid and strong. Opaque, whitish, distinctly flesh tinted at apex and last whorl, the spire bluish. Sur- face shining, very irregularly striated, with scattered short trans- verse impressions. Whorls fully 63, the first nearly planorboid above, the second much higher than wide, producing a mamillar apex with the characteristic sculpture of the subgenus. Following whorls of spire flat, acutely keeled, the keel appearing just above sutures, becoming more obtuse and concealed below; next to last whor! convex; last whorl oblong, convex. Aperture irregularly ovate, purple-brown inside ; peristome blunt, hardly expanded, pale edged; columellar margin vertical and straight, parietal wall flesh-colored, with no perceptible callus. Col- umella very broad above, obliquely truncated in the middle, pro- ducing the effect of a large blunttooth. Umbilicus perforated, with a compressed, long chink behind the inner lip. Length 45, diam. 25, alt of aperture 22°5 mill. Peru. The largest member of the Neopetreus group, strikingly unlike other species known to me in contour of shell and columella. The specific name is in allusion to my own little daughter Elizabeth. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23 A CONTRIBUTION TO THE MAMMALOGY OF NORTHERN NEW JERSEY. BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS. The following notes on New Jersey mammals are based on per- sonal experience had during three collecting trips in the northern portion of the State. In some cases I have added to my own obser- vations those of people living in the localities named, whose testi- mony was considered thoroughly reliable. Trip number one was made during the last week in May, 1893, to Nolan’s Point, Lake Hopatcong, Morris County, collecting being confined within a radius of three miles from Nolan’s Point Villa, on the east shore of the lake. The second trip included a brief stay of five days during the last week in August, 1893, at a place near Delaware Gap station in the western corner of Warren County. Trapping was restricted to a line of woodland and meadow connecting a lake (Sunfish Pond) 2 miles distant, with the farm-house in which I lodged near Delaware Gap. The third and most important trip covered a period of three weeks, extending from the sixth to the thirtieth days of October, 1896. It included three stops of one week each ; the first at Cul- ver's Lake, Sussex County, the second at Unionville, Orange Covnty, New York, just across the northern boundary of Sussex County near the Walkill Valley, and the third at the southern end of Greenwood Lake in Passaic County. Considered in their faunal, geological and topographic relations, there is a great similarity in all the localities named, lying as they do within the Alleghenian life region, as restricted by Dr. J. A. Allen, and moulded by the powerful agencies of the glacial period which has left its characteristic impress upon the greater part of northern New Jersey. The mountains of Warren, Sussex and Pas- saic Counties are the highest on the eastern side of the Delaware River, several attaining the height of nearly 1,900 feet. The Kit- tatinny Range, in its continuation northward from the Water Gap, runs close to two stations named in the above itinerary, viz., Dela- ware Gap on the western slope and Culver’s Lake (Culver’s Gap) on the eastern. The mountain at these places is covered mainly with 24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. deciduous trees, alternating with pines and occasional hemlock in swampy localities, isolated bogs of tamarack and rhododendron and fir affording retreat for animals more characteristic of the Canadian fauna. The lakes of New Jersey are numerous; Culver’s Lake and Long Lake together cover a considerable tract, and with their surround- ings of swamp and mountain form a natural forest game preserve that is well worth the future attention of the legislators of the State. At Lake Hopatcong, the largest of all, the country is less mountain- ous, and the fauna and flora shade somewhat into the Carolinian elements, but at Greenwood Lake the western range of Greenwood Mountain shows the most marked Canadian features noted in the State, frequent swamps and bogs of white cedar, fir, pine, hemlock and tamarack nestling among the depressions of the summits. The excursions of which the following pages form a summary are part of the author’s plan to make a comprehensive zoological survey of all the counties of New Jersey and Pennsylvania, with special reference to mammalogy and herpetology. About half of this labor has been completed. 1. Didelphis marsupialis virginiana (Kerr). Virginia Opossum. No specimens of opossum were taken. Its rare occurrence at Greenwood Lake, where I was informed by the hunters that two had been captured in the last two years, is of interest as showing the presence of this animal in the most boreal surroundings which the State affords. An examination of the large opossums of North and South Amer- ica which belong to the marsupialis type of Linneus, shows a spe- cific difference in the character of the last premolar. In Brazilian and Surinam specimens this tooth is a retrorse, blunt, rounded cone with slight trace of a shoulder above the cingulum on the posterior border. In examples from the eastern United States and Mexico the tooth is sharply and abruptly conical, compressed laterally and entirely surrounded by a tuberculate basal shoulder. Independently of other marked characters, this is sufficient at once to divide spe- cifically the composite group marsupialis as defined by Oldfield Thomas’ into two sections. -A study of Linnzeus’ description’ leads me to adopt Hernandez’s Mexican animal as the least composite type of marsupialis with definite given habitat. D. karkinophaga 'Cat. Marsup. Monot. B. Mus., 1888, pp. 323-327. 2Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 54. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25 Zimmerman’ is the first name given to the South American species from Cayenne ; D. aurita Max. Wied* (—D. azare Temm.) becoming under the ruling of Thomas (le.), D. karkinophaga aurita (Max. Wied). 2. Dorcelaphus virginianus (Bodd.). Virginia Deer. It has been many years since one of these animals was killed in any of the localities visited. Several are confined in a game pre- serve surrounding Sunfish Pond in Warren County, and a few in the Dalrymple preserve on the east side of Long Lake in Sussex County. 3. ?Cervus canadensis (Erxl.). Wapiti. A hunter near Delaware Gap declared that his grandfather, who “killed the last Elk shotin Pike County,” Pennsylvania, stated that sometimes the hounds would drive both elk and deer across the Delaware River onto the Kittatinny Mountain. That the latter spe- cies has quite recently been known to find temporary refuge in Sus- sex County on this account is easily proved, and it is probable that in this manner the Wapiti has either voluntarily or involuntarily become a member of the New Jersey fauna within the present cen- tury. 4, Lepus americanus Erxl. Varying Hare. Once pretty numerous in the tamarack swamps of northern New Jersey, this species now seems to be exterminated. Mr. Larkin Hazen stated that he shot one about six winters ago on Greenwood Mountain just across the State line in Orange County, New York. They used to frequent a small swamp near Culver’s Gap, but I was unable to find any trace of them there. 5. Lepus sylvaticus Bachm. Wood Hare. No specimens of this common species were secured. On this ac- count J am unable to say whether the subspecies transitionalis is found in northern New Jersey. 6. Synaptomys cooperi Baird. Cooper’s Vole. Four specimens of Cooper’s Vole were secured. The first, an adult male, was trapped in a wet meadow close to woodland among sphagnum and tussocks of Juncus; and the second, an adult nurs- ing female, under a heap of stones along the edge of dry wood-land but quite near swampy ground. Both these specimens were caught 3 Geog. Gesch., 1870, p. 226. * Beitr. Nat. Bras., 1826, p. 395. 26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1S8oie near the head of Long Lake, adjoining Bear Swamp, October 8th and 15th, 1896. Two additional examples were trapped October 29th at Greenwood Lake, the first in a wet pasture lot at the south end of the lake, the last along a deep ravine in Greenwood Mount- ain, among sphagnum and grass by the road-side. In no case have I seen this species out of easy reach of sphagnum or removed a stone’s throw from woodland, even when wet meadows afforded it a tempting diversion into open country. The specimens are esentially like those of this species taken in Pennsylvania and New England, being uniformly lighter colored than those found in the bogs of southern New Jersey at the same season, to which I gave the name Synaptomys stonei in 1893, and which a full series of specimens is likely to prove separable from cooperi as a subspecies: I believe the above record of typical cooperi is the first for New Jersey, though it is probable that Cooper’s original specimen was taken in the northern section of the State. 7. Microtus pennsylvanicus (Ord). Wilson’s Meadow Vole. As was expected, the common meadow mouse proved very abund- ant in all visited localities. Of the ninety specimens taken, none show any remarkable varia- tion from the typical form found in southeastern Pennsylvania. Several females contained embryos, while young of all stages of growth were secured. It is not likely that the severest winter weather puts any effectual period to the reproductive powers of this animal. In old nursing females the fall moult seemed to be some- times almost wholly arrested, their pelage presenting a very ragged and faded appearance. 8. Microtus pinetorum (LeC.). Pine-woods Vole. Comparison of two specimens of this vole taken at Delaware Gap shows no differences of even subspecific value to separate them from individuals taken in the pine barrens of southern New Jersey. Un- less South Carolina and Georgia specimens differ markedly from any I have yet taken in Pennsylvania and New Jersey, the conclu- sion of Audubon and Bachman, that scalopsoides is a synonym of pinetorum, holds good. The individual and seasonal variations in this species among spec- imens from the same locality are very great, making it necessary that a large suite of skins from Florida to Massachusetts be con- 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27 sulted to determine this point. In any event, all the Pine Voles of Pennsylvania and New Jersey belong more properly to the northern type. No specimens were taken except at Delaware Gap. 9. Evotomys gapperi (Vigors). Gapper’s Wood Vole. Thirteen specimens were trapped in and about Bear Swamp near Long Lake, and six more in a hemlock swamp in the bottoms of the Walkill about two miles south of the New York State line. They are similar to specimens from Quebec, being lighter colored than those taken by Mr. Stone at May’s Landing, New Jersey, in 1893. Iam convinced that the reason this species was not taken near Greenwood Lake, was my neglect to set traps in the more retired and deep-shaded hemlock swamps. 10. Fiber zibethious (L.). Muskrat. No specimens of this abundant species were taken, except at Lake Hopatcong. 11. Peromyscus leucopus (Raf.). Deer Mouse. A large series of deer mice from every locality mentioned in the itinerary of this paper closely conform in character to those of other parts of New Jersey and Pennsylvania. Though abundant in localities where Evotomys was found, no specimens of P. canadensis were secured among them, showing that the mountains of northern New Jersey lack the more typical Canadian elements which are found in isolated places in Pennsylvania where I have taken cana- densis. , There is a marked racial difference between leucopus of Pennsyl- vania and New Jersey and the type of /ewcopus found in Massachu- setts and northern New York, the latter being smaller and brighter colored with a narrower dark dorsal stripe and more hairy tail. Pennsylvania and New Jersey specimens are practically identical with those collected by me in west Tennessee and Kentucky, where the type form of leucopus defined by Rafinesque is found. It has been proved by Mr. G.S. Miller, Jr.,° that the Cricetus myodes of Gapper applies to the smaller short-tailed deer mouse of Canada which is apparently identical with those of northern New York and New England. These facts induce me to revive the name myodes for the small deer mouse of the eastern Canadian fauna, making it read Peromyscus leucopus myodes (Gapper). ° Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 1898, pp. 59, 60. 28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. 12. Neotoma magister Baird. Allegheny Cave Rat. The occurrence of this rat in the Hudson highlands near New Jersey, and in Massachusetts also, has for some years led mammalo- gists to believe that its distribution across the intervening country would be found continuous in favorable localities. Save the dis- covery of their remains in the cave deposits of Monroe County, Pennsylvania, there has been no definite record to my knowledge which would connect their habitat in the Allegheny Mountains with that on the Hudson River. I was informed, however, by a hunter at Delaware Gap, that he knew of such an animal on the Kittatinny Mountain in Warren County. This statement I was unable to ver- ify, owing to my short stay at that place. It is very likely that this rat will also be found on the Kittatinny range near Culver’s Gap, but during my visit no exploration of the summits was made. Soon after my arrival at Greenwood Lake, I was told by a local sportsman that he had once caught a ‘‘ wood rat” on the mountain in a deadfall set for skunks. The summits of Greenwood Mountain at the south end of the lake are made up exclusively of great masses of glaciated conglomerate and shale with perpendicular fissures and steep faults running parallel with the northeast and southwest trend of the range. Chestnut and scrub oaks and dwarfed pines and hem- locks sparingly cover the nakedness of this desolate but picturesque locality. Owing to their perpendicular cleavage, I found the rocks rarely afforded the proper shelter for the abode of the cliff rat, and it was only after nearly two days of climbing that I stumbled upon an escarpment from which the rock masses had so fallen into the gorge as to forma roof. Beneath this, unmistakable signs of the rats were found, and in the two following days an adult male, a very old female and a young male, about two-thirds grown, were secured. These specimens differ in no respects from a series from the Penn- sylvania Alleghenies taken at the same season. They form the first New Jersey record of this interesting native rat. 13. Mus decumanus Pallas. Norway Rat. 14. Mus musculus L. House Mouse. Specimens of the House mouse were taken. Of the status of the Black Rat, M. rattus, no notes were secured. 15. Zapus hudsonius (Zimm.). Meadow Jumping Mouse. Ten specimens from Lake Hopatcong and three from near Cul- ver’s Lake represent this animal. The latter were taken in a wet 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29 swamp grown up with Juncus and grasses. The temperature fell on two nights when these were taken to near 32°, forming heavy frosts. Their absence from my traps in the Walkill Valley and at Green- wood Lake was undoubtedly due to the low temperature having driven them all to their winter repose. A thick layer of yellow fat completely covered the bodies of these Culver’s Lake specimens, adhering so firmly to the skin that it was very difficult to preserve the specimens. 16. Zapus insignis Miller. Woodland Jumping Mouse. I secured four beautiful specimens of this Zapus in woodland along a small rocky stream connecting a rhododendron swamp with Lake Hopatcong, near Nolan’s Point. All were trapped close by the water’s edge, precisely as described by Mr. Miller in his later account of the species. I have never taken this animal in open sit- uations such as are preferred by its kinsman of the meadow. The most persistent trapping in likely places at Culver’s and Greenwood Lakes did not reveal the presence of insignis there. It seems prob- able that it is more sensitive to frost than hudsonius and had gone into winter quarters before my arrival at Culver’s Lake. At Green- wood Lake a dormant jumping mouse, evidently of this species from the description given me by the finder, was dug out of a gravel bank during my stay. I visited the spot, and from its situation in deep woodland near a brook, I am morally sure it was insignis. The narrator of the incident stated that he knew the meadow species very well, but that this one was ‘“‘ much redder.” These particulars are given to show not only that insignis is found in Passaic County, but to prove that it hibernates earlier than hudsonius. The presence of a persistent premolar in all other known species of the genus as contrasted with its absence in Zapus insignis may eventually entitle the latter to separate subgeneric rank. 17. Castor canadensis Kuhl. American Beaver. Numerous localities in northern New Jersey are pointed out as the traditional sites of beaver colonies. This animal was so early exterminated in these places that I found it impossible to secure any data relating to the time of their extinction. 18. Arctomys monax (L.). Woodchuck; Ground Hog. Very abundant on the Delaware slope of the Kittatinny Mount- ain; less so in other localities named except at Lake Hopatcong. No specimens were taken. 30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. It seems strange that the unmistakable difference in size and color obtaining between the woodchucks of the Hudson Bay regions and those of Maryland, the type locality of monaz, should not have been officially recognized. With Dr. Allen’s excellent analysis of its nomenclature® as a basis, I see no objection to designating the wood- chucks of eastern North America by the following formule :— 1. Arctomys monax (Linneeus), Syst. Nat. 1758, p. 60; Maryland Marmot. Size small; color gray-brown, feet brown. Habitat.— Carolinian fauna, intergrading northward through the Alleghenian and Canadian fauna into 2. Arctomys monax melanopus (Kuhl), Beitrage, 1820, p. 64; Hud- son Bay Marmot. Size large; color brown-black, feet black. Hab- itat.—Hudsonian fauna, intergrading southward with typical monaz. 19. Tamias striatus (L.). Carolina Chipmunk. Forty specimens, representing every locality visited, show nearer affinities to the Carolinian than the Canadian form of our eastern chipmunk. Those from Delaware Gap are scarcely separable from southern New Jersey examples, the Greenwood Lake series being nearest to lysteri of Maine, but much darker. This animal is very abundant in Warren, Sussex and Passaic Counties, but not so num- erous at Lake Hopatcong. A temperature of 28° during my stay at Greenwood Lake did not wholly silence them, though it greatly lessened their activity and apparent numbers. Contrary to what I expected, no really fat spec- imens were procured, and all seemed most busily intent on gather- ing and storing acorns at a season when they are generally supposed to go into their winter sleep. About twenty per cent of those taken had the tail shortened or injured in some manner. 20. Sciurus hudsonicus loquax Bangs. Carolinian Chickaree. Numerous everywhere; abundant in the deeper evergreen for- ests. 21. Sciurus carolinensis pennsylvanicus (Ord). Northern Gray Squirrel. Not common except in the vicinity of Long Lake. Even the former existence of the Fox Squirrel in northern New Jersey rests on such unreliable evidence that I am unwilling to in- clude it in this paper. Monog. N. A. Rod., 1877, pp. 915-917. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 31 22. Sciuropterus volans (L.). Carolinian Flying Squirrel. A female and three young taken at Lake Hopatcong, and a male from near Culver’s Lake, show no tendency to gradation with the northern animal. 23. Procyon lotor (L.). Raccoon. Not rare. ©, 0g “AYLROOTT “OUR N *UOT}99T[0) e 2. iS} 4 2 “WOIUENV HLMON NUGLSAM JO dNOUD SANTdTV SQUYALdOUIIOS AHL JO SNAWIONdS NAALANIN AO SINDWAUASVAW 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 327 greatest breadth, 23.8; length of nasals, 11.8; greatest length of mandible, 22; frontal constriction behind post-orbital processes, 8.5; interorbital constriction, 7.5. General remarks.—A study of oregonensis, as represented by a fair series of specimens extending from Tongas, Alaska, to northern California, seems to indicate that three forms of this small, dark colored type inhabit the Pacific Coast lands, the typical form found from northern Oregon to southern Alaska being darkest and brownest, becoming larger and more rusty northward, and smaller, grayer and more tawny southward. Lack of specimens from the two extremes of its distribution compel me to reserve a decision on these points. In some respects the differences between oregonensis and the other subspecies of alpinus recognized in this paper seem almost specific, but in some of the specimens from intervening locali- ties I find such a strong indication of intergrading with fuliginosus that this separation seems unwarranted. Specimens examined.—Alaska, 2; British Columbia, 5; Wash- ington, 4; Oregon 5; ? California, 1. oo bo oo PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. CYPREA LYNX DEFORMED BY DISEASE. BY JOHN FORD. A very remarkable series of shells comprising sixty or more spec- imens of diseased Cyprea lynx (figures 1, 2, 3) was recently secured by the writer while examining a barrel of mixed species of Cyprea that apparently came direct from Singapore, E. Indies. As much of the animal matter remained in all of the shells it seems quite probable that they were barreled, indiscriminately, as soon as obtained. The action of the disease appears to have been the same in all the spec- imens, the chief abnormal] characters being a pallid and emaciated appearance of the outer margin of the right lip, and the outward bow-like curve of the same (fig. 1). In some instances from within Fic, 1. Fic. 2. Fic, 3. ; Abnormal Cypreea lynx. the lip a thin, shelf-like partition, suggesting a former imperfect lip projected partly across the cavity. Several millimeters above this partition a second lip appears, with teeth that are fairly normal (fig. 2). In fig. 3, a shell is shown in which a flat, white, shelf-like lip replaces the convex and crenulated peristome of the normal shell, Other irregular characters are present, but those specified are the most important. Asa rule the left lip and dorsal parts of the shells exhibit normal conditions both of form and color. So far as can be learned no specimens similarly affected have been heretofore observed. No evidence of the disease was apparent in the associated species. Representative specimens have been presented to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and to the Wagner Free Institute of Science. A fine suite may also be seen in the writer’s collection. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329 JULY 6. PRroFeEssorR Henry A. PiItssry in the Chair. Twelve persons present. JuLY 20. Mr. Cuarves Morris in the Chair. Nine persons present. A paper entitled “New Australian Mollusks,” by Henry A. Pilsbry was presented for publication. Auveust 3. Mr. BENJAMIN SmirH LyMANn in the Chair. Seven persons present. Patagonian Tertiary fossils—Pror. H. A. Pitspry spoke of a small collection of fossils from near Cape Fairweather, Patagonia, collected by the Princeton University Expedition to that region in charge of Mr. Hatcher. The general aspect of the fauna as represented by these fossils is decidedly Magellanic; but the presence of large oysters, Cardiwm and Turritella, differentiate it from the recent fauna of Cape Horn. Negative characteristics are also significant, dominant Magellanic genera as Nacella, Photinula, etc. being absent. The forms common to the Cape Fairweather deposit and the recent fauna are Trophon laciniatus, Calyptrea (probably), and Magellania venosa. The extinct forms are Trophon inornatus, Turritella inno- tabilis, Pecten actinodes, Ostrea, two species. The other forms enumerated below are not sufficiently well preserved to base con- clusions upon. Of the species supposed to be extinct, the Trophon and Turritella are nearer to recent forms than to anything yet known from the Patagonian Tertiary. The evidence of so limited a number of species is not absolutely conclusive as to the age of the deposit, but so far as it goes indicates that it is Pliocene. Certainly no argument for greater antiquity could be based upon the data now available, whatever a more com- plete knowledge of the fauna of the beds in question may reveal. TROPHON LACINIATUS Martyn. Specimens 6 to 6°5 em. in length. 330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. TROPHON INORNATUS 0. sp. Form as in T. lacinatus or somewhat more obese; surface with- out lamellee or spiral cords, smooth ex- cept for growth-lines. Specimens meas- ure: Alt. 50, diam. 34 mm. Alt. 85 mm. CALYPTR2&XA Cf. MAMILLARIs Brod. In- ternal casts show no features incom- patible with the recent C. mamillaris of the west coast of South America, TURRITELLA INNOTABILIS N. sp. Shell long-conic, of about a dozen slowly increasing whorls, which are but slightly convex, but become de- cidedly so below, the latter two or three being well rounded. Sculpture on the lower whorls of five rounded and subequal spiral cords separated by intervals of about the same width, traversed by one to three (generally two) sharp threads. Earlier whorls have three primary spirals parted by intervals bearing a single strong thread, and still earlier the threads disappear from the intervals. Internal casts show well rounded whorls, the last just mentionably flattened above the periphery, faintly angular at the junction of the outer with the basal regions, the latter less convex but hardly flat- tened. Length 31, greatest diameter about 12 mm. (from largest mould). Described from external moulds and internal casts, which alone are preserved in the rather hard limestone, which contains, besides numerous Turritellas, the remains of Cardiwm and Pinna?, and some included pebbles. A fragmentary mould of the basal volution of a somewhat larger specimen than the type shows the basal sculpture of numerous un- equal and quite low cords, with some radial growth-wrinkles. The general figure is that of the Chilian 7. cingulata Sowb., but the details of sculpture differ. CARDIUM sp. undet. One very imperfect valve of a species prob- ably resembling muwricatum or consors. PECTEN ACTINODEs Sowerby. OsTR#A FERARRESI Orb. Larger than d’Orbigny’s types, the larg- est measuring 12°5 cm. long, 10°5 wide. There is also less cren- ulation of the valve edges than the type shows. OstRmA n.sp.? A rather thin, straight-beaked oyster, not corre- sponding well with any of the described species. One specimen. Pinna (?) Mere fragments in a refractory matrix. MAGELLANIA VENOSA Solander. Abundant. There were also moulds of crab or lobster chele. Trophon inornatus. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 331 AvcGust 17. Mr. BENJAMIN SmirH LyMAN in the Chair. A paper entitled “The North American Species of Argia (Order Odonata),” by Philip P. Calvert was presented for publication. The death of J. Sergeant Price, a member, on the 16th inst. was announced. Avueust 24. Mr. BensaAMIn Suita LyMAN in the Chair. Eight persons present. Auveust 31. Mr. Usetma C. Smiru in the Chair. Eleven persons present. A paper entitled “ Description of Two New Species of Cerion” by H. A. Pilsbry and E. G. Vanatta was presented for publication. 332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. SEPTEMBER 7. Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair. Fourteen persons present. SEPTEMBER 14. Mr. CHarves P. Peror in the Chair. Twenty-nine persons present. A paper entitled “The Annual Molt of the Sanderling,” by Witmer Stone, was presented for publication. Scalpellum and Balanus from Texas.—Mr. Piuspry exhibited fossil valves of Scalpellum and Balanus collected in Texas by Mr. Charles W. Johnson, and described the former as follows: SCALPELLUM CHAMBERLAINI n.sp. Tergum (fig. 1) very thick and strong, of very irregular contour, the scutal and carinal mar- gins subparallel. Apex conspicuously recurved ; occludent margin very convex; carinal margin sigmoid, being markedly concave from the apex two-thirds of the distance to basal angle, then bending in the opposite direction; scutal margin slightly sinuous, nearly straight, along the portion adjacent to the scu- tum, then abruptly deflected, the two-fifths near- est carina running upward to the basal or distal angle. Sculpture consists of well-marked, fine. ce growth-strize and radial ribs and striz ; the prin- Fie J cipal radii are (1) a strong curved rib from apex ee to basal or distal angle, (2) a sharper but more slender rib running to the angle on the scutal margin, (38) a low, wide rib along the occludent edge, and (4) a low, often obscure rib running between (2) and (3), and producing a slight sinuosity in the scutal margin. Besides these. radial ribs, there are numerous © fine radial lines throughout. Inside the surface is nearly smooth, a trifle excavated mesially or below, rising into a heavy callous ridge near the scutal margin, and equally thick along the occludent border. The apex is slightly free, with a small area sculptured with recession lines. Dimensions: length of occludent margin 14 mm. ; length of valve from middle of occludent margin to basal or distal angle 24 mm. Locality and horizon: Berryman’s Place, three miles northeast of Alto, Cherokee Co., Texas, Lower Claiborne Eocene., Four terga were collected by Mr. Johnson at the above-mentioned locality, all being from the left side. No other plates were found. 1897. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 333 The irregular shape of the tergum, exceptionally convex, occludent and concave, carinal margin, and unusual angulation of the scutal margin are sufficiently unusual features to insure recognition of the species, although the tergum is generally one of the less satisfactory plates for description. ‘The discovery of the carina will be looked for with interest, as the position of the species in the genus cannot be predicated without a knowledge of that valve. The species is respectfully dedicated to the Rev. Leander Trow- bridge Chamberlain, D. D., whose liberal and enlightened interest in the “ Lea Collection of Eocene Mollusca” must be regarded as one of the important factors in the present revival of the study of American tertiary paleontology. A single scutum of Balanus was collected by Mr. Johnson from the Eocene of Black Shoals, Brazos River, Texas. It is somewhat worn, and the species remains doubtful until further remains come to light. SEPTEMBER 21. The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Twenty-seven persons present. SEPTEMBER 28. The President, SamuEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. Twenty persons present. The death of Johannes Japetus Smith Steenstrup, a Correspon- dent, June 20, 1897, was announced. - The following were elected members :— Thomas H. Conarroe, M. D., G. A. Mueller and Mrs. Catherine Mueller. The following was ordered to be printed :— 334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. NEW AND LITTLE-KNOWN NORTH AMERICAN BEES, BY T. D. A. COCKERELL. Osmia viridimicans n. sp. Q. Length 12 mm., brilliant peacock-green, the pubescence entirely black. Head large, thorax ordinary, abdomen somewhat elongate, the straight sides almost parallel, but slightly diverging to the fourth segment ; after which the sides rapidly converge, meeting at the apex at about a right angle. The light shines on the abdomen in such a way as to give the impression of deep sutures, which in fact do not exist. Punctuation ordinary, punctures of vertex and meso- thorax distinct and separable. Basal area of mesothorax with its lower portion smooth and shining. Lower part of face bluer than the vertex; cheeks broader than eyes; black pubescence of face tolerably abundant ; front edge of clypeus black, straight, not produced at sides; mandibles 4-dentate ; tegul green; wings smoky, hyaline, apical margin broadly darker, no dark streak in marginal cell; first recurrent nervure reaching second submarginal cell a very short distance from its base, second recurrent reaching it at the beginning of the apical fourth; legs bright green, the tarsi black ; ventral scopa entirely black. Hab—Olympia, Wash., one 9, June 5, 1895 (T. Kincaid). Readily known by its large size and the characters italicized. Mr. Fox sends me a Nevada example of Q. mawra, which though en- tirely black, has the same form as viridimicans, and agrees in hav- ing the second recurrent nervure reaching the second submarginal cell quite at the beginning of the apical fourth. . Osmia cobaltina Cresson, 1878. Three 9s from Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896 (T. Kincaid), are of a very beautiful deep blue color, and agree with Cresson’s descrip- tion. Osmia kincaidii n. sp. 9. Length 6 to 8 mm., brilliant peacock-green, the pubescence very sparse, black and dirty white mixed. Head large, thorax sub- globose, abdomen short and oval. Punctuation ordinary, punctures distinctly separated on mesothorax, closer and largely confluent on 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 335 vertex. Facial triangle higher than broad; the face may be all blue, or green with the lower portion blue; the thin pubescence, even on the clypeus, is black and pale intermixed; cheeks about as broad as eyes; antennze wholly dark ; anterior edge of clypeus a little produced, black, broadly truncate, sometimes a little depressed in middle; mandibles with two large teeth, the third tooth, if pres- ent, is not visible when they are closed; thorax with mixed black and pale hairs, especially long on scutellum; basal area of meta- thorax minutely granular, not shining; tegule punctured, green with sometimes a purple spot; wings smoky ; nervures black ; first recurrent neryure joining second submarginal cell a little less than one-third from its base, second joining it a little less than one-fourth from the apex; legs green, tarsi black, hind tarsi sometimes sub- metallic on basal joint ; dorsal surface of abdomen almost nude, the sparse short pubescence mixed black and pale; ventral scopa wholly black. $. Length 53 to 8 mm., bright bottle-green, that is, a much yel- lower green than the @. Pubescence of head and thorax more copious, nowhere mixed with black; creamy white on clypeus, cheeks beneath, femora and lower part of thorax, pale ochreous on vertex and dorsum of thorax, especially scutellum; wings a little clearer; tarsi more distinctly metallic; the scanty pubescence of abdomen all light; sixth dorsal segment barely notched, seventh strongly emarginate ; seventh ventral segment greenish-blue, large, its hind margin rounded, with pale pubescence. Hab.—Olympia and Seattle, Wash. (T. Kincaid). The speci- mens can be separated into two general series, one larger, the other smaller and with more globose abdomen. After careful study, I fail to find specific characters separating these, but if it should be subsequently held that they are different, the type is to be consid- ered the larger form. The females are, with one exception, of the larger size; the males are, with three exceptions, of the smaller ; both forms were taken at the same time and locality. The exact data are as follows : Seattle: 1 9 May 14, 1897, on Rubus ursinus; 1 ¢ April 14, 1897, on sand bank; 1 ¢ April 18, 1897. Olympia: 6 9,3 June Ist, one June 2d, one June 21st, one July Ist. 13 ¢, one May 11th, two May 5th, one May 23rd, three May 25th, one May 28th, one June 13th, two April 25th, on Fragaria ; two April 22d, on Taraxacum. 336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. The female of O. kincaidii is easily separable from anything de- scribed, by its brilliant color, small size,and partly pale pubescence on thorax and face. The ¢ is not so easily separated, and should be compared with exigua from California, bel/a from Colorado, and illinoensis from Illinois. It agrees with Cresson’s description of exigua except that none of the specimens are quite so small, and the tarsi are not testaceous, but black with a metallic tint, the last joint rufescent or wholly dark. From bella it will be known at once by the absence of black pubescence on the abdomen. From illinoensis it differs by the distinctly infuscated wings, the second submarginal cell not longer than first, the abdominal pubescence not subfuscous. It is quite possible that the present species may eventually prove to be a northern, larger and darker race of the Californian exiqgua, but it is desirable to distinguish it, whether as a species or as a race. It is to be remarked that Provancher (Add. Faun. Hym., p.330) records a male from Ottawa, attributed to O. exigua. I cannot think it likely that this identification is correct, but it is impossible to reach any definite conclusion, since Provancher’s description ap- pears to be simply a translation of Cresson’s. It may be that he had illinoensis before him. The body-colors of both sexes of O. fulgida (Colorado examples sent by Mr. Fox) agree with the colors of the corresponding sexes of kincaidii, but fulgida, while about as broad as kineaidii, is conspic- uously longer, the abdomen being shaped more like that of viridi- micans. Osmia bella Cresson, 1878. A é& specimen from Olympia, Wash., June 19, 1895 (T. Kin- eaid), must be referred to bella, but it represents a variety with darker wings, and the apical pubescence of the second ventral seg- ment pale. It is of a brilliant green color, and is conspicuously larger than the males of kincaidii. The black pubescence on the apical portion of the abdomen is very evident. The second sub- marginal cell is noticeably longer than the first on the cubital nerv- ure. Robertson’s illinoensis must be very near to bella. A Colo- rado bella from Cresson’s series, lent by Mr. Fox, is somewhat smaller than the Olympia example, distinctly bluer, and the second submarginal cell is only about as long as the first on the cubital nervure. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307 Osmia calla n. sp. 6. Length 8 to 9 mm., stoutly built, Augochlora-green. This almost exactly resembles the Olympia form of bella, but is, per- haps, a very slightly yellower-green, while the dorsal pubescence of the abdomen is entirely white, and the second submarginal cell is not longer than the first on the cubital nervure. The ocelli are a little further apart, and the teeth of the seventh abdominal segment seem to average longer. The pubescence of the inner side of the basal joints of the tarsi is fuscous, not black. Other distinguishing features of O. calla are as follows: Pubes- cence throughout dull white, sometimes perceptibly tinged with ochraceous, nowhere mixed with black. Antenne entirely black ; clypeus ordinary. Punctures of mesothorax very close; tegule wholly green ; basal area of metathorax ill-defined, minutely rough- ened, not shining; wings smoky-hyaline, first recurrent nervure joining second submarginal cell at about the end of the basal third, second not far from the apex; legs green, tarsi piceous; sixth ab- dominal segment notched feebly or quite distinctly, but never entire ; second ventral segment large, purplish, rather densely fringed at apex with pale ochraceous-tinged pubescence. Hab.—Olympia, Wash., 3 ¢, May 25th and June 17, 1894 (T. Kineaid). This has much the characters of ¢ kincaidii, but is conspicuously larger and bulkier than the largest males of that spe- cies. The antenne in kincaidii are longer in proportion to the size of the head. While in color and length O. calla agrees with 3 fulgida from Colorado, calla is much broader than fulgida, so that the two have quite a different appearance. The breadth of the ab- domen in calla is 3 mm., in fulgida ¢ 23. Osmia bruneri n. sp. Q. Length 9 mm., brilliant blue-green, the clypeus, legs and margins of abdominal segments shining purple. This may be only arace of cobaltina, from which it differs in being green instead of blue. The pubescence and ventral scopa are black, but dirty white hairs are intermixed slightly on the vertex, quite conspicuously on the dorsum of thorax, and also on the first abdominal segment. Compared with the Pasco cobaltina, the spurs of hind tibize are con- siderably larger and stouter, curved at the end, and the submargi- nal cells are both longer. The wings are strongly infuscated, and the second submarginal cell is, perhaps, a little longer than the first on the cubital nervure. 338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. From the Colorado O. fulgida’ and viridis, O. bruneri will be known by the green tegulz, and the partly light pubescence of tho- rax. It may possibly be the unknown female of O. bella, but there is no way of determining whether this is the case at present. Hab.—Colorado Springs, Colo. (L. Bruner, no. 19). Osmia inurbana Cresson, 1878. $. 7 to 11 mm. long; dark brassy-green. Sixth segment of abdo- men distinctly notched. Pubescence rather copious, tinged with och- reous on dorsum. 37 examples, Olympia and Seattle, Wash. (T. Kincaid). There is some variation, but they seem to be all one spe- cies; the extremes of size are connected by intermediates. The Seattle specimens were taken on April 17th and 18th, one in May ; eight are from Seattle, the rest from Olympia. The Olympia dates run from April 20th to May 25th. One was on Fragaria April 25th. A Colorado inurbana, sent by Mr. Fox, is like our medium sized examples. Osmia odontogaster n. sp. : é. Length 9 to 10 mm.; stoutly built, head of ordinary size, abdomen suboval ; dark brassy-green, metathorax bluer ; pubescence tolerably dense, ochraceous on head and thorax, very dense and cream color on clypeus, nowhere mixed with black, nigrofuscous on inner sides of basal joints of middle and hind tarsi, ochraceous on base and apex of abdomen, short and fuscous on second, third and fourth segments, and on the basal portion of fifth, varying to griseous; third and following segments mofe or less distinctly fringed with pale or ochraceous hairs; punctuation of head and thorax strong but extremely dense, becoming sparser on middle of scutellum, which is thus a little shiny ; basal area of metathorax with its lateral in- ferior margins shining ; punctuation of abdomen less dense, ordinary, leaving the surface shining. Face rather long and narrow; antennz of only moderate length, flagellum dull rufous beneath ; clypeus ordinary; mandibles witha large pointed terminal blade, and a broad rounded inner tooth; tegule black, shining, punctured; wings smoky-hyaline, a little darker on apical margin, no distinct cloud or streak in marginal cell ; second submarginal somewhat shorter than the first on cubital +A fulgida from Colorado, sent by Mr. Fox, has the thoracic pubescence pale brownish, probably faded. It is, however, a much narrower and longer insect than bruneri, the abdomen being of the elongate parallel-sided type, whereas bruneri has it of the oval type. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339 nervure; first recurrent nervure joining second submarginal cell nearly at the end of its basal third, second at the beginning of the apical fourth or a little beyond; legs black, basal joint of hind tarsus broad, truncate at the end; sixth segment of abdomen with the margin entire, seventh emarginate ; second ventral segment with its hind margin fringed with long pale hairs, and presenting medially a large and prominent tooth, directed backward, shaped like the term- inal joint of a finger, but having a longitudinal groove. Hab.—Olympia, Wash., 5 &, May 10th and 25th, June 1st and 18, 1894 (T. Kincaid). This might be taken for inurbana, but its abdominal characters at once distinguish it. Osmia nanula n. sp. @. Length 7 to 8 mm.; stoutly built, short, with the abdomen broad-oval. Color of head, thorax and abdomen dark greenish- blue; legs, mandibles and antenne black. Pubescence black, with ochraceous on sides of face, on occiput about tubercles, slightly on mesothorax, quite densely along hind border of scutellum, on sides of metathorax, on lateral hind borders of the first three abdominal segments, especially the first, thinly along whole hind borders of four and five, very sparsely on surface of sixth, and on first four tarsi behind. The black hairs on the scutellum are considerably ‘longer than the ochraceous ones, and are placed in front of them. Ventral scopa all black. Hairs on inner side of basal joint of hind tarsi dark fuscous. Pubescence of clypeus black, sparse, its ante- rior margin and the mandibles with some orange-rufous hairs. The ochraceous pubescence of the thorax, in fresh specimens, is quite bright, almost orange-rufous. Punctuation ordinary, punctures of vertex and mesothorax large, very close, but not all confluent, the abdomen is quite shiny. Head fairly but not excessively large, clypeus ordinary, mandibles triden- tate ; tegule shining black, with a submetallic tinge in front: wings dusky, broad apical margin and upper half of marginal cell con- spicuously darker: second submarginal cell noticeably shorter than first on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure reaching second submarginal cell just before the end of its proximal third, second very near its tip. Hab.—Seattle, Wash., 4 9, April 17th, May 11th and 19th (T. Kincaid) ; Olympia, Wash.,5 9, May 28rd, June Ist, 19th and 30th (T. Kincaid), A @ taken by Mr. Kincaid at Olympia, 340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Wash., differs by having a brassy-green abdomen; it appears to be only a variety of this species. I have not described the ¢ of O. nanula, but I have before me a series of nine males, collected by Mr. Kincaid at Seattle and Olympia, which I believe belong here. They average slightly smaller than the females, and are of a brassy-green color. They might readily be confused with small examples of inurbana, but the siath abdominal segment is entire or very feebly notched. The dor- sal pubescence of the thorax and head is quite brightly colored, and not mixed with black. The smaller size and the absence of the ventral tooth at once separate them from odontogaster. Osmia tristella n. sp. Q@. Length7 to 8 mm., of ordinary build, the abdomen somewhat longer than in O. nanula. Head, thorax and abdomen dark indigo blue; legs, mandibles and antennz black. Head of ordinary size, not so large as in nanula. Pubescence black, not dense, long on head and thorax, white just behind wings and at sides of first ab- dominal segment subbasally ; there is also some obscure white or whitish pile on the last dorsal segment of the abdomen. The pubescence of the face, vertex, thoracic dorsum and ventral scopa is wholly black, The abdominal segments between the first and last are shining, and present some short pile, wholly black except for an oceasional short pale hair. The pubescence of the legs is all black. Punctuation ordinary, very dense on vertex and mesothorax; basal area of metathorax minutely roughened, not shining. Clypeus or- dinary ; tegule black. Wings pale fuscous; second submarginal cell about as long as the first on the cubital nervure; first recur- rent nervure joining second submarginal cell at the end of its basal sixth, second at the beginning of its apical sixth. Hab.—Olympia, Wash., 2 2, one June 30th (T. Kincaid); Seattle, Wash., 4 9, April 18th and May 11th (T. Kincaid). This might be confused with nanula, but is easily separated by the char- acters italicized. Osmia cyanella n. sp. 9. Length 9 mm., stoutly built, very broad, with a large sub quadrate head. The thorax is especially broad, the distance between the wings being much greater than in tristella or nanula. The ab- domen is suboval. Color of head, thorax and abdomen dark indigo blue; legs, antennze and mandibles black. Pubescence, including 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341 ventral scopa, black, but there are some shining pale hairs along the hind margin of the scutellum, and sparsely on the abdominal dorsum ; the extreme apex of the abdomen, the anterior edge of the clypeus, and the outer surface of the mandibles exhibit some orange pile ; the pubescence of the tarsi, especially the anterior ones, is also more or less of a pale orange tint. The hairs of the face and vertex are wholly black, and the tuft just behind the wings is black. Punctua- tion ordinary, not quite so dense as in some related species; ocelli light yellowish, clypeus ordinary; tegulz shining black; wings smoky ; second submarginal cell perhaps a very little longer than first on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure reaching second submarginal cell slightly before the end of its basal third, second very near its end. Hab.—Olympia, Wash., May 23, 1894 (T. Kincaid). Resembles tristella, but easily known by the characters italicized. Osmia trevoris n. sp. @. Length 8 mm., stoutly built, head quite large, abdomen short and broad. The thorax is by no means so broad as in cyanella. Head, thorax, and abdomen very dark blue, the two latter a slightly greenish-blue, yet bluer than in nanula; legs, mandibles and anten- nz black. Pubescence of head black, except some fulvous on occi- put, hairs of face long, all black; pubescence of pleura black, of thoracic dorsum moderately dense, and orange-fulvous, with a few dark hairs intermixed, not readily notived ; tuft behind wings orange- fulvous; hairs of femora and tibiz short and black, or tarsi dull fulvous ; dorsal pubescence of the abdomen entirely black, except a thin, pale fulvous fringe along the hind margins of the segments, only noticed in certain lights; ventral scopa ali black. Punctua- ‘tion ordinary, punctures of vertex and mesothorax close but separ- able. Clypeus ordinary; tegule black; wings dusky hyaline, with the broad outer margin and the upper part of the marginal cell con- spicuously darker; second submarginal cell a little longer than first on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure joining second submar- ginal cell at about the end of its basal third, second a very short dis- tance before its tip. Hab.—Seattle, Wash., May 19, 1896 (Trevor Kincaid). This is closely related to O. nanula, but it is somewhat broader, with a larger head, and lacks the pale pubescence at sides of face, while the pubescence of the thoracic dorsum is dense and much more highly colored; the abdomen, also, is less globose. 0. trevoris ree 23 342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. sembles a good deal in color and form O. cerasi from New Mexico, but it is smaller than that; the thoracic pubescence is by no means so bright, and the dorsal abdominal pubescence of cerasi is entirely black, except on the first segment, where it is pale fulvous, usually mixed with black. Osmia propinqua Cresson, 1864. I have before me 8 females, sent by Mr. T. Kincaid; two from Seattle, Wash., May 11 and 14, 1897, on Rubus ursinus; one from Comas I., Wash., June 18, 1896, collected by N. L. Gardner; five from Olympia, Wash., May 9 and 23, and June 1 and 2. Osmia subornata n. sp. Q. Length 14 mm., stoutly built, rather shiny, pure black; head large, subquadrate, abdomen short and broad; pubescence of face and vertex entirely black, with sometimes a few pale hairs about the insertion of the antenne, of cheeks and pleura dark griseofuscous to almost black, of thoracic dorsum black on disc, with a pale band be- fore and behind, the anterior band not very distinct, reaching from tubercle to tubercle, the posterior occupying the scutellum, and very distinct, but having black hairs intermixed. The color of these hair-bands is very pale ochraceous. A tuft of pale ochraceous hairs behind the wings. Pubescence of legs entirely black, or a little fuscous on anterior basis. Pubescence of abdominal dorsum black, some rather obscure pale hairs on sides of first segment, and the apex always noticeably clothed with appressed pale pubescence. Ventral scopa entirely black. Punctuation strong, but rather sparse for an Osmia. Inner orbits carinate; clypeus produced and very broadly truncate ; mandibles very broad ; tegule black; wings pale fuscous, second submarginal cell about as long as first on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure reaching second submarginal cell a little before the end of the basal third, second near the tip; spurs of hind tibiz stout and curved at tips. Hab.—Olympia, Wash., June 1, 2 and 12 (T. Kincaid). This is a submelanic representative of O. bucephala and O. megacephala, having the same general structure and appearance. There is, how- ever, no blue or green tint, and the pubescence is more black, and the wings are quite dark. The apical tooth of the mandibles is short. Osmia pascoensis n. sp. Q@. Length about 15 mm., stoutly built; black, the abdomen with a perceptible blue tinge. Head large, but not so large as 2 BO ots 1 Pa, gee 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343 thorax. Pubescence of head entirely black, except a yellowish- white fringe on occipital margin; of thoracic dorsum cream-colored, with longer black hairs intermixed ; of sides of thorax black ; a cream- colored tuft on tubercles and one behind wings, but the hairs of sides of metathorax below that black. Pubescence of legs black, shining fuscous on inner side of anterior tarsi. Pubescence of first abdominal segment cream-color, not mixed with black, of the re- maining segments black, scopa wholly black. Tegule black. Wings dull hyaline, with the broad apical margin and the marginal cell conspicuously darkened. Second submarginal cell a little longer than first on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure joining second submarginal cell a little before the end of the basal third, second at the beginning of the apical sixth. Punctuation strong and quite dense on head and thorax; sparse on abdomen. Anterior margin of elypeus truncate, crenulated or ribbed, the sides of the truncation sloping away, the angle at the corners a very obtuse one. Apical tooth of mandibles very long, curved. Spurs of hind tibie rather slender and straight. Hab.—Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896 (T. Kincaid). Closely allied to several species. From subornata it may be known by the somewhat larger size, the blue tint of the abdomen, the long apical tooth of mandibles, the straight and more slender spurs of hind tibize, the absence of the black dorsal pubescence of the thorax, ete. From bucephala and megacephala by the smaller head, entirely black pubescence of face, etc.: from nigrifrons by the larger size. It agrees very nearly with Cresson’s description of nigrifrons, and may represent a northwestern subspecies of that insect. Osmia grandior n. sp. Q. Length about 16 mm. Closely resembles O. pascoensis in all respects but the following: Head smaller ; clypeus dull and rough- ened (in pascoensis shiny, with well separated punctures) ; apical tooth of mandibles shorter; two conspicuous brushes of orange hair beneath the margin of the clypeus; vertex with smaller and closer punctures; vertex and whole of thoracic dorsum covered with pale fulvous hair, rather dense and not mixed with black ; brush of hairs behind wings black ; metathorax tinged with bluish; pubescence of first abdominal segment black with pale hairs intermixed ; appressed pubescence of last segment fuscous; pubescence of first four tarsi shining reddish fulvous; marginal cell and second submarginal 344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. shorter ; abdomen somewhat longer. The clypeus is quite ordinary, its margip straight. Hab—Olympia, Wash., May 10,1894 (T. Kineaid). This would be easily confused with pascoensis, if attention were not paid to the details italicized. It is apparently the representative, in the north- west, of the Colorado juata and longula. The blue tint and the color of the thoracic pubescence at once separates it from swbornata. Osmia subpurpurea n. sp. Q. Length about 14 mm., relatively slender, dark steel blue, the legs, antennze and mandibles black. Head subquadrate, rather large, at least as broad as the thorax. Pubescence of face dull white with a slight yellow tinge, with numerous black hairs intermixed ; of cheeks pale; of vertex long, thin and mostly black ; of thoracie dorsum white with a slightly yellowish tinge, with longer black hairs intermixed; of pleura sparse, dull white; of sides of meta- thorax copious, white; of legs short and black, with some dull white on femora behind, and dark fuscous on tarsi; of first abdominal segment dull white and quite abundant; of remaining segments very short, dark, hardly noticeable, except that the hind margins of segments 2 to 5 present each a thin and narrow, but very visible, white hair-band, and the short pile of the apical segment is pale. Ventral scopa entirely black. Punctuation of vertex strong, but not so close as to hide the shining surface; of mesothorax very close, the surface appearing roughened, dull and dark ; of abdomen minute and sparse enough to leave a very shiny surface. Basal area of metathorax dullish, with no high lights. Cheeks nearly twice as broad as eyes; antennze short; clypeus ordinary, anterior margin straight; apical tooth of mandibles moderately long; hind spur of hind tibia stout, and curved at tip; outer end of middle tibia ending in an outwardly projecting spine; the same with anterior tibie ; tegule black ; wings dusky; second submarginal cell about as long (perhaps a little shorter) as first on cubital nervure ; first recurrent nervure joining second submarginal cell at about the end of its basal third, second nearly at its end. Hab.—Olympia, Wash., May 25, 1894 (T. Kineaid). Larger than O. faceta, and differs by the formation of the clypeal margin, ete. It is also allied to O. purpurea, but differs in its much greater size and in the pubescence. Osmia atrocyanea n. sp. Q@. Length about 113 mm., moderately robust, sides of abdomen subparallel, head fairly large. Head, thorax and abdomen indigo- 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345 blue, with a greenish tint on the dorsum of thorax and parts of the abdomen; legs, mandibles and antennz black. Pubescence rather thin, entirely black except a very few scattered pale hairs near the tubercles, on scutellum, and sides of metathorax, and rather more on first abdominal segment. Ventral scopa entirely black. Punctua- tion ordinary, punctures of mesothorax dense but not confluent, of abdomen rather close but leaving a shining surface; median line of mesothorax distinct, basal area of metathorax moderately shiny ; antenns short; clypeus ordinary, anterior margin entire; apical tooth of mandibles very short ; tegule black ; wings smoky, paler along the nervures; second submarginal cell about as long as first on cubital nervure ; first recurrent nervure reaching second submar- ginal cell a little before the end of its basal third, second just after the beginning of its apical sixth. Hab— Olympia, Wash., July 4, 1896 (T. Kineaid). Seems near to O. brevis, but differs in the color of the pubescence, larger size, ete. Osmia brevis Cress, An authentic Colo. 2 specimen, sent by Mr. Fox, does not have the head as large as one would imagine from Cresson’s description. The pubescence of the pleura is brownish-black. The abdomen is of a fine dark shining indigo-blue. The second submarginal cell is longer than the first on the cubital nervure; the first recurrent nervure joins the second submarginal cell somewhat before the end of its basal third, the second quite near its tip. At Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896, Mr. T. Kincaid took a couple of ¢ , agreeing with the Colorado insect, though having the second submarginal cell a little shorter. At Olympia, Wash., June 24, July 7, ete., Mr. Kincaid has taken in numbers a species like brevis, but with a more convex, very shiny, dark prussian green abdomen ; I supposed it to be a different species, but leave it for the present with this allusion. It is quite possibly the 2 of inurbana or odontogaster. At Pasco, May 25, 1896, Mr. Kineaid also took a couple of males which it seems safe to refer to brevis, although the ¢ of that insect has not been described. The abdomen is indigo-blue like the 9, but narrow and more shiny ; antennz wholly black, reaching about to scutellum ; pubescence of face, vertex and thoracic dorsum yel- lowish-white, rather copious; of cheeks, pleura and sides of meta- thorax black; wings quite hyaline, except a slight stain in the upper part of the marginal cell; dorsal pubescence of abdomen all 346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. black except on first segment; ventral pubescence black, a pale median patch just beyond apex of second segment; sixth dorsal segment entire. This ¢ is like O. montana from Pike’s Peak, but is separated by the entire sixth segment of abdomen. ee ——e Osmia proxima Cresson. This is considered to be the ¢ of atriventris; it was described from Maine and British America. At Olympia, Wash., June 24, 1895, Mr. T. Kineaid took a ¢ which is evidently conspecific with an authentic Canadian proxima sent by Mr. Fox. This insect will be recognized by its small size, large head, short subglobose thorax and abdomen, and shining dark blue-green color. The hind margins of the abdominal segments are inclined to be edged with testaceous— in the Olympia insect this is quite conspicuous. The antennz are long, and the flagellum is more or less brownish or rufescent be- neath. The tegule are greenish in front. The wings are hyaline. Sixth abdominal segment notched. Osmia faceta Cresson. @. One collected at Olympia, Wash., June 2, by Mr. T. Kincaid, agrees with an authentic Canadian example lent by Mr. Fox. Itis a little greener than that from Canada, but the specific characters are the same. It is especially to be noted that while the ventral scopa is black, there is white hair on the extreme lateral margin of the abdomen, which may run along the margins of the dorsal seg- ments a little way, forming rudimentary bands. The mandibles have a conspicuous subapical band of orange-rufous hair. Osmia densa Cresson. I have before me an authentic @ from Colorado, sent by Mr. Fox. It is much like atrocyanea, but the pubescence of the sides of the metathorax and of the tubercles is all white, while it is black in atrocyanea. In densa the pubescence of the pleura is scanty and white, in atrocyanea it is black. O. atrocyanea has a larger thorax and a somewhat larger head than densa. The following table sep- arates a series of females having the general appearance of densa ; in all, the ventral scopa is black. ’ A. Pubescence of pleura, tubercles and sides of metathorax white. a. Pubescence of clypeus and sides of abdomen white . . faceta, Cr. b. Pubescence of clypeus black, sides of abdomen without conspic- uous white pubescence, though there are some white hairs, ‘densa, Cr. (O. densa was taken at Olympia, Wash., by Mr. T. Kincaid, June 19.) 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 347 B. Pubescence of pleura black. a. Pubescence of scutellum black, with a few pale hairs intermixed, of sides of metathorax black ; head strongly blue, atrocyanea, Ckll. b. Pubescence of scutellum light, with, at most, a few dark hairs in- termixed ; head less blue, clypeus black or almost so, nigrifrons, Cr. (An authentic specimen from Colorado, sent me by Mr. Fox; one from Colorado Springs, Colo., sent by Prof. L. Bruner ; one from Olympia, Wash., May 25, sent by Mr. T. Kincaid.) Synhalonia edwardsii (Cresson, 1878). This is evidently common at Olympia, Wash., and is sent in num- bers by Mr. T. Kincaid. Cresson describes only the 3; the 9 is from 14 to 16 mm. long, and differs from that of S. frater by its mouse-colored thoracic pubescence and by the abdominal bands, which, though very white, are reduced to two, on the third and fourth segments, that on the third interrupted in the middle. The second segment has a small white patch on each extreme side. A Seattle 9 has the thoracic pubescence ochraceous as in frater, but the abdominal characters remain quite distinct. One Olympia 9? has an interrupted band on the second segment. Within what must be considered the specific limits of S. edwardsii there are, in Wash- ington State, two distinct types :— (a.) Race latior. 3. Facial quadrangle not far from a square, sides of the clypeal yellow, gradually sloping above, distance be- tween the yellow and the eyes quite considerable. Olympia and Seattle. (b.) Race angustior. ¢. Face conspicuously longer than broad. Sides of clypeal yellow, above squarely notched, distance be- tween the yellow and the eyes extremely small; pubescence somewhat paler. 9. Smaller, with paler pubescence, abdo- men with the white bands on the fourth and fifth (instead of third and fourth) segments, that on the fifth fuscous in the middle, but brilliant white at the sides, a white mark on each side of third, apical segment white at sides. Wings clearer. Pasco. The exact data are as follows :— Race latior. Olympia, 18%, April 24, May 2,10, 11, 17, 21, 23, 20; June 5; 199, June 1, 5, 11, 18, 19, 21, 24, 25, 29, July 4: Seattle, 3 ¢, April 17, May 3; 29, both May 19 CT. Kincaid). Two Olympian ¢s are from Lupinus. 348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF isor Race angustior. Pasco,5¢,29, all taken May 25, 1896 (T. Kin- caid). Synhalonia lycii n. sp. Q. Length 13 to 142 mm.; general form, size and structure of S. frater, which might be readily confused with it on superficial ex- amination. On comparing /ycii with an Illinois example of frater received from Mr. Robertson, the following differences are at once apparent :— S. frater 9. S. lyeti @. Segments 2-5 of abdomen with Segments 2 and 3 of abdomen distinct light bands; apex with with light bands; 4 and 5 sooty light brown pubescence. black, without light bands, or at most a very narrow apical gray band on 4; apex with black _ pubescence. Ventral surface of abdomen Ventral surface of abdomen with light pubescence. with black pubescence. Wings noticeably brownish. Wings clear. The above are conspicuous and constant distinctions: yet the head, thorax and legs of the two insects, with their pubescence, are virtually the same. Hab.—S. lycii oceurs in the Mesilla Valley, New Mexico, near the Agricultural College ; on Lycium torreyi, on the College Farm, April 16; on flowers of plum, College Farm, April 9. Miss Jessie Casad took one on lilac in Mesilla, April 14. Calliopsis scitulus Cresson, 1878. Santa Fé, N. M., July 7 (CkIl. 1,356) ; Sta. Fé, July 25, on Cleome serrulata (Ckll. 3,747). Also Colorado, collected by Prof. C. F. Baker (No. 1,595=Fort Collins, Aug. 8, 1895, and 1,592—Fort Col- lins, Aug. 8, 1895, on Cleome). In the specimens, Ckll. 1,356, the lateral marks of the clypeus are almost lacking; as also in Baker’s 1,592, which has only two spots on the fifth abdominal segment. I am not sure about the ¢ of C. scitulus; the above records all pertain to females. At Sta. Fé, on the same day as 1,356, I took a é which resembled, but was not identical with, C. pictipes Cresson. Prof. Baker sends a % taken at the same time and place as his 1,595 above, and it agrees sufficiently with Cresson’s description of pieti- 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349 pes to be conspecific. At all events, I think, one may say, that the 8 of scitulus is either pictipes or closely similar to it. A @ from Colorado (Baker 1,599—Fort Collins, Aug. 15, 1895, on Solidago canadensis) has the clypeus entirely black. Calliopsis australior n. sp. The ¢ of this so greatly resembles scitulus in every respect that it was long held to be a variety of it, and I only now separate it on observing that the differential characters are constant. The band on the third abdominal segment, usually entire in scitulus, is always interrupted, often quite widely ; the band on the fourth segment is usually entire, being the only entire band; the fifth segment is black, with neither band nor spots; the lateral face-marks are always much broader and shorter than in scitulus; the clypeus always has a pale stripe down the middle; otherwise the two insects are about the same. It is to be remarked that australior partakes of the charac- ters of the Californian C. edwardsti, which has the longitudinal clypeal mark but not the lateral marks on the clypeus, which are common to australior and scitulus. C. edwardsii is also a larger in- sect than scitu/us, whereas australior is of the same size. The 2 of australior I found in numbers visiting the flowers of Cleome serrulata at Albuquerque, N. M., Aug. 16; I also found it on the sand hills at Mesilla, N. M., May 29, numerously visiting the flowers of Dithyrea wislizeni Engelm. It also comes from Colorado, collected by Prof. C. F. Baker (No. 1,592—Fort Collins, Aug. 8, 1895, on Cleome). - The Colorado form has the abdominal markings more yellow than that from New Mexico. I am uncertain about the ¢ of australior, but Baker’s 1,591 (Fort Collins, Aug. 8, 1895, on Solidago canadensis) may belong there. It has the first joint of hind tarsus yellow, not greatly broadened, and with no conspicuous tuft of hairs at the tip. The face is all white below the level of the antennz, except a couple of black dots on clypeus, and one at apex of each dog-ear mark. The postscutellum and a transverse band on the scutellum are white. I took a closely similar ¢ at El Paso, Texas, May 13, 1897, three specimens. It has the face more narrowed below, and the abdomi- nal markings more reduced than in the Colorado insect. It was flying round Baccharis. Calliopsis personatus n. sp. &. Length 8mm. This also is a sort of modified scitulus, but the modification is in a different direction. The most obvious char- 350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. acter is that the face is entirely black, although there remains a white spot at the base of the mandibles. The abdomen has a spot on each side of the first two segments, a broadly interrupted band on the third, and an almost continuous one on the fourth, these markings being white. The fifth segment, as in australior, has neither band nor spots; the apical pubescence is entirely white. For the rest, the characters are practically as in scitulus. Hab.—Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896 (T. Kincaid). Calliopsis clypeatus Cresson, 1878. Cresson had only a single ¢. Prof. C. F. Baker has taken both sexes in Colorado (No. 1,581, on Laramie River, Larimer Co., 8,500 ft., July 19, 1895). The 9 is like the 3, except that the face is wholly dark : the antennz shorter, with the flagellum, after the third joint, dull ferruginous beneath; the abdomen broader, the apical portion with white pubescence, and the extreme apex with a broad, dense, ochreous brush. Calliopsis boylei Ckll., 1896. This is not rare at Santa Fé, New Mexico. It is also found in Colorado, a specimen before me was collected by Prof. C. F. Baker (No. 1,600). The Colorado form has a yellow line on the seape, and a study of it leads me to believe that C. boylei is probably only a variety of C. ornatipes (Cress., 1872). In the typical boylet from Sta. Fé, the scape is entirely black. Calliopsis coloradensis Cress., 1878. Santa Fé, N. M., on flowers of Grindelia squarrosa, Aug. 1 (Ckll. 4,029); and in Mr. Boyle’s garden, Aug. 10 (Ckll. 4,397). The face-marks are slightly tinged with pinkish, and the lateral marks do not go up so far as would seem to have been the case in Cresson’s type; yet the identity is evident. The specimens are females. Calliopsis andreniformis Smith, 1853, subsp. rhodophilus n. subsp. é. The legs, instead of being entirely yellow, have the femora with the basal two-thirds nearly all black, and all the tibiz with a black patch behind; sometimes the four hind tibize have a dark shade in front; the scape is entirely black, or may have a narrow yellow line in front; the yellow is paler throughout ; the thoracic pubescence is more scanty and grayish-white rather than ochraceous ; otherwise there is little or no difference. Q@. The face-marks are cream-color; no rudiments of dog-ear marks. wings clearer. This subspecies is more distinct in the ¢ than 9. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301 Hab.—Santa Fé, N. M.; females; July 27, 1895, at flowers of Spheralcea angustifolia; Aug. 5, Aug. 14, Aug. 14, July 25 on Spheralcea angustifolia ; Aug. 19,1894. Males: Aug., 1894; July 27, at flowers of Spheralcea angustifolia; Aug. 5, July 30, burrow- ing in damp soil, I saw it enter, and dug it out from end of burrow. Andrena kincaidii n. sp. ? 14 mm. long, black; head and thorax with short, dense, ochra- ceous pubescence; abdominal segments 2 to 4 with more or less broadly interrupted apical bands of pale ochraceous pubescence ; apex densely fringed with orange-rufous pubescence. Femora black, tibie and tarsi wholly ferruginous. Process of labrum truncate, subemarginate. Clypeus with rather large, not very dense punctures, and a median smooth longitudinal ridge or line. Mesothorax and scutellum distinctly but not very densely punctured, the punctures unevenly distributed ; basal area of metathorax rugose, ill-defined ; abdomen distinctly and quite closely, though not deeply, punctured. Antenne wholly black. Tegule rather dark testaceous. Wings strongly tinged with yellowish-ferruginous, the apical portion gray- ish, and the apex conspicuously blackish ; nervures and stigma ferru- ginous. Mandibles notched at end. $. About 11 mm. long, more slender, pubescence paler, some- times becoming whitish, no bands on abdomen ; clypeus lemon-yellow with two black spots; antennze wholly dark; tibize and tarsi all fer- ruginous asinthe 9. Hind-margins of abdominal segments becom- ing testaceous. Hab.—Olympia, Wash., very numerous specimens of both sexes sent by Mr. Kincaid. The dates for the females run from May 9 to June 29, for the males from May 25 to June 12. It is a very distinct species, at once known by the charactersitalicized. Rarely the @ exhibits a yellow spot on the clypeus, in the median line not far from the anterior margin. Andrena saliciflaris n. sp. 2. About 11 mm. long, black, the pubescence brownish-ochra- ceous. Head ordinary, face broad, facial quadrangle broader than long, pubescence of face fairly abundant; clypeus shining, but strongly and rather closely punctured, with a rather strawberry-like surface; basal process of labrum rounded; antennze black ; vertex with close shallow punctures, the surface minutely roughened; mesothorax dull, with tolerably close strong and very large punc- tures, median and parapoidal grooves distinct ; scutellum with large 352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. punctures, becoming smaller and very dense on its hindmost por- tion ; enclosure of metathorax ill-defined, irregularly longitudinally wrinkled ; pleura strongly and closely punctured ; tegulz piceous ; wings smoky-hyaline; nervures and stigma very dark brown or piceous; legs with brownish-ochraceous pubescence; basal joints of middle and hind tarsi rather broad ; abdomen strongly punctured, rather shiny, practically naked, except for some thin pubescence at base of first segment, lateral grayish-white patches on hind margins of segments 2 to 4 representing very broadly interrupted bands, and dense reddish-orange pubescence at theapex. Venter with three thin hair bands, é. Length 9 mm.; pubescence more abundant and rufous throughout, of quite a bright tint. Face an antenne wholly dark; band on fourth segment of abdomen entire, but very thin in the middle, and, like the other abdominal markings, orange-rufous. Abdomen not so closely or deeply punctured. Hab.—Olympia, Wash. (T. Kincaid). The @ May 9th; the ¢ April 4th, at willow blossom. In some respects this resembles A. pruni Rob., but it is quite distinct. Ceratina nanula n. sp. . Length 42 mm., shining, very dark bluish-green, brassy-green on the mesothorax. Legs concolorous except the tarsi, which are dark brownish, the small joints of anterior tarsi dull ferruginous. Antenne very dark brown; iegule brown. Wings hyaline, nerv- ures piceous. Tubercles, median third of labrum (but none of man- dibles) and clypeal mark cream color; the last is inversely T-shaped, the upright portion very broad, and longer than the arms. Pune- tuation ordinary, but the punctures of front and mesothorax large and sparse, leaving shining impunctured areas in the middle of the mesothorax and above the antenne. Abdomen ending in a short point. Hind femora produced beneath to an angle slightly greater than a right angle. Hab.—At flowers of Spheralcea angustifolia, Las Cruces, New Mexico, April 25th. Ceratina submaritima n. sp. g. Length about or nearly 6 mm.; differing from nanula in its larger size, longer antennz (wholly black, or dull ferruginous be- neath) ; the tubercles dark ; the elypeal mark with the upright por- tion short, much shorter than the long lateral portions ; the tegule 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 353 black; the wings somewhat dusky; the hind femora more _pro- duced below, the angle resulting less than a right angle. Hab.—Olympia, Wash., May 10th; also April 25th, at Fragaria (T. Kineaid). I have also before me a couple from Seattle, Wash., May 13th, from Mr. Dunning, marked “ Lot 214.” The two species described above differ at once from dupla and tejonensis in the 3, by having the abdomen terminated by a point ; the last ventral segment in both tejonensis and dupla is broadly rounded at the end. At one time I thought nanu/a might be OC. strenua Smith, but that cannot be, as Smith expressly states of strenua, ‘seventh segment rounded at the apex.” As regards the females, the distinctions are not so obvious. I have what I suppose to be females of nanula from Juarez, Las Cruces and Santa Fé, New Mexico; but except in being smoother and more shining (like the ¢) they do not appreciably differ from dupla, and it may well be that some of the larger examples (82 mm. long, Sta. Fé, July) belong really to dupla, though of this I cannot be sure until ¢ dupla has been caught at Sta. Fé, The ¢ of C. submaritina, which Mr. Kineaid took in some num- bers at Olympia, Wash., differs at once from the supposed 9 of nanula in having the elypeus entirely dark, or at most with a very small and obscurespot. C.acantha Prov., from Los Angeles, Calif., is described only from the @ ; it is too small for swbmaritima, its clypeus is said to have a median testaceous line. Perdita side n. sp. $. Length 4% to 54 mm. Head and thorax very dark metallic blue, obscurer and more inclined to greenish on mesothorax and scutellum, shining; the white pubescence moderately abundant. Head large, subquadrate, broader than thorax, and considerably broader than long; cheeks unarmed, but occasionally produced be- low into a prominent angle or incipient tooth. Clypeus broad and low, of the Panama-hat type; mandibles, except their dark tips, labrum, and face up to the level of antenne light yellow; supracly- peal yellow area broader than long; upper limit of the yellow im- mediately lateral to the antennz not as high as the top of the supraclypeal mark, but only reaching to the lower level of the antennal sockets, but rising as it approaches the orbit, to end at an angle of about 45° slightly above the upper level of the antennal socket. Antenne wholly deep orange; ocelli ina curve. Front above level of antenne with tolerably sparse but very distinct punc- 304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. tures; vertex shining, microscopically sculptured with very sparse punctures. Mesothorax sparsely punctured ; tubercles, and hind border of prothorax, more or less pale dull yellowish ; sometimes this is hardly noticeable. Tegule hyaline with a blackish spot ; wings hyaline, stigma and nervures white; stigma long and well- formed, marginal cell with its post-stigmatal portion longest, squarely truncate at end, with a very fine appendicular nervure. Second submarginal high, narrowed rather more than half to mar- ginal; third discoidal distinct. Anterior tibia and tarsi wholly lemon-yellow, anterior femora yellow suffused with brown; middle tarsi whitish; middle and hind femora and tibis, and hind tarsi, piceous; the middle femora in front, and the middle and hind knees, dull yellowish or whitish; middle femora angled below. Abdomen pale brown, the hind margins of the segments hyaline, the venter dull brownish-orange. @. Same size and form. Face wholly dark, except that the up- per edge of the elypeus is dull whitish, this coloration very incon- spicuous. Head not so large, transversely oval ; antennz shorter. Scape black, flagellum dull brownish-orange, infuscated at the base. Legs piceous, anterior tibize and tarsi obscurely dull yellow in front. Abdomen piceous above and below, without markings. Hab.—Mesilla, New Mexico, June 7th and 9, 1897, on flowers of Sida hederucea. They fly actively about the flowers, and in dull weather I found the males at rest in the flowers. Six males were taken, but only one 9. P. side $ runsin my table of Perdita (Proc. Phila. Acad., 1896) to the neighborhood of P. semicrocea, but it cannot be confused with anything described, if attention is paid to the characters italic- ized above. The @ is equally distinct. In the shape of the head, and the sexual difference in the color of the abdomen, P. side re- calls P. latior, but the marginal cell is entirely different. On June 7th, I took a single 9 of P. latior in a flower of Sida hederacea in Mesilla; it had probably wandered from an adjacent Spheralcea, as renewed search discovered no more of them. Perdita callicerata CkIl. Q. Larger than the ¢, length about 53 mm., clypeus entirely cream color, with the usual two black specks; lateral face-marks transversely subreniform, white, extending about as high as level of top of clypeus; antennz asin ¢; mesothorax darker and bluer; legs virtually asin ¢; lateral light marks of abdomen larger and squarer. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305 Hab.—Mesilla Valley, close to the Agricultural College, on flow- ers of Baileya multiradiata, May 21, 1897, both sexes taken. The g I have described previously ; the species is quite remarkable for having more light color on the face in the 9 thanin the ¢. The 2 of callicerata closely resembles the ¢ of albovittata, but differs at once by the color of the antennz, the yellow anterior tibiz, etc. ; the face-marks of the two are almost exactly alike. Perdita larree CkIl. var. modesta, n. var. $. Like the type, but head not nearly so large, being only about as big as the thorax. Hab.—Mesilla Valley, close to the Agricultural College, May 21, 1897, two at Larrea. Centris morsei n. sp. $. Length 21 mm., stoutly built, black, with pale ochraceous pubescence, very dense on thorax. Clypeus bright lemon-yellow, with anterior margin rufous; labrum yellow; mandibles dark rufous with black tips; scape without any yellow ; eyes sage-green, suffused with crimson at the extreme base ; facial quadrangle longer than broad, but of the broad type; wings dusky hyaline; tegule cream-color ; first abdominal segment with abundant pale pubes- cence; remaining dorsal segments uniformly and completely deli- cately pruinose-pubescent, producing a grayish appearance; apical margins of segments colorless or rather whitish-hyaline, extreme base of third segment, and of second segment at sides ferruginous, this ferruginous portion being overlapped by the white margin of the segment before. Venter with dense yellowish-white hairs ; apex with pale shining hairs, genitalia ferruginous. Compared with the $ of C. cesalpinie, which it most resembles, C. morsei is considerably larger, the thoracic pubescence inclines more to mouse color, and the pruinose-pubescent abdomen with its two more or less defined reddish bands is very different. In morsez the hind tarsi have a black brush on the inner side, but the abund- ant long pubescence is all ochraceous, not at all fuscous or blackish. The long hairs of the anterior tarsi are blackish, though shining, and appearing golden in certain lights. Hab.—Mesilla, New Mexico, bed of the Rio Grande, June 28, 1897. ‘Taken by Mr. A. P. Morse. 356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. OcTOBER 5. The President, SAamuEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. Thirty persons present. A paper entitled ‘‘ Volcanic Rocks of Mesozoic Age in Pennsyl- vania,” by Edward Goldsmith, was presented for publication. OcToOBER 12. Mr. CHarues Morris in the Chair. Nineteen persons present. OcToBER 19. The President, SamurEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— “A Revision of the Genus Synidotea,” by James E. Benedict. “ Reptiles from Sonora, Sinaloa and Jalisco, Mexico, with des- cription of a new species of Sceloporus,” by John Van Denburgh, “Contributions to the Herpetology of San Paolo, Brazil, I,” by Dr. H. Von Jhering. “Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hymenoptera of Brazil, No. 3.—Sphegidee (sens. lat.),” by William J. Fox. The death of William B. Bement, a member, was announced. OcTOBER 26. Mr. ArruurR Erwin Brown in the Chair. Forty-six persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— “ Geological Section from Moscow to Siberia and Return,” by Dr. Persifor Frazer. “Scaphopoda of the San Domingo Tertiary,’ by H. A. Pilsbry and Benjamin Sharp, M. D. Mr. Daniel Baugh was elected a member. The following were ordered to be printed :— 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307 NEW ACHATINIDZ AND HELICIDH FROM SOMALILAND. BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. The following descriptions are based upon material collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. Other mollusks presented to the Acad- emy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia by the same intreped ex- plorer belong to species already known. They represent so small a fragment of the fauna of this interesting part of Africa that their enumeration here may be dispensed with. Achatina chrysoleuca n. sp. Shell ovate, with conic spire, in general contour like A. variegata. Solid and strong, though not very thick. White, with a thin golden- brown cuticle, which is deciduous over the greater part of the shell, remaining behind the aperture and in the depressions between longi- tudinal plications elsewhere; later 13 whorls immaculate, the next earlier with spaced, somewhat zig-zag and rather broad brown streaks, the next earlier narrowly streaked, the streaks straight, Whorls of the spire soiled white. Whorls 63 (the apical whorls truncated, perhaps 1 or 12 whorls being thereby lost), mod- erately convex, the last quite convex. Surface shining, finely de- cussated on the spire, the sculpture hardly visible to the naked eye, and gradually becoming obsolete, the spirals lost on the iatter 14 whorls, which are somewhat coarsely plicatulate. Sutures even _above, weakly and irregularly serrate below. Aperture a little ex- ceeding half the length of the shell, pure white within, subvertical, acuminate above, deeply excised by the body-wall; outer lip rather regularly arcuate, but less curved above, simple; columella short, cylindric, very deeply concave on the front and the side toward aperture, abruptly truncated at base, delicate flesh-tinted ; parietal wall with a thin, transparent varnish. Alt. 105, diam. 58 mm. Longest axis of aperture 60, greatest width of cavity 33 mm. Tulu Didirko, in about lat. 4° 4’ N., lon. 39° 36’ E., at 3,580 ft. alt. (Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, March 27, 1895). Type is No. 68,113, coll. A. N.S. P.. It is an ivory-white shell, with some inconspicuous marking on the spire. The cuticle is largely deciduous. Nothing very nearly allied seems to be de- scribed from this portion of the continent. 24 358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Limicolaria Donaldsoni n. sp. : Shell narrowly perforate, oblong-ovate, rather thin. Spire ter- minating in a very obtuse rounded apex. Whorls slightly over 6, quite convex, separated by deep sutures. Surface shining, finely striated longitudinally, the strize cut into oblong granules by decus- sating spiral impressed lines, which become subobsolete on the last whorl except below the suture where they persist, although weaker. Aperture ovate, a little less than half the length of the shell, bluish- white within ; outer lip thin and sharp; columella straight in the middle and above, slightly concave below, the columellar lip re- flexed over the umbilicus. Color white under a very thin yellow cuticle, with faint narrow, sinuous and interrupted brown streaks, Alt. 39, diam. 204 mm.; alt. of aperture 17, width of cavity in the middle 10 mm. The Haud (Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, July 25, 1894). Type is No, 68,114, coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Of described species, DL. Beccarii Morel. seems to be nearest to this one; but that has the spire longer and less obtuse at apex, a stronger color-pattern, ete. L. Donaldsoni is remarkable for the unusual convexity of the whorls. None of the very numerous species described during the last few years seem near to this form. Limicolaria Vanattai n. sp. Shell very narrowly perforate, oblong-conic, compact, thin, white under athin yellow cuticle, variegated with many longitudinal, almost straight, streaks of rich chestnut, rather close and narrow, but with a few broad ones among them, the latter often wedge- shaped, wider below; the streaks neither branching nor zig-zag. On the last whorl the longitudinal markings are to a great extent coalescent or smeared together below the periphery, the darker color predominating on the base. Sculpture: close and fine costule cut into oblong granules by spiral impressed lines; the decussation fine and regular on the spire; but below, the spirals be- come less regular and disappear on the latter part of the body whorl and are wanting on the base, and the costulz on the last whorl are coarser. Spire rather thick, conic, the apex very obtuse, rounded ; suture moderately impressed, margined below by a light line. Whorls 72, slightly convex, the last slightly attenuated be- low. Aperture narrowly ovate, livid within, its height contained 2 times in alt. of shell; acuminate above. Columella cylindric, of a purple-flesh color, distinctly convex in the middle, bending toward 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399 the left as it approaches the base ; the reflexed edge adnate nearly to base, where it is free, leaving a small umbilical perforation. Length 56, diam. 26; alt. of aperture 25 mm. Sheikh Husein, lat. 7° 43’ 32” N., lon. 40° 44’ 30” E., (Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, Sept. 21, 1894). Somewhat like LD. turris Pfr., but the columella is distinctly con- vex instead of gently concave, and the apex is decidedly more ob- tuse. It is also a smaller, less conic shell. The spire is longer than in L. Riippelliana Pfr. as figured by Jickeli. The narrow, straight, not branching, color streaks are also characteristic. It is dedicated to Mr. E. G. Vanatta. who kindly assisted me in examining the literature of Achatinide for the species herein described. Helicella (Lejeania) chionobasis n. sp. Shell very narrowly umbilicate, thick lens-shaped, low-conoid above, flattened-convex beneath; the periphery angular at first, be- coming rounded; rather thin but moderately solid, and slightly shining. Conspicuously bicolored, the base being opaque white as in Xerophiles generally, the top rust-brown with numerous irregular, arcuate whitish streaks, the apex and several earlier whorls glossy- black. Sculpture of irregular, low wrinkles of growth, with extremely fine arcuate striz also above; on the base very minute incised circu- lar strie are visible under the lens in addition to the wrinkles. Whorls nearly 63, slowly increasing, slightly convex, a distinctly defined whitish cord margining the sutures above, produced by the keel of the whorls. Aperture mainly basal, lunate, moderately ob- lique, bicolored within ; peristome simple, suddenly dilated at the columellar insertion, partly covering the narrow umbilicus. Alt. 13, greatest diameter 19-5, least 18 mm. The Haud (Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, July 25, 1894). The italicized clauses in the above description sufficiently indicate the more conspicuous features of this form, which is apparently different from any member of the group Lejeania known to me. The permanence of the name Helicel/a for the group of Xero- philes depends upon the date of publication of Férussac’s Prodrome, which is still in doubt. It may prove later than Juacosta of Gray, which would then assume the generic réle. This is a mere question of names, however. The limits and characters of the group I have been able to define with considerable exactness, thanks to the previous work of Schmidt, Moquin-Tandon, von Ihering and others. 360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. NEW AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSKS. BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. The forms described below occurred in a recent sending received from Dr. J. C. Cox, consisting mainly of marine mollusks he had collected at Eden, on the coast of New South Wales, a catalogue of whieh will probably be published by him elsewhere. In the pres- ent scattered condition of the literature of Australian mollusks, only omniscience can always escape the danger of overlooking some description ; but reasonable care is believed to have been taken in dealing with the following. Genus TATEA Tenison-Woods. The relationships of Tatea seem to require examination. In the Manuals of Fischer and Tryon it is placed under Jeffreysia asa subgenus ; but it differs radically from this group in dentition and operculum, and is also unlike it in shell characters. The Rissoina group is that to which Tatea seems allied by its operculum ; and Eatoniella Dall, with species in Kerguelen Island, South Georgia and New Zealand, would apparently be the most nearly allied genus, if judged by conchologic features only. Eatoniella’ has an ovate, one- or few-whorled operculum with the nucleus near the columellar margin, a process arising therefrom directed toward that margin. The shell has 43-6 convex whorls, is thin, the peristome somewhat reflexed at the columellar margin, and neither contracted nor indistinctly varixed as it is in Tuatea. The species are all quite small, the largest known being but 3 mm. long. The dentition as described and figured by Schako in the paper of Martens and Pfeffer cited above, has some peculiar feat- ures. The rachidian tooth is practically as in Rissoa, apparently with a basal denticle on each side situated low as in Rissoa, although Schako does not make this clear. The lateral is as usual in the group. The inner uncinus has as few or fewer denticles than the lat- eral, and they are quite large. According to Schako’s figures and 1See E. A. Smith, Philos. Trans., Vol. 168, p. 174, and Martens and Pfeffer, Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anstalten, III, p. 94, 1886. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361 the text on p. 94, there are three denticles on this tooth, but the description on p. 96 gives five denticles. The outer uncinus has seven denticles. The denticle formula of what Martens and Pfeffer identify as Hatoniella kerquelenensisis, therefore, 7 , 5, 3 (?), 7. 1159) In Dardania Hutton,’ which, so far as shell, operculum and rad- ula go, is identical with Eatoniella, the dentition as figured by Hut- ton agrees in essentials with that genus. Hutton’s figure is rather diagrammatic. It shows no basal denticles, the formula being 5 , 0-0 6, 3,5 (?). This seems to agree essentially with Hatoniella, espe- cially in the important and unusual character of the inner marginal tooth, the cusp of which is remarkable for the small number and large size of its denticles. The omission of basal denticles may be an oversight. The inclusion of Dardania in Eatoniella seems from the data at hand to be necessary. Now, in Tatea, the radula (Pl. IX, fig. 8) is unequivocally Hy- drobioid. Judging from it alone, if one were to ignore the shell and operculum, it would be pronounced a Potamopyrgus. It differs in very important particulars from that of Eatoniella. The rachi- dian tooth shows several well marked basal denticles inserted weld above the basal margin of the tooth, as in the freshwater genera. The lateral is as usual above, and has the tongue-like process be- low, noticed in many non-marine forms. The inner uncinus has the scythe-like form usual in Hydrobia and its allies, with 15 to 20 minute denticles on the long cusp. The outer uncinus has still finer denticulation. It will be seen that both the median and the inner marginal teeth are quite different from the corresponding teeth of Eatoniella, and altogether like those of Potumopyrgus and its allies. From these characters we would advocate the removal of Tatea from the subfamily Rissoinine, and install it in the Amnicolide (Hydrobiide of Fischer), notwithstanding its aberrant operculum. The union of Tutea with Eatoniel/a, which some authors have ac- cepted, is altogether inadmissable; and the genus, which is dedi- cated to one of the most able of Australian zoologists, will stand as one of the most isolated in its family. The figure represents the teeth of T. huonensis ; those of T. para- disiaca are very similar. J[ have not examined the radula of 7. rufilabris. * Trans. and Proc. N. Z. Institute, xiv, p. 147, pl. 1, f. K, 1-4, (1882) 362 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Tatea paradisiaca n.sp. Pl. IX, figs. 10, 11. Shell narrowly pyramidal, the lateral outlines of the spire slightly concave above, apex obtuse. Whorls about 73; the nucleus minute, the first whorl globose and relatively large, following whorls but slightly convex, separated by linear sutures, the last whorl either bluntly angular or rounded at the periphery, swelling in a low varix behind the peristome, then contracting, rather abruptly falling or deflexed for a short distance in front. Surface shining, showing excessively faint, fine spiral strize in certain lights. Color, rich reddish-chestnut, becoming a little paler on the spire, and with the peristome of a decidedly darker shade. Aperture ovate, rounded above, vertical; peristome obtuse and thick, continuous. _Umbilicus hardly perforated. Alt. 4°8, diam. 2°5 mm.; alt. of aperture 1-5 mm. Eden, New South Wales, Australia, in a brackish swamp (Dr. J. C. Cox, 1897). This species differs from 7. rufilabris (A. Ad.*) and T. huonen- sis (Tenison-Woods‘) in being much broader in proportion to its heighth, of a darker color, and with strongly developed lip varix. The appearance of margination below the sutures, produced by transparence, is more conspicuous in rufilabris and huonensis than in our new species, and both of the former have the spire more at- tenuated above. The species of Tatea may be tabulated as follows: a. Shell slender, the diameter less than one-half the height, b. Peristome very thick and heavy ; a keel defining the base, T. rufilabris A. Ad. (pl. ix, fig. 7). b’. Peristome rather thin throughout; peripheral keel weak or wanting ; no varix behind the lip, T. huonensis T.-W. (pl. ix, fig. 12). a’. Shell stouter, the diameter over half the height; peri- stome thick; a low varix behind the lip, T. paradisiaca Pils. (pl. ix, figs. 10, 11). 3 Diala rujilabris A. Ad., Ann. and Mag., Nat. Hist. (3), x, p. 298, 1862. Type locality, Port Lincoln. See also Smith, P. Z. S., 1875, p. 538, where it is referred to Hydrobia, and Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., XVI, p. 268, pl. 7, f. 19 (as Tatea). 4 Bythinia huonensis Tenison-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania for 1875, p. 77; also for 1878, p. 71, and 1879, p. 72 (Tatea). Type locality, Huon River, Tasmania. See also Petterd, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm. for 1888, p. 78, pl. 2, f. 1 (as Tatea rujilabris). 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363 T. rufilabris and T. huonensis have been united by Mr. Smith, and the union has been accepted by Australian and Tasmanian writers. The differences mentioned above seem constant in the rather small series of each before me; so that I would suggest a renewed comparison of Australian and Tasmanian specimens by someone having abundant material, in order that Mr. Smith’s decision may be confirmed or reversed. The series before me is hardly ample enough to justify an opinion adverse to that of so fair minded an investigator as my honored confrére of the British Museum, but is still sufficient to raise a doubt. Genus ADEORBIS Wood. Adeorbis sigaretinus n. sp. Pl. IX, figs. 4, 5, 6. Shell much depressed, shaped somewhat like the flat Sigaretus species, upper surface slightly convex, base broadly and deeply um- bilicated; thin, white. Whorls 42, the first minute, brownish, elevated, the others convex, rapidly widening, the last very wide, rounded at the periphery and base, as well ason the umbilical mar- gin. Sculpture, close and fine wrinkles of growth, somewhat irreg- ular, and fine, crowded, thread-like spiral strie. Aperture large, very oblique, subcircular, only slightly excised by the parietal mar- gin; peristome thin and simple. Alt. 2, greater diam. 4:8, lesser 3°8 mm., or slightly larger, diam. 5°5 mm. Rockhampton, Australia (Dr. J. C. Cox). A. sigaretinus differs from A. striatellus from New Caledonia in the larger size, wider last whorl, open umbilicus without a border- ing keel, and different ornamentation ; Montrouzier’s species being distinctly punctured along the striz in the specimens before me, as stated in the original description. The absence of a constricting, delicate umbilical keel is a very obvious point of difference. Genus CORBULA Bruguiére. Corbula Coxin.sp. PI. IX, figs. 1, 2, 3. Shell solid, strong and quite inequivalve, inequilateral, very ven- tricose, the diameter nearly or quite equal to the height; in fully mature individuals, oblong, the beaks nearly central, anterior end rounded, posterior end narrower, very obliquely truncated, much narrowed below and projecting in a short truncate rostrum ; basal margin moderately arcuate. Surface dull, whitish, with remnants of a thin yellowish cuticle at the ends. Right valve somewhat 564 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. larger, projecting beyond and closely overlapping the left along the whole basal margin. Both valves have the posterior area defined by a keel. Sculpture rather fine, irregular wrinkles parallel to growth lines, becoming coarser below, and obsolete toward the beaks, where numerous spaced radial carinule, linear and very del- icate may be seen under the lens. Interior white, the right valve with a high, triangular, recurved tooth fitting into a corresponding deep process in the other valve. Length 18:5, height 11, diam. 11 mm. Length 17:5, height 11, diam. 9.5 mm. Sydney Head (John Brazier), and Eden, Twofold Bay, New South Wales (Dr. J. C. Cox). This species is probably the C. nasuta of Angas’ lists of Australian mollusks, but it is not, in my opinion, the C. nasuta of Sowerby,° described from Xipixapi, west coast of Colombia. The latter is smaller, adults before me measuring 7°5 to 10 mm. long, and the beaks are somewhat different. In C. nasuta, as Reeve’s figure shows, the larger valve projects above beyond the smaller, while in C. Coxi the two are nearly equal above. In C. nasuta the concentric ribs are more prominent on the anterior end than in C. Cozi. The posterior rostration is decidedly longer in C. nasuta. Sowerby’s types measured: long 0-7, lat. 0°35, alt. 0-4 inch. These differences indicate specific distinction; the very widely separated habitats of the two forms also pointing in this direction. EXPLANATION OF PLATE Exe Figs. 1, 2, 3. Corbula Cowi. Lateral, ventral and posterior views. Figs. 4, 5,6. Adeorbis sigaretinus. Anterior, ventral and dorsal views of the shell. Fig. 7. Tatea rufilabris. Front view of shell. Fig. 8. Tutea huonensis. Dentition. Fig. 9. Tatea huonensis. Operculum, from within. Figs. 10.11. Tatea paradisiaca. Front views of two specimens. Fig. 12. Tatea huonensis. Front view of shell. All figures variously enlarged, reproduced from camera lucida drawings. ° Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1833, p. 35; Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. II, pl. 1, fig. 1. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365 DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW SPECIES OF CERION. BY H. A. PILSBRY AND E. G. VANATTA. Cerion Fordii P.& V. Figs. 1, 2. Fig. 1. Fig, 2. Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Fig. 5. Shell cylindrical, the latter three whorls of equal diameter, those earlier forming a rather short, obtuse cone. Whorls 10 to 103, earlier two white, smooth, the following finely striated, strize or rib- lets evenly spaced though of variable closeness, in number 32 to 45 on the last or next to last whorl, not splitting or more numerous on the base of the shell, which is rounded, not compressed ; umbilical chink short, subperforate. Color: longitudinally mottled with brown, ochre and snow-white ; sometimes uniform white. Aperture vertical or with the base somewhat advanced; parietal tooth about median, high, long and strong, extending backward about four millimeters. Columellar fold very slight, situated high. Peristome reflexed, its face much thickened ; light brown or whit- ish ; parietal wall generally heavily calloused. Alt. 30, diam. of penult. whorl] 12, alt. aperture 123 mm. Alt. 27, diam. of penult. whorl 12, alt. aperture 102 mm. Alt. 283, diam. of penult. whorl 11, alt. aperture 11 mm. Var. submarmoratum P.& V. Figs. 3, 4. Like the type except that it is ribless, smooth with slight growth- wrinkles; sutures a little exserted and seam-like above. White, unicolored or with irregular longitudinal dark fleshy brown stripes and sometimes ochraceous stains. The first post-nepionic whorl of the cone is usually striated. Aperture typical. 366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Typical C. Fordii exactly resembles externally a coarsely sculpt- ured form of C. Dalli from Inagua; but it has the internal armature of Strophiops or Maynardia. It is a coarser, larger shell than C. eximeum of Cat Island and New Providence, with far stronger development of peristome and teeth and more interrupted strigation. C. Fordii has not the raised ledge across the parietal wall of C. glans varium, from New Providence, has stronger peristome and teeth, and is larger. The pure white form C. Fordii resembles C. abacoense, but is less stout in the average, has a liver-tinted mouth and lip, and the parie- tal tooth is notably longer and stronger. Var. submarmoratum is a larger shell than C. marmoratum, stouter above, and with a much more developed parietal tooth. It has not the expanded umbilical area of C. regina eucosmium, of Turk’s Island. White specimens of this variety are very similar to C. eleuthere, but do not taper gradually as that species, the angle of obliquity of the aperture is different, ete. Several hundreds of this species were obtained by Mr. John Ford from a barrel of shells from the Bahamas, exact island unfortunately unknown. On comparison with the nearly complete series of Cer- ion in the collection of the Academy it is evident that a new poly- morphic species is before us, probably from an island or region of an island hitherto unexplored for this genus. Both the striate and smooth forms occurred either white or strigate, and so far as we can judge in nearly equal numbers. ‘Transition forms are fully represented, though probably 95 per cent. of the specimens are either the one or the other. Cerion Pillsburyi P.& V. Fig. 5. Shell tapering subeylindrical, the later three whorls of nearly equal diameter, those above forming a rather long cone, which passes very gradually into the subcylindrical portion; apex very obtuse. Whorls 10 to 102, the nepionic smooth, next whorl sharply finely striate or smoothish ; all succeeding whorls except the last one- half to two, flat and smooth with some growth-lines only ; last one- half to two whorls regularly costulate, riblets narrower than the intervals, about one millimeter apart. Base rounded, not com- pressed ; umbilical chink very short,imperforate. White with irre- gular, interrupted brown or gray-brown streaks. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367 Aperture vertical; parietal tooth very small, weak and short ; col- umellar fold distinct, extending inward one whorl. Peristome well reflexed, whitish, rather thin or thickened ; parietal callus moderate or very thin. Alt. 29, diam. of last whorl above aperture 11-12; alt. of aperture 11 mm. Alt. 283, diam. of last whorl above aperture 11; alt. of aperture 10 mm. Gun Cay, Bahamas (Dr. Wm. H. Rush, U.S. N.). The rather long and gradually tapering cone, smooth surface above, the last one or two whorls ribbed, and very small parietal tooth, are the most prominent features of this species. Its resem- blance to C. regina eucosmium is remarkable; but the small area behind the columellar lip, with short rimation and rounded base, distinguishes it at once from that form. It is superficially not far from some of the Cayman Is. species, but has not the strong and long parietal tooth of those forms. At the request of Dr. Rush this species is named in honor of Lieutenant-Commander John Elliott Pillsbury, of the U.S. Coast Survey Steamer “ Blake.” 368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. ON THE ANNUAL MOLT OF THE SANDERLING. BY WITMER STONE. In March, 1896, Mr. Frank M. Chapman published a paper en- titled ‘“‘The Chanves of Plumage in the Dunlin and Sanderling,” * his object being chiefly to controvert the theory of Giitke and others that these and other birds acquired their nuptial dress by an actual change in the color of the feathers of the winter plumage. Mr. Chapman demonstrates conclusively, with the aid of a large series of specimens, that this change is effected by an absolute re- placement of the old plumage by new and differently colored feathers. In the case of the Sanderling, Calidris arenaria, Mr. Chapman describes the plumage changes of the bird in some detail, and in speaking of the annual molt says :— “There is no reason to doubt that the Sanderling, like other birds, undergoes a complete molt after the breeding season ; never- theless, not one of my twenty August specimens shows any signs ot molt in progress in the wings or tail. In the larger number, how- ever, the remiges and rectrices are in an apparently fresh and un- worn condition, and I assume that in most cases these important feathers are acquired before the migration is begun. This would be in July, a month which, as I have said, is not represented in my series.” At the time this was published I agreed quite as fully with this view as I do with the other conclusions reached by the author in his admirable paper, but specimens recently submitted to me by my friend Mr. William L. Baily, taken at Cape May, N. J., August 14th, 1897, show the flight feathers in full molt, and prove that the molt of these feathers does not always take place before the migration, while subsequent examination of additional material leads me to think that in the large majority of cases they do not begin to molt until the migration has begun. These Cape May specimens also tend to emphasize a fact which Mr. Chapman has curiously enough stated in the sentence imme- diately preceeding the one above quoted, and which all who have studied molts know to be only too true, viz.: “the necessity for 1 Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol. VIII, pp. 1-8. 2The author pointed out the same fact independently in a paper which ap- peared April 14, 1896. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1896, p. 125. ——— ee 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369 large series in studying the molt and the erroneous conclusions which may be drawn from negative evidence.” In investigating the annual molt of the Sanderling, I had before me a series of sixty-seven skins taken from May to November, in- cluding besides those in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, a series from the U.S. National Museum and the American Museum of Natural History, kindly loaned by the authorities of these institutions. The series of spring specimens which I have examined serves but to substantiate Mr. Chapman’s account of the spring molt, and is not concerned with the present paper. My series may be grouped as follows :—- Birds of the year in first plumage, 19 (Aug. 26th to Oct. 20th). Birds of the year showing molt of the body feathers, 9 (Sept. 29th to Nov. 10th). Old birds in nuptial plumage, 8 (May 21st to Aug. 14th). Old birds showing molt, 28 (Aug. 2nd to Oct. 31st), 8 of which (Aug. 14th to Oct. 31st) show molt in the primaries. Old birds in full winter plumage, 3. The birds of the year, as is well known, molt the body plumage in the autumn and the black and white feathers of the back and head are replaced by light gray as in the winter adults. The following table shows the progress of this molt :— U.S. N. M., 106,443, Romney, Eng., Aug. 29th, one or two gray feathers. A.M. N. HL, 54,698, Devon, Eng., Sept. 10th, one or two gray feathers. A. N.S. P., 34,169, Beach Haven, N. J., October, about 25 gray feathers. U.S. N. M., 128,796, Aldabra Isl., Africa, Nov. 10th, about half the feathers gray. U.S. N. M., 41,774, Merida, Yucatan, about half the feathers gray. A.N.S. P., 34,873, Wolfville, N.S., Sept. 29th, gray feathers pre- dominating. U.S. N. M., 81,754, Ventura, Cal., Nov. 2d, molt complete. Other specimens from Wolfville, N.S., taken Sept. 29th, and one from Havre, France, Oct. 20th, have not begun to change. This shows the great variation in the time of the molt. Some species of birds molt their remiges and rectrices with the first body plumage, but none of the specimens examined show any evidence of such molt in the Sanderling. 370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. The possibility that some of the specimens described below which show molt in the primaries were birds of the year was considered, but all the evidence seemed to point to their being adults. I feel convinced that the black tips to the wing and tail coverts will serve to distinguish birds of the year as pointed out by Mr. Chapman, even after the black and white feathers of the back and head have been entirely replaced, as they are still retained in birds that have entirely finished the molt. The specimens illustrating the annual molt of the adults may be arranged as follows: A specimen from Glacier Valley, North Greenland, taken June 14 (A. N.S. P., 30,197), shows the full nuptial plumage as do other specimens from Cape May, N. J., May 21st to June 13th. One from Cape May, August, 14th is in worn nuptial plumage with one or two gray feathers on the back, but no further sign of molt. Eighteen other specimens (Aug. 2d to Sept. 11th) show a varying amount of gray feathers in the plumage of the upper surface, giving them a mottled appearance. In all of these the spotting on the breast is still perceptible, and in at least half of them scarcely any molt has occurred in this part of the plumage. In none of them is there any molt in progress in the wing or tail, even the wing coy- erts being in every instance the worn nuptial plumage. The primaries show great diversity as to abrasion, some being much worn and bleached to a dull brownish tint, while others are much blacker and comparatively so fresh looking that Mr. Chap- man considered them to be newly acquired feathers. As stated below, however, I am inclined to consider them as be- longing to the old nuptial plumage.’ 3 In this connection attention should be called to the fact that in the Dunlin ( Tringa alpina pacifica) the primaries are molted in June, (!) as is shown by every individual in a series of four collected in Alaska by Dr. Benj. Sharp, June 28-29, 1895 (Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila.). There is no trace of such a molt in the only breeding Sanderling that I have been able to examine, while we have positive evidence that some Sanderlings molt the primaries in August (see below). Therefore, if the comparatively fresh appearance of the primaries in some of our mottled August birds indicates that they are newly acquired feathers, we must admit that there are two styles of molting in this one species, which seems unlikely—i. e., in some individuals a molt (in June or July) of the re- miges, completed before the molt in the coverts or body plumage begins ; and in others a molt (in August) of all the feathers, the remiges beginning when the body plumage is about half renewed. A series of Knot taken in Greenland during June and July show no such molt as is exhibited in the Dunlin. f ; z= : ; 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371 The specimens included in this mottled series are as follows :— A. M.N.H., 35,752, ete., 8 specimens, Chatham, Mass., Aug. 27th. We c:, 1,573, Cape May, Ne sis Sept. 11th. U.S.N.M., 59,714, Tehuantepec, Mex. , Aug. 5th. A.N.S.P., 33,744, 34,168, 2 spe’m’ns, Beach Haven, N. ah Aug. 21. ass N..M., 30,310, Spanishtown, Jam., Aug. 20. U.S.N.M., 94,714, Hyde Park, Il, Aug. 20, W25..N.M. tiie 789, White I., Canada Bay, Aug. 2. U.S.N. M.,124,587, Pt. Lookout, Sept. 8th. WES NM 91,011, Devon, Eng., Aug. 26th. A.M.N.H.,51, ATA, Rockaway, L. I., Aug. 4th. The next series of eight birds shows the continuation of the molt. In all of these the gray predominates on the back, many of them being practically like winter birds, having lost nearly all the old body feathers. In all, however, the molt is in progress in the remiges, and in most cases in the rectrices also, while in all but the most advanced, remains of the old wing coverts may be seen in varying quantity. These birds in detail are as follows :— pecs Moltin | Molt in | Moltin | Molt on * secondaries tertials. vi rts back. molted | Cc. s RS ing ecoverts Dac } Cape May, N. J.. Aug14..; 4 | None. | None. Half com-) About 20 | pleted. old feath- | ers remain. Cape May, N. J., Aug 14.. 4 None. |Half com- Half com-| About 25 | pleted. | pleted. | remain. U.S.N. M., 151,633, Mar-' | ) garita Island, Venezuela, Jit) 7/ ange een se aeeeee | 4 |2renewed) About | Almost | About 12 Se WN. M., 128,795, ie completed completed remain. bra Isl., (re ene ae 4 (All but 3 Complete. Complete. Complete. U.S. N. M. Ses 57938, Aide: renewed, | | bra Isl., Cl a ee 4 \Complete. Complete. Complete. Complete. U.S.N.M., 110,029, Kauai, | | Figwatiat lel) .....c.-.2+2- 3 All but 3 Complete. Complete. Complete. A. N.S. P., 26,178, Cape| | renewed. May, N oye Sept. 14......, 2 |Complete. Complete. Complete. Several | old feath- U.S. N. M.,102,064, Tambo ‘ers remain. Valley, Pern, Oct.3l.....| 6 None. Complete. Nearly | Several complete. ‘old feath- ers remain. This shows great variability in the time of completing the molt and the relative progress of molt in different parts of the plumage. 372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. One point which seems to be borne out by all the specimens is that the body plumage is pretty well renewed before the remiges be- gin to molt, and that consequently the molt of these feathers occurs. after the bird starts on its migration. If, as Mr. Chapman assumed, the mottled birds which showed no trace of molt in the remiges and rectrices, had already renewed these feathers, we would have a condition contrary to that found in any group of birds which I have examined, i.e., the completing of the molt of the remiges before the molt of the coverts begins. Better evidence, however, is to be found in the fact that in some of the molting specimens above described the primaries that are be- ing replaced are quite as fresh as those in the mottled birds already mentioned. Why there should be this great difference in the wear of the remiges I am unable to say; and I am equally at a loss to account. for the peculiar appearance of some birds in which the two outer primaries are in a wonderfully better state of preservation than the inner ones, the difference between the second and third being very marked. All the evidence so far seems to point to the same order of molt in the feathers of the wing of these birds as is seen in the Passeres.* Two specimens given in the above table deserve special comment. The Margarita Island specimen is remarkable from the fact of its. capture so far south at so early a date (July 7), as well as in having so nearly completed its molt. It may, perhaps, have been a wounded or diseased bird that did not migrate northward in the spring.’ - The other specimen is the one from Tambo Valley, Peru, October 31st (U.S. N. M., 102,064), which has completed the body molt. while the remiges are just beginning to change. 4 See Stone, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1896, p. 112. > For note on the capture of this specimen (No. 151,633, U. S. N. M.), see Proc. U.S. N. M., 1895, p. 656. A specimen of Ereunetes occidentalis taken in San Domingo by Dr. W. L. Abbott, July 11, 1883 (No. 26,158, A. N.S. Phila. ), is almost exactly like this- as regards the state of its plumage, all the plumage being gray with the mid- dle rectrices renewed and only the five outer primaries of the summer plum- age remaining. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 373 CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE HYMENOPTERA OF BRAZIL, NO. 3. SPHEGIDZ (sens. lat.). BY WILLIAM J. FOX. This paper forms a continuation of the reports on the collections of Hymenoptera made by and belonging to Mr. Herbert H. Smith. At least one more paper will follow, on the Thynniide, which will also contain some additions to the earlier reports. Ampulex trigonopsis Sm. A single specimen from Chapada (October), I doubtfully refer to this species. It agrees with Smith’s description, but there are two large teeth on each side of the projecting carina of the clypeus, of which Smith makes no mention. Sceliphron (7vigonopsis) rufiventre Fabr. Five specimens from Maruru (April) and Santarem. Sceliphron (Podium) denticulatum Sm. Chapada (December) ; Santarem. Two specimens. Sceliphron (Podium) consanguineum Sm. Two specimens from Chapada (March) and Rio de Janeiro (Oc- tober) are doubtfully referred to this species. Sceliphron (Podium) flavipenne Lep. Two specimens, 9. Rio de Janeiro (November) and Santarem. Sceliphron (Podium) romandinum Sauss. Two examples of this fine species. Santarem (September). Sceliphron (Podium) haematogastrum Spin. Fourteen @ and thirteen ¢ specimens. This species is quite distinct by red legs and abdomen. The latter, however, becomes quite dark in some specimens, and the petiole is sometimes black and varies a little in length; the point of reception of the recurrent veins by the second submarginal cell is not constant. Three specimens differ by having the wings subhyaline, not yel- low, and may prove distinct. Perhaps they represent Saussure’s Podium egregium. 25 374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Sceliphron fistulare Dhlb. Six specimens. Pedra Branca and Maruru (April) ; Chapada. Sceliphron figulum Dhlb. Two specimens. Corumba and Uacarizal (February). Ammophila opulenta Guér. A large series of this species from various localities. It is dis- guished by its large size and strong tubercle of mesopleura. The male has the clypeus prominently produced into a tooth, and together with the face, covered with golden pubescence. It is best distinguished by the strongly tuberculate mesopleurz. Ammophila miliaris Cam. Twelve male specimens. Chapada (January to March) ; Santa- rem. Greatly resembles opulenta, but the mesopleurz not tubercu- late and clypeal prominence shorter. Ammophila abbreviata Fabr. A large series of both sexes. Ammophila aureo-notata Cam. One female and nine malespecimens. Chapada (March, April) ; Corumba and Pedra Branca (April); Santarem. Ammophila moneta Sm. Four female and five male specimens. Uacarizal (February) ; Pedra Branca and Chapada (April) ; Santarem. A female and five males differ only in the sides of petiole and base of second segment diffused with reddish, and are no doubt A. ragilis Smith. Moneta and fragilis are evidently one species. Ammophila asperata n. sp. °.—Head with strong scattered punctures; clypeus medially finely punctured, its fore margin broadly and squarely truncate in middle; fore ocellus separated from the posteriors by a distance equal to less than half that between the latter; space between hind ocelli equal to less than two-thirds of that between them and eyes; first joint of flagellum a little shorter than the two following united ; pronotum slightly excised medially ; dorsulum coarsely punctured, but still not unevenly, posteriorly with several coarse transversely sinuous stris, and suleate down middle for its entire length; scu- tellum longitudinally striate ; postscutellum rugose ; upper surface of middle segment suleate, rugose medially, the rugze running into fine even strive laterally ; side of thorax rugoso-punctate, the meso- i i a i 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375 pleure not tuberculate, with an } -shaped furrow ; petiole composed of two joints; wings subhyaline, apices broadly darker, second submarginal cell subtriangular, narrowed more than one-half above, the first recurrent vein received near the middle, the second near apex. Entire insect deep black, abdomen velvety; face and elypeus with sparse fuscous pile ; spot on tubercles and large one at each side of apex of middle segment, bright silvery. Length 22 mm. $ .—F ace and clypeus densely golden; clypeus drawn out into a median prominence, which is short and obtuse, and before which the clypeus is visibly depressed; space between hind ocelli nearly equal to that between them and eyes; dorsulum with rather dense pale pile, and, in addition, with a short, erect, pale fuscous pubes- cence; thorax sculptured as in the 9; tegule silvery anteriorly. Length 22 mm. Chapada (March). Three specimens. Has the general appear- ance of abbreviata. Sphex (Ch/lorion) hemiprasinus Sichel. Chapada (October). Three specimens. Sphex (Chlorion) cyaniventris Guér. One specimen ; same locality and date as the preceding. Sphex (/sodontia) nigrocaeruleus Tasch. Nine ¢, three ¢ specimens. Chapada (March, April). Sphex (/sodontia) costipennis Spin. Five @, nine ¢ specimens; Chapada (February, March); Maruru and Pedra Branca (April); Santarem. Sphex (/sodontia) laevipes n. sp. @ —Black, with grayish pubescence ; face, clypeus, thorax be- neath, hind coxze, an oblique line on sides of middle segment (some- times absent) extending to insertion of petiole, silvery ; tegule, legs entirely or in part, petiole (the latter sometimes black) wine colored; wings fusco-hyaline, costal half much darker; clypeus bidentate, with long, sparse, pale hairs; eyes converging toward mandibles, the latter bidentate ; space between hind ocelli nearly equalling that between them and eyes; first joint of flagellum not quite as long as the two following united; dorsulum and scutellum with distinct, separated punctures ; middle segment rather coarsely granulated ; the mesopleurz with coarse punctures; legs compara- tively scarcely spinose, spines of fore tarsi short; petiole about as 376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. long as the first three hind tarsal joints; last ventral segment con- vex. Length 17-18 mm. $.—Colored like the @ ; but in one example the thorax except dorsulum, is more or less wine colored ; clypeus more convex, its apex broadly incurved, silvery pubescence denser ; first joint of fla- gellum nearly as long as two following united; scutellum impressed medially. Length 18 mm. Uacarizal (February); Chapada (March). Three 9,one ¢ specimens. SS. /aevipes is probably the form mentioned by Kohl as. a dark variety of S. costipennis, his specimen,a ¢, having come from Rio Grande do Sul. It differs from costipennis not only in color, but by the smoother legs, longer petiole of 9, ete. Sphex (/sodontia) azteca Sauss. One specimen, a ¢. Chapada (March). Sphex caliginosus Er. Fifteen 9, 22 ¢ specimens. Chapada (March, April); Santa- rem. Sphex fuliginosus Klug (= congener Kohl). A large series of females. Chapada (March, April). Sphex Servillei Lep. (= /atior Er. =roratus Kohl). I have no doubt that datior is identical with Servillei. The large series present, indicates a common occurrence. Chapada (January,. March, April); Santarem. Ninety-one specimens, of which only five are females. Sphex funestus Kohl. Chapada (March, April); Corumbi (May); Santarem. Four specimens. Sphex neotropicus Kohl. Chapada (March, April); Santarem. Three female, two male specimens, one of the latter with reddish fore legs. Sphex ingens Sm. A single male of this huge species, without particular locality or date of capture. Sphex melanopus Dhib. (= rujicauda Tasch.). Three specimens. Uacarizal (February) ; Corumba (May). Sphex brasilianus Sauss. A single specimen of the var. tinctipennis Cam. Chapada (April). 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 377 Sphex flavipes Sm. One 9, six male specimens of the var. Iheringii Kohl. Chapada (February, March). Sphex ichneumoneus Linné. Four specimens of the typical form from Santarem (February) and Maruru (April). Three of the var. dorsalis from same locali- ties. Over thirty of the var. sumptuosus collected from February to April. Sphex dubitatus Cress. The geographical distribution of this species is extended consider- ably by three specimens in the present collection, collected at Cha- pada (February, March) and Corumba (April). There is also a specimen in the collection of the American Entomological Society marked Mexico. Four specimens, which may be the ¢ of this species, have the pubescence denser and more golden, particularly on head in front ; antennz rather long and slender, first joint of flagellum about as long as second and three-fourths of third joint united; face much narrower than in ichneumoneus; petiole about as long as second and third hind tarsal joints united ; legs more or less black; abdomen with more or less black blotches above; last ventral plate triden- tate apically, the central tooth prolonged, with a carina which runs almost to base of segment, laterally the segment bears a bunch of long yellowish hairs, somewhat concealing the lateral teeth. Length 17-18 mm. ~Corumba and Pedra Branca (April). Sphex ferrugineipes n. sp. @ —Head and thorax black, with pale, not dense pubescence ; face, clypeus at sides, line on pronotum, sides of dorsulum and spots on sides of thorax and at apex of middle segment with silvery pile ; mandibles, except apex, tegule, legs, except coxe, and base of tro- chanters, and abdomen, except petiole, entirely, or in part, bright red ; eyes but slightly converging beneath ; face somewhat narrower than in ichnewmoneus ; clypeus convex, emarginate medially, hav- ing the appearance of being bidentate, or entire, front distinctly punctured; space between hind ocelli about equal to that between them and eyes; dorsulum with rather strong separated punctures, those of mesopleure finer and evener; middle segment above with a transverse, indistinct striation; tarsal comb well developed, the 378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. first fore tarsal joint with six to seven spines ; petiole black, shorter than combined length of second and third hind tarsal joints; abdo- men above and beneath with a distinct, sparse punctuation ; wings subhyaline, not yellowish, apical margins broadly darker. Length 20-22 mm. $ .—Colored and clothed like the 9, the fore margin of the cly- peus in addition being sometimes reddish; space between hind ocelli a little greater than that between them and eyes; first joint of flagellum shorter than the second and third united, the second a little shorter than the third ; last ventral plate indistinctly carinated down middle, its apex prolonged triangularly in the middle. Length 19-21 mm. Chapada (March, April, October); Corumba (April). Three 9,10 ¢ specimens. Distinguished from ichnewmoneus, dubitatus, etc., by sparser pubescence, bright red of abdomen, strongly punc- tured dorsulum (and elypeus in 9? ), shape of last ventral plate in S$, ete. Sphex (Priononyx) Thome Fabr. Quite a large series of both sexes from various localities, collected in the months of February, March, April, June, September. Sphex (Priononyx) bifoveolatus Tasch. Twenty-seven 9, 13 3 specimens. Chapada (March, April, November) ; Corumba (April). Psen aurifrons Tasch. Chapada (October, November). Two specimens. Psen Smithii n. sp. $.—Black; antennz basally and beneath, mandibles medially, tegulz, tubercles, fulvous ; tips of femora, four anterior tibiz, base of hind pair, and tarsi, yellowish; second abdominal segment at base more or less reddish; abdomen with a bluish metallic cast; head below antennz with dense silvery or pale golden pubescence ; vertex rather finely punctured; ocelli in a triangle, the space be- tween hind pair about equal to that between them and eyes, the lat- ter converging beneath; clypeus subtruncate or subemarginate medially ; antennz rather stout, perhaps a little shorter than head and thorax ; dorsulum shining, sparsely punctured ; scutellum im- pressed down middle; mesopleurze punctured similarly to dorsulum ; middle segment covered with coarse reticulations, the basal enclosure small, with oblique rugze on each side of a smooth, triangular, cen- 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379 tral area; petiole of abdomen about as long as hind femur, flat above, not suleate; apical margins of segments testaceous; wings dark subhyaline, iridescent; stigma testaceous, nervures darker ; second and third submarginal cells each receiving a recurrent nery- ure, second submarginal cell narrowed about one-third above ; basal vein and cubital of hind wing interstitial. Length 10 mm. Chapada (April). One specimen. Allied to the North Ameri- ean P. fuscipes. Stigmus neotropicus Kohl. One specimen. Corumba (May). Stigmus hexagonalis n. sp. 2 .—Black; mandibles, except apex, yellowish; tegule, tuber- cles, antenne and legs, including cox, reddish-brown; cheeks angularly produced beneath; head shining, not striated; ocelli forming a low triangle, placed in pits ; the space between hind pair much less than that between them and eyes; clypeus acutely biden- tate medially ; prothorax above marked by a transverse series of strong fovez, the antero-lateral angles of pronotum acutely produced, as are also the sides of prothorax ; dorsulum punctured, with three deep parallel furrows, the middle one of which runs to apex, the others hardly half as long; suture between dorsulum and scutellum foveolate; middle segment coarsely reticulate, at base above with a hexagonal enclosure, which bears a longitudinal medial fold ; petiole robust, shorter than hind tibize, with two deep sulci above, between which runs a rather sharp ridge. Length 5 mm. Chapada (December, January) ; Corumba (May). Three speci- mens. Seems to be allied to S. temporalis Kohl, from Guatemala, of which only the @ is known. Trachypus Romandii Sauss. Two specimens. Chapada (November, December). Nysson tomentosus Hdl. Chapada (December). One specimen. Nysson pilosus Sm. Uacarizal (February). One specimen. Bothynostethus sp. A & specimen from Santarem I am unable to refer to any of the three described species of Bothynostethus. It agrees with Sausswret in the color of wings, but the mandibles are deeply excised and the 380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. second discoidal cell is much higher than broad. In the two latter characteristics it approaches the Mexican B. nitens, but differs in color of wings and larger size (10 mm.). The clypeus is dentate laterally as in Saussurei, of which it is, perhaps, the ¢. Scapheutes brasilianus Hdl. One specimen. Chapada (March). Gorytes specialis Sm. Four specimens that agree fairly with the description of specialis. It is evidently close to G. polybia Hdl., but the suture between dor- sulum and scutellum is not foveolate. Chapada (January) ; Marurt ; Santarem. Gorytes facilis Sm. Four specimens. Corumbé (January, April); Santarem. This species belongs, apparently, to the group of G. simillimus as defined by Handlirsch in his monograph. Gorytes scutellaris Spin. Marurti (April); Chapada (April, November); Santarem. Nine examples. Gorytes seminiger Dhlb. One specimen. Rio de Janeiro (November). Gorytes cayennensis Spin. Six specimens. Marurti (April); Rio de Janeiro (November) ; Santarem. Gorytes fuscus Tasch.- Santarem. One specimen. Gorytes valens n. sp. 2? .—Black ; labrum, clypeus, face below antennz, scape beneath, fore femora and tibiz beneath, and apical margin of abdominal segments 2-5, bright yellow; anterior tarsi, except the first joint internally, and a spot on apical joint, and a ring at base of joints 2, 3 and 5 of the remaining tarsi, pale yellow; head and thorax with long, grayish hairs, unusually hirsute for Gorytes; eyes strongly converging beneath ; ocelli in a low triangle, situated in depres- sions or pits; space between hind pair greater than that between them and eyes; clypeus large, convex, somewhat triangular, its fore margin broadly truncate; flagellum rather strongly clavate, the first joint at least twice as long assecund; dorsulum with a distinet, 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381 rather strong, even punctuation, and anteriorly in the middle with two, closely parallel, impressed lines; the remainder of thorax punctured, but less closely than dorsulum, the apex of the large basal area of middle segment being almost smooth ; the middle seg- ment is short and rounded; mesosternum not at all carinated; the episternum and epimerum distinetly separated ; wings subhyaline, yellowish along costa, darker in marginal cell; submedian cell of hind wings terminating beyond the origin of the cubital vein ; legs stout, the tibiz serrato-spinose, the spines pale; abdomen robust, more granulate than punctate, on the first segment, however, and ventrally punctured ; held in certain lights the abdomen is covered with golden pile, the apical segments with long, yellowish hairs; first segment meeting the second broadly, the latter depressed at base above, ventrally truncated at base, and with a tubercle, so that when viewed from the side it is angularly produced; pygidium large, well developed, aciculate, covered with golden pubescence. Length 14-26 mm. Chapada (December). Three specimens. Seems to be very dis- tinct from any Gorytes heretofore described, It seems intermediate of the groups mystaceus, nigrifrons, ete., and fuscus, robustus. It agrees with the former in shape of second ventral segment, but the recurrent veins are both received by the second submarginal cell. From the fuscus group the former of these two characteristics will separate it. Then again in the eyes, strongly converging toward clypeus, it also differs. Except for the second ventral segment it is not unlike G. moneduloides, but it is a much more robust insect. Gorytes partitus n. sp. @ —Head and abdomen, except first segment, black; thorax, first abdominal segment and legs reddish-brown; clypeus, except medially, labrum, base of mandibles, spot at base of antennz, scape beneath narrow line on pronotum, dorsulum at sides, tegule, spot beneath them, scutellum, postscutellum, large spot at each side of middle segment, base of first abdominal segment, and four anterior tibize and tarsi in part, yellow; eyes distinctly converging beneath clypeus transverse, punctured, broadly truncate ; antennz but little thickened apically, the first joint of flagellum about one-third longer than second ; thorax practically impunctured ; suture between dor- snlum and scutellum foveolate; mesosternum carinated, the epi- merum and episternum separated ; middle segment convex, divided by a furrow its entire length, the basal area large; tibize and tarsi 382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. distinctly spinose, pulvilli large, fore tarsi distinctly ciliated ; abdomen subpetiolate, the first segment scarcely coarctate at apex ; second dorsal segment depressed at base, second ventral convex ; pygidium distinct, longitudinally rugose; wings subhyaline, fuscous along costa and in marginal cell, nervures dark, stigma brown, submedian cell of hind wings terminating distinctly beyond origin of cubital vein: head and thorax with silvery pile, that on the dorsu- lum brownish. Length 14 mm. Chapada (December). One specimen. Seems to be related to notabilis Hdl., and fumipennis Sm. Gorytes coloratus n. sp. 2 —Head and thorax black, abdomen, and legs in part, reddish- brown; scape, clypeus sometimes, mandibles basally, pronotum, scutellum anteriorly, postscutellum, spot beneath tegule, and on each side of segments 2 and 3, or 2-4, anterior tibize and tarsi entirely, medial tibize, medial tibize within, and medial, and hind tarsi more or less, yellowish ; flagellum beneath at base, tegule, tubercles, reddish- testaceous ; dorsulum somewhat iridescent ; head broader than long; frontal impression deep; eyes large, strongly flattened anteriorly, strongly converging toward clypeus; ocellii forming a low triangle, placed in depressions; elypeus distinctly punctured, strongly de- pressed transversely before the anterior margin; scape longer than the two following joints united, first joint of flagellum nearly as long as joints 2 and 5 united ; the pronotum appears as a thick, transverse fold; dorsulum shining, with distinct separated punctures; meso- sternum not carinated, epimerum and episternum separated, but not very distinctly ; punctuation of mesopleur stronger than that of the dorsulum; suture between dorsulum and scutellum not foveolate; scutellum strongly convex ; middle segment with basal enclosure smooth and polished, the posterior face punctured and divided by a deep furrow which begins at the apex of the enclosure; legs stout, hind tibize thickened within at apex; first joint of medial tarsi somewhat curved; tibize and tarsi spinose ; pulvilli distinct; abdo- men distinctly punctured most strongly on apical segments, first seg- ment slender on basal half, then broadened to the apex, where it is convex, but not coarctate; pygidium rather large, obtuse at apex, deeply punctured; ventral segments 3-5 punctured along apical margin only ; wings strongly iridescent, clear, the first and second recurrent nervures interstitial with the first and second transverso- 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 383 cubital veins respectively ; cubital cell of hind wings terminating much before origin of cubital vein. Length 9 mm. Marurt (April); Santarem. Two specimens. This species belongs, no doubt, close to G. violaceus Hdl., described from a single defective specimen from Brazil, which, with other parts, lacked the abdomen. The present species is clearly more allied to the bipunctatus group than to chilensis, and it is probable that it and violaceus form a group. In coloration this new species seems quite distinct from its allies; it would be interesting to know whether the abdomen of violaceus is similarly colored. Bembidula discisa Tasch. Chapada (January, February, March, September, October). Twenty-three specimens. Bembidula variegata Oliv. Chapada (January, March, September, October, December). Fif- teen 9? ,five ¢ specimens. Monedula signata Linné. Chapada (March). Three females. Monedula punctata Fabr. Eleven 2 specimens. Chapada (March). Monedula surinamensis DeG. Twenty specimens, representing both sexes, collected in January, April, September to December, chiefly at Chapada. Monedula magnifica Perty. ‘Chapada (March, April). Sixteen specimens, all females, of this handsome species. Stizus Bolivarii Hdl. Chapada (January, December); Corumba (February, April) ; Santarem. Ten specimens, which are probably this species. They have all the abdominal segments fasciate, Trypoxylon pallitarse Sauss. Five specimens. Santarem (February). Trypoxylon niveitarse Sauss. Ten specimens. Chapada (January, October, December) ; San- tarem. Trypoxylon rufosignatum Tasch. Chapada (April). Three specimens. 384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Trypoxylon fabricator Sm. Chapada (October). Three specimens. This species is probably identical with 7. gracile Tasch. Trypoxylon superbum Sm. Chapada (April). One specimen. Trypoxylon levifrons Sm. One specimen. Chapada (October). Trypoxylon leve n. sp. 2 .—Deep black, shining; pubescence pale; hind tarsi except base and apex, dirty white; front with distinct, shallow punctures, furrowed from before anterior ocellus to a slight prominence just behind antenne; first joint of flagellum about as long as the two following united ; space between eyes above about equal to length of first joint of flagellum, beneath at clypeus it is somewhat less; clypeus carinated down middle, somewhat depressed laterally, its fore margin in the middle subtruncate; face and elypeus with silvery pubescence; thorax is distinctly punctured; middle segment with the posterior surface transversely striated, carinated laterally, parted by a deep furrow, the upper surface slightly depressed apically, sides apparently smooth; abdomen rather slender, much more elongate than in allied species, first segment slender, somewhat nodose at apex, fully one-third longer than second segment; the abdomen widens gradually from apex of first segment; wings fuscous, with blue reflection, pale at base and apex. Length 17 mm. $.—Colored like 9, the wings considerably darker; clypeus squarely produced, sub-tridentate ; antennze short, clavate, first joint of flagellum curved, apical joint about as long as the three preceding ones united, these latter broader than long; thorax finely punctured ; middle segment except sides entirely transversely striate, but finely so above at base, where it is also punctured; hind femora sublami- nated beneath toward apex ; abdomen stouter, and probably shorter than in 2 (segments three et seg. missing), the first segment not spinose beneath. Length about 16 mm. Marurti (April); Santarem. Three 9, one 6, specimens. Trypoxylon insolitum n. sp. ° .—Black ; sides of the first segment and second and third more or less, pale reddish, or testaceous: pubescence of thorax pale, and rather dense; face and clypeus densely silvery, including the emargination of eyes; front with unusually coarse transverse ruge 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 385 or folds, deeply impressed down middle ; the anterior ocellus is placed in this furrow, which becomes shallower below and terminates in a flat projection over the bases of antennze; first joint of flagellum a little shorter than the two following united; clypeus not carinated, prominent and rounded at apex; thorax finely punctured, nearly smooth; tegule testaceous; middie segment above parted by a deep furrow, which is transversely striated, and on each side of which another less distinet, curved furrow is present, posterior surface also parted by a furrow, finely and transversely striated ; abdomen elon- gate, slender, the first segment almost linear on basal two-thirds, slightly nodose, its length equal to the following segments united ; wings subhyaline, iridescent, nervures dark. Length 11 mm. $ —Clypeus shorter, subtruncate ; first joint of flagellum slightly longer than two following united, apical joint small, not much longer than the preceding one; middle segment with the furrow deeper than in 92, and the upper and posterior surfaces coarsely and trans- versely striated ; space between eyes at top greater than length of first joint of flagellum, beneath at clypeus it is slightly less. Length 12 mm. Rio de Janeiro (November); Santarem. One of each sex. Re- lated to fabricator Sm. and gracile Tasch. The space between eyes at top and at clypeus is less in the 9, than in the ¢, an unusual circumstance. Trypoxylon medianum n. sp. $ .—Black ; sides of first and second segments, and the latter at base, reddish ; clothed with pale pubescence, that on face, clypeus, tubercles, and postero-lateral angles of middle segment, pale golden ; a silvery stripe runs below from tegule; clypeus tridentate at apex, the median tooth acute and longest ; front apparently granulated, feebly impressed ; a longitudinal raised line behind base of antennz ; space between eyes at top but slightly greater than that between them at the clypeus, somewhat greater than the length of first joint of flagellum; the latter subclavate, first joint about as long as two fol- lowing united, the ultimate joint small, not much longer than the preceding one; dorsulum and scutellum with distinct, separated punctures, those of mesopleure finest; middle segment above finely punctato-striate, the posterior surface with distinct transverse striz deeply furrowed down middle, sides punctured; hind trochanters not dentate; abdomen clavate, rather stout, first segment a little 386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. nodose, as long as the two following united ; wings subhyaline, apical margins fuscous, nervures dark. Length 13 mm. Corumba (April) ; Santarem. Two specimens. Trypoxylon fallax n. sp. ° Black ; sides of the first and second segments and base of the latter reddish ; face, clypeus and suture below tegule with silvery pubescence, that on pronotum pale golden ; other pubescence pale ; front coarsely granulated, with a prominence or tubercle behind antennze, and above it a V-shaped depression ; ocelli situated in de- pressions; space between eyes at top about equal to length of first joint of flagellum, beneath at clypeus somewhat less; clypeus flat, somewhat roundly produced, emarginate in middle of fore margin ; thorax with distinct separated punctures; above the middle segment is finely punctato-striate, depressed slightly at apex, the posterior surface more distinctly striated and suleate down the middle; first abdominal segment slightly nodose at apex, about one-quarter longer than the second ; wings subhyaline, nervures dark testaceous. Length 13 mm. Var. (?). More subtilely punctured ; clypeus entire. $.—Similar to @, with the reddish color on abdomen more ex- tended, the base of segments, 2-3 being of that color, and first joint of tarsi pale at base; clypeus roundly emarginate ; first joint of flagellum slightly curved, the last joint but little longer than the penultimate; hind trochanters not dentate. Length 12 mm. Chapada (March); Maruri; Santarem. Three 9, one ¢, speci- mens. Closely resembles medianum, but the clypeus is emarginate, not dentate, front more coarsely granulated and with a V-shaped depression, etc. In addition to the foregoing species of Trypoxylon the collection contains eight other species, apparently new, represented by single specimens, which, for that reason and to the inadequate descriptions of many neotropical species, I have refrained from describing at the present time. Oxybelus marginatus Sm. A single specimen from Santarem, Oxybelus americanus Spin. Five specimens. Chapada (May, December) ; Marurt (April) ; Santarem. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387 Crabro pugnans Sm. Chapada (April). One specimen. Pugnans belongs to the group Crossocerus. Crabro carinatus Sm. Two specimens. Pedra Branca (April); Rio de Janeiro (Novem- ber). Seems to belong to So/enius group, as characterized in Kohl’s table. Crabro verticalis Sm. Fourteen specimens, all females. Chapada (January, March, May, December). This species apparently belongs to Crossocerus group. Crabro atitlane Cam. Two specimens from Rio de Janeiro (November) and Benivedes (July) I refer with some doubt to atitlane. If not identical they are closely allied. Crabro productus n. sp. 92 .—Head large, closely punctured; ocelli in a curved line, space between hind pair slightly, if anything, less than that between them and eyes; clypeus sharply carinated, its fore margin rounded medially ; first joint of flagellum about one-third longer than sec- ond ; pronotum bordered anteriorly by a sharp carina, terminating in a small tooth laterally ; dorsulum rugoso-punctate, more sparsely posteriorly, depressed down middle and bicarinate; scutellum with large, separated punctures; mesopleurz longitudinally rugose, the mesosternum shining, with distant punctures; middle segment divided by a longitudinal furrow, which is deepest within the basal enclosure, which is large and rather finely rugose ; posterior face with transverse folds on rugz, not margined laterally, the sides microscopically striated ; tibize distinctly spinose; first dorsal ab- dominal segment with coarse, separated punctures, with a margin of fine ones at apex; the second segment less strongly punctured ; the remaining dorsals finely punctured; ventrals shining, the second with large, sparse punctures, the third, fourth and fifth with a trans- verse series of punctures before apex ; pygidium narrow, rounded at apex, depressed, with large punctures. Black; cheeks and sides of thorax with silvery pubescence, that on face and clypeus golden, silvery in part in certain lights; scape, line on mandibles, prono- tum, tubercles, line on metanotum, spot at apex of four anterior femora beneath, a line on all the tibize externally, the hind pair almost entirely, base of hind tarsi, large spot on each side of first 388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. two dorsal segments connected by a narrow line, a medially nar- rowed fascia on dorsals 3-5, sixth almost entirely and a short line at each side of ventrals 2, 3, or 2-4, at apex, yellow; wings subhya- line, nervures testaceous. Length about 9 mm. $.—Similar to 9 ; space between hind ocelli distinctly less than that between them and eyes; third and fourth joints of flagellum uniting in such a way as to form an emargination beneath, the fourth joint rather prominent at apex; furrowing forming the en- closure of middle segment foveolate ; punctuation of mesosternum and second ventral segment finer and closer than in the @, but that of the abdomen dorsally is coarser ; four anterior femora yellow at apex, a spot at apex of hind pair beneath ; joints 1-3 of medial tarsi produced at apex on inner side. Length 8 mm. Chapada (March, April, November, December). One ¢ exam- ple is very small,5 mm. According to Kohl’s table, belongs in the Solenius group. The collection also contains several additional species of Crabro, probably new to science, but represented by single specimens. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389 A REVISION OF THE GENUS SYNIDOTEA.* BY JAMES E. BENEDICT, PH.D. Among the unnamed Isopods in the National Museum seven spe- cies regarded as new have been referred to Synidotea as defined by Harger. Of the eight described species of the genus, five were in the collection and an additional one was loaned by the California Academy of Sciences. With so many new, and six of the eight de- scribed species at hand, it was thought best to treat the genus mono- graphically, and the descriptions of the two remaining species were added. The new species all come from the North Pacific Ocean and Ber- ing Sea. One was taken in San Francisco Bay by Mr. C. H. Townsend while examining the oyster beds for the U. S. Fish Com- mission ; the others were dredged by the ‘ Albatross,’ one off the State of Washington and five in Bering Sea; two of the latter had, however, previously been taken by Mr. W. H. Dall. The bathymetrical range of the genus is from shallow water to 695 fathoms. The geographical range is as follows: One species in South African waters, one from Japan, one from Lower California, two from California, one off the State of Washington, seven in Ber- ing Sea and the adjacent. waters of the Arctic Ocean, and two from the North Atlantic. The genus Synidotea was instituted by Harger in 1878 to receive Idotea bicuspida Owen and I. nodulosa Krdyer. The two species now represent the two sections of the genus; the bicuspida section contains eleven and the nodulosa four species. All of the species come well within the limits of the genus. The antenne of all have multi-articulate flagella. The palpus of the maxillipeds has but three joints. The epimera of the four an- terior segments are indicated, if at all, by a slight notch or pit in the posterior margins midway between the lateral margins and the median line; the epimera of the three posterior segments are dis- tinctly outlined in a dorsal view, and are solidly united to the true * Published by permission of the Sécretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 26 390 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. segmental margins. The abdomen is composed of two segments united above but separated at the sides by short incisions. Tn addition to the above generic characters, most species agree in having the head excavated in front, a cross-like areolation between the eyes, the extremities of the cross being usually armed with tuber- cles or spines; in having a spine or tubercle between the eyes and the front. A deep transverse suture near the back of the head cuts off a posteephalic lobe or areolation; between this areolation and the cross are two lateral areolations, sometimes united at the base and sometimes separated by a channel. The sides of the thorax in all species show undulations or nodules of more or less prominence. The section of the genus of which bicuspida is the type is charac- terized by having the distal end of the abdomen emarginate or bi- cuspid, while in the nodulosa section the end is bluntly pointed. The basal plates of the operculum in all species except harfordi are crossed by a diagonal line or ridge. SYNIDOTEA Harger. Synidotea Harger, American Journal of Science (3), XV, p. 374, 1878. Edotia Miers, Journal Linn. Soc. Lond., XVI, p. 65 (pars),? 1883. Synidotea G. O. Sars, Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition, Crust., p. 116, 1885 Synidotea Harger, character emended. “Antenne with an articulated flagellum.” Epimeral sutures not evident above on the first four segments; on the last three the lines of demarcation are more or less distinct. ‘“ Pleon apparently com- posed of two segments, united above but separated at the sides by short incisions. Operculum with a single apical plate. Palpus of maxillipeds three-jointed.” ! Miers, in his “ Revision of the Idoteid ” in this journal, unites several genera under Edotia Guérin-Méneyille, then arranges Fdotia in three sec- tions as follows: 2 Antenne well developed, with the flagellum composed of several joints. ose boomed uniarticulate. (Synidotea). 2 Antenne very small, with the flagellum rudimentary ; postabdomen uni- Secu ( Edotia). 222 Flagellum of the antennz obsolete ; postabdomen biarticnlate: ( Desmares- tia, Epelys. ) In this arrangement Professor Sars does not concur, but says in regard to Synidotea, “ This genus was first instituted by Harger, and should unquestion- ably be maintained.” 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 391 Key to Species Examined. a Abdomen emarginate or notched at the distal end. b Two spines or tubercles overhanging the frontal notch. c Spines united near the base. pallida ec’ Tubercles free at the base. eros b’ No spines or tubercles overhanging the frontal notch. e With a low ridge arising between the eyes and interrupted on the median line. d Outlines of abdomen subparallel. nebulosa d’ Outlines strongly arcuate. angulata ce’ Without a ridge between the eyes. d Outline of abdomen subtriangular. e Front not excavated. consolidata e’ Front excavated. f Outlines of thorax subparallel. marmorata f’ Outlines of thorax strongly arcuate. bicuspida d’ Outlines of abdomen rounded. e Length of abdomen equal to width at base. laticauda e’ Length of abdomen equal to one and one-half times the width at base. harfordi a’ Abdomen pointed. b Undulations of the body not tubercular or spiny. e Tubercle in front of the eyes not margined. nodulosa e’ Tubercle on the frontal margin and forming a part of it. levis b’ Undulations of the body tubercular and spiny. e Four spines on the front of the head; body spinous. muricata ce’ A wedge-shaped tubercle behind the frontal notch; body tubercular. picta Synidotea bicuspida (Owen). Fig. 1. Idotea bicuspida Owen, Crustacea of the ‘ Blossom,’ p. 92, pl. xxvii, fig. 6, 1839. Idotea pulchra Lockington, Proc. Cali. Acad. Sci., VII. p. 44, 1877. Edotia bicuspida Miers, Journal of the Linnean Society of London, XVI, p. 66, 1883 (pars). Synidotea bicuspida Sars, Crustacea, Norwegian North Atlantic Exped., p. 116, pl. X, figs. 24-26, 1885; equal to Synidotea incisa Sars, Crustacea et Pycnogonida nova, etc., No. 8. 392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. There are a large number of speci- mens of this species in the collection from Bering Sea and the Arctic Ocean. The species is the largest and its shell is the heaviest and strongest of any in the genus. This and the closely re- lated Atlantic form, S. marmorata Packard, and the small Californian species S. consolidata (Stimpson), are easily distinguished from any known species by the triangular abdomen with a comparatively sharp bicuspid apex. Some of the largest specimens measure 31 mm. in length and 14.5 in width. Fig. 1. Synidotea bi id 6 (Onesie ye ae : Shallow water to 56 fathoms. Synidotea marmorata (Packard). Fig. 2. Idotza marmorata Packard, Memoirs Boston Society of Natural History, I, p. 296, pl. viii, fig. 6, 1867. Whiteaves, Canad. Nat., p. 262, 1875. Idotea marmorata equals I. bicuspida Streets and Kingsley, Bulletin Essex Institute, IX, p. 108, 1877. : ? Idothea rugulosa Buchholz, Zweite Deutsche Nordpolarf., I, p. 285, 1874. Synidotea bicuspida Harger, Proceedings U. S. National Museum, II, p. 160, 1879; also U. S. Fish Commission Report for 1878, p. 352, 1880. Edotia bicuspida Miers, Jour. Linn. Soc. Lond., X VI, p. 66, 1883 (pars). This species was described by A. S. Packard, Jr., in his paper on the “ Recent Invertebrate Fauna of La- brador” from specimens taken in Kyuetarbuck Bay in seven fathoms on asandy bottom. The National Museum series consists of four spec- imens from Station 2,481, lat. N. 43° 00’ 00”, lon. W. 50° 47’ 30”, 129 fathoms; one from Station 2,436, lat. N. 43° 36’ 00”, lon. W. 50° 06’ 30”, 36 fathoms, and five from the Gloucester fishermen. Compared with S. bicuspida it is not so wide ; the thin epimeral pro- jections so prominent in bicuspida (Fig. 2. Synidotea marmorata are much reduced in this species ; Packard. x 23. the joints of the antenne are relatively longer and more slender in marmorata. The average size of the specimens of marmorata is much 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 393 smaller than those of bicuspida; a larger series might change this. The largest male S. marmorata measures 18 mm. in length and 7 mm. in width. A male S. bicuspida of about equal size, measures 17 mm. in length and 8 in width. Synidotea consolidata (Stimpson). Fig. 3. Idotea consolidata Stimpson, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., I, p. (89) 97, 1856, also Boston Jour. Nat. Hist., VI, p. 503, 1857. Edotia bicuspida (nec Idotea bicuspida Owen ) Miers, Jour. Linn. Soc. Lond., XVI, p. 66, 1883 (pars). Two specimens of this species, labelled ‘Pacific Grove, California,’ were received from Mr. J. O. Snyder. The front is emarginate, the median notch is large. The deep excavation of the front in S. bicuspida is in sharp contrast to the nearly straight front of this species. Be- hind the frontal notch is a pair of large, blunt tubercles transversely placed. The lateral margins of the thorax are subparallel in the male and strongly arcuate in the fe- male. The margins are incised in this spe- cies ; in bicuspida they are full. There isa line of low swellings on the median line and another line of like swellings part way be- Fig 8. Synidotea con- tween the median lineand the margin. The solidata (Stimpson). x $.* abdomen is much like that of bicuspida. Synidotea laticauda, new species. Fig. 4. a Lae A single specimen of Synidotea was taken by Mr. C. H. Townsend in San Francisco Bay ; it is readily distinguished from any species yet described. The head is wider than long, the anterior margin is nearly straight and is slightly produced horizon- tally; its whole upper surface is evenly swollen and has neither ele- vations nor depressions of any kind ; the cephalic lobe is little more than indicated. The eyes are large, Fig. 4. Synidotea laticauda round, lateral and but very slightly Benedict. x 2} projecting. The antenne are equal * Incorrect. The antenne should be placed as in the others and show seven or eight joints in the flagella. 394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. to the head and thorax in length, the flagellum has twenty-one arti- cles. The basal segment of the peduncle is short, reaching but a little beyond the front; the second segment is as broad as long ; the third segment is about once and a half as long as broad; the fourth is a little more than twice the breadth ; the fifth is nearly as long as the third and fourth together. The antennule extend a lit- tle beyond the base of the fourth segment of the antenne. The thorax is widest at the fourth segment. From the sides of the fourth segment the outline curves around to the eye. Poste- riorly from the fourth segment the outline is straight to the distal third of the abdomen. The second, third and fourth segments are longest. There are no spines or tubercles anywhere and the rugos- ities so common to the species of the genus are barely indicated. The abdomen is very little longer than its breadth at the base. It tapers gradually for the first two-thirds of its length where it be- gins to taper more rapidly to a broad emarginate extremity. The feet are sparsely set with coarse hair. The valves of the operculum are diagonally crossed by a curved line. The specimen is clouded with dark patches made up of small black spots. This species can be distinguished from any other yet described by its broadly emarginate abdomen. Length 17 mm., width 7 mm. (No. 20,504, U.S. N. M.). Synidotea nebulosa, new species. Fig. 5. The front of the head is exca- vated ; between the median notch and the antero-lateral margin the outline is emarginate ; between the margin and the eyes the protuber- ances are but little elevated; the cross areolation is smooth; the lat- eral areolations are separated by an extension of the cross; this ex- tension is itself slightly divided by aslightly impressed line. The de- pression in front of the postce- phalic lobe is deep. The sides of the head extend to the vertical line of the eyes, cutting off the vi- sion from objects directly below. Fig. 5. Synidotea nebulosa The antennz are about 6 mm. in Benedict. x ?. Py i en. Ta, ee ES = 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 395 length in a large specimen and have a ten-jointed flagellum; the distal joint of the peduncle is 1.5 mm. in length. The outline of the thorax is ovate in both sexes; the undulations are distinct; the fourth segment is the longest. The epimeral sutures of the three posterior segments can be made out under a lens. The incisions on the sides of the abdomen are short ; the areolations at the base and summit are large and smooth. The lateral outline of the anterior half is straight or slightly concave, of the posterior half convex. The distal end is slightly excavated. Several specimens of both sexes were taken at Station 3,600 in company with S. picta, and at Station 3,637 in 32 fathoms. Mr. Dall obtained them at Unalaska in 16 fathoms ; at Kyska Harbor, 9 to 16 fathoms; Semidi Islands, 12 to 25 fathoms. Types (No. 20,503, U.S. N. M.) from Station 3,600, lat. N. 55° 06’ 00”, lon. W. 163° 28’ 00”, 9 fathoms. This species can be distinguished at sight from all other alcoholic specimens of the genus by its dark-colored head and fourth segment, and by the dark line surrounding the elevated portions of the abdo- men. The first and last three segments of the thorax are light with small flakes of black uniformly sprinkled over the surface; the median line of the first three is usually broad and dark. Length of a large male, 17 mm.; width, 6.5 mm. Length of a large female, 15 mm.; width, 7 mm. Synidotea angulata, new species. Fig. 6. This is a small species easily distin- guished from the others of the genus in its region by the angular and projecting lateral margins of the first three thoracic segments; it is most nearly related to S. nebulosa. The head is excavated in front in a nearly even curve, and there is no dis- tinct median notch as in nebulosa. Be- tween the eyes and the front the tuber- cles are very low and inconspicuous ; the cross areolation is a low ridge inter- BS rupted in the middle by a V-shaped Fig. 6. Synidotea angulata notch; the lateral areolations of other Benedict. x j. species, in this, form a single transverse areolation not at all separated in the middle; it is separated from the postcephalic lobe by a deep impression. The sides of the head 396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. do not extend to the vertical line of the eyes. The flagellum of the antenne has nine or ten joints. The sides of the thorax are very much less arcuate than in nebulosa, and where in the latter species the margins are rounded, in this they project in obtuse angles; the lateral margins of the three posterior segments are straight. The abdomen is very much as in nebulosa. In color this species in part simulates nebulosa. In the specimens examined it lacks the black flakes, there is a line of spots near the margin and one in line with | the epimeral lines. The largest good specimen is 11 mm. in length. Stations 2,868, 2,869 and 2,872, in 31 to 38 fathoms, Station 2,869, lat. N. 47° 38’ 00”, lon. W. 124° 39’ 00”; 32 fath- oms. Types (No. 20,506, U.S. N. M.). Synidotea pallida, new species. Fig. 7. The frontal margin is deeply and evenly concave, there being no median notch. The surface between the eyes is protuberant (I\NY and is divided bya slightme- @\ dian impressed line. In the la angle formed by the raised por- ey tion between the eyes and the horizontal front are two horn- ho like tubercles united atthebases ~—4 by a very short ridge across the \ Ke ZA median line. The cephalic su- if Uf ture is deep but closed at the { / bottom. The peduncles of the | f) antennz are about equal to the \ U flagella in length; the latter \ : have from 12 to 16 segments. Wj The eyes are small, situated ata Fig. 7. Synidotea pallida Benedict. distance from the margin on x 23. slight elevations. The sides of the head and of all the thoracic seg- ments are thin and produced, nearly horizontal. ‘The four anterior segments are long, with rounded post-lateral angles, the three pos- terior segments are short with subacute angles. On each side at a little distance from the median line on the 2d, 3d and 4th segments isa single spine. In young specimens the spines are proportion- ately longer and they are replaced on the posterior segments by low 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397 tubercles ; the median line is also tubercular. The legs are long and slender on the 7th segment, a little shorter on the 6th, and so on to the 1st which are quite short. The abdomen is markedly narrower than the 7th segment, it tap- ers gradually to a point near the end which is broad and well rounded, the median line ends in a small concavity best seen with a lens. Excepting the usual lateral incisions, the upper surface is smooth and glabrous. A large male measures 22 mm. in length and 7.5 in breadth; a female, with eggs, 12 mm. in Jength and 4.5 in breadth. Not less than one thousand specimens of this species were dredged off Chirikoff Island, Alaska, at Station 3,340, lat. N. 55° 26’ 00”, lon. W. 155° 26’ 00”, 695 fathoms (No. 20,500, U. S. N. M.). Synidotea erosa, new species. Fig. 8. Several specimens of this species were dredged at Station 3,210 off San- nakh Islands, Alaska, in 483 fathoms ; lat. N. 54° 00’ 00”, lon. W. 162° 40’ 30” (No. 20,505, U. S. N. M.). Erosa is more nearly related to S. pallida than to any species yet dis- covered, as in the latter there are two horn-like protuberances just back of the frontal margin. The cephalic su- ture is the same except that it is more open at the bottom. The other pro- tuberances and depressions of the head are the same, except that in erosa there is a prominent tubercle between the eile! We Gynidoralerosa eyes and the front; in S. pallida this Benedict. x 2. is lacking, or, if represented at all, by a low swelling. All of the projections of the head are more or less eroded. The segments of the thorax have very low tubercles or slight swellings where the spines are situ- ated in pallida. The ruge of the lowest portions of the thorax are much more prominent in this species. In outline erosa is narrower and less arcuate, the outer margins of the segments are much less produced. The 7th segment is not noticeably wider than the base of the abdomen. The abdomen holds its width to a point beyond the middle, whence it is rounded to the terminus, which, as in 398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. pallida, is slightly concave. The slightly arcuate outline of the thorax running into the straight outline of the abdomen differenti- ates this from all other species of the genus. Other differences are, the larger eyes situated nearer the margin of the head, the very hairy edges of the valve, and the sparsely granulated abdomen. The length of the adults from which the foregoing description is made ranges from 21 to 22 mm. A female, about 14 mm. in length, has arcuate lateral margins, and all of the tubercles of the large male are exaggerated in size ; the tubercles between the eyes and the front and the pair separated by the median line form a row of four large tubercles on the front. The young males have almost parallel sides; the median tuber- cles of the front are swollen and much eroded, as are all of the prominences of the head. On each of the first four segments of the thorax is a median tubercle on the transverse ridge and also a smaller one in front of it; there is another row of tubercles on the sides. ‘The sides of the abdomen are rough and warty. Synidotea nodulosa (Krgyer). The limits of this species are hard to define. All of the species with pointed abdomens are very similar, yet constitute, I believe, good species. Abundant material will not unlikely show that addi- tional species must be recognized. Krgyer described nodulosa from South Greenland; Harger had several specimens from the Eastern Fishing Banks and also records them from off Queen Charlotte Island. I have not found nodulosa in the west coast collections. A dry spe- cimen from Jugor Schar presented by the Royal Zoological Museum of Copenhagen has the cross areolation between the eyes armed with four tubercles, the two on the transverse line are slightly com- pressed, those on the median line are united at the base, the poste- rior one is much the larger; the areolations between the post- cephalic lobe and the cross are well elevated, coarsely punctate, and divided on the median line; the tubercles between the margin and the eyes are well elevated and free from the margin. On each segment of the thorax a short ridge crosses the median line, form- ing a slightly elevated angular tubercle on the line. The abdo- men measures at the base about four-fifths of its length, or 4.2 mm. broad to 5.3 long. A specimen from the fishing banks of the northeast coast is prob- ably nearer Krgyer’s type than any other in the collection; in this the cross is armed with four tubercles that are much less conspicu- 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399 ous than those of the Jugor Schar specimen, the posterior one on the median line is the largest and is not so positively united at the base; the areolations behind the cross are not so elevated, and are but faintly punctate; in this and in some smaller specimens they are united on the median line; the tubercles in front of the eyes are not so nearly vertical and are much more angular ; the transverse ridges are not so large but more acute, with slight tubercles at their inter- section with the median line. The abdomen measures at its base 3.2 mm. in breadth, its length is 4.25 mm. In S. levis the cross is armed with but a single tubercle on the median line; this is not vertical as in nodulosa, but horizontal, and when seen from above covers the median notch of the front, otherwise the cross is a smooth areolation with slightly elevated transverse extremities. The areo- lations behind the cross are smooth and broadly united at the median line. The tubercles in front of the eyes arise from the mar- gin and form a part of it. The segments of the thorax are incon- spicuously tubercular on the median line. The breadth of the abdomen at the base is 4 mm., length 5.4 mm. Synidotea levis, new species. Fig, 9. Numerous specimens from Sta- tions 3,252, lat. N. 57° 22’ 20”, lon. W. 164° 24’ 40”, 292 fathoms, and 3,253, lat. N. 57° 05’ 50”, lon. W. 164° 27’ 15”, 36 fathoms, respect- ively, differ from S. nodulosa and its near allies by the lack of three -tubercles on the head and the less prominent elevations of the thorax. The cross-like areolation between the eyes is smooth with the excep- tion of a single tubercle which is prolonged horizontally over the median notch. The tubercles 0 ae which in nodulosa arise between Fig. 9. Synidotea levis Benedict. the eyes and the front, in this spe- xi. cies arise at the margin and form a part of it. They are less erect than in nodulosa and are more angular. Harger says of nodulosa, “Color in alcohol gray, often with brownish transverse markings;” these specimens are gray in alco- hol with a dark, broken, median line on the anterior segments. 400 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Length 15 mm., breadth 4.8 mm. Types (No. 20,501, U.S. N. Mis) Synidotea muricata (Harford). Fig. 10. Jdotea muricata Harford. Proe. Cal. Acad. Sci., VII, Pt. I, p. 117, (1876), 1877, Six specimens, taken by the ‘Cor- win’ off Icy Cape differ from all other species of the genus yet de- scribed by the spiny nature of the dorsal surface, head and pleon in- cluded. The locality is lat. 70° 15’ 00” N., long. 162° 55’ 00” W., in 25 fathoms. The head is deeply excavated in front, the margin running inward from the lateral prolongations to a median notch. The flagella of the antennze have from 10 to 12 seg- ments. A small spine overhangs the median notch, a second spine is situated a little behind the first, Fig. 10. Synidotea muricata a third is in line on the posterior Harford. x 23. lobe; two other spines, one on each side of the first two, form, in con- nection with them, the figure of a diamond; the spines of the median line are at the obtuse angles. A little behind the margin and in front of the eye is a short spine with a compressed base. Spines with compressed bases are not peculiar to the front, but begin on the postcephalic lobe and extend to the end of the thorax situated on transverse ridges and forming the median line of spines. The spines on the abdomen are not compressed. On either side of the median line is a lateral line of spines; below these spines on each segment is a group of five spines arranged in two transverse rows, three in the anterior and two in the posterior rows. The abdomen has two transverse ridges, the basal ridge has three spines and the next ridge five. On each side is a group of from five to nine very short spines, the number varying according to the size of the speci- men. The abdomen is broad at the base, constricted at about the middle and runs out to an acute terminus. The specimens have been in poor alcohol too long to make color notes of any value. Length of a large specimen 21 mm., breadth 7 mm. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 401 Synidotea picta, new species. Figs. 11 and 12. The head is deeply excavated in front; the notch is deep; the tuber- cles in front of the eyes are near to and overhang the margin. The median line of the cross areo- lation is elevated into a wedge-shaped ridge which overhangs the notch in a vertical view; the transverse extrem- ities of the cross are elevated forming tubercles; the lateral areolations are protuberant and are separated by a deep depression which unites with the depression in front of the postce- phalic lobe and the one behind the cross, altogether forming a B-shaped depression. The elevated portions of Fig. 11. Synidotea picta Benedict. x }. the head are pitted. The flagellum of the antennz is composed of eight or nine segments. From the anterior angles the body widens to the fourth segment; from this point it diminishes evenly in size to the end of the abdomen. All of the segments have low swellings on the median line and numerous rugosities on the sides. The ex- tremity of the abdomen is pointed; the surface is punctate. This species is beautifully colored; the Fig. 12. Synidotea picta, var. x 3. antennal peduncles are patched with dark, the anterior margins of the head are in some specimens blotched with rose; the rugosities of the thorax are tinged with red, the abdo- men is blotched with red and dark. In the more highly colored specimens the lower portion of the segments are light and red, except on the fourth which is always dark. The legs have a patch of dark on each joint. The length of a large specimen is 14 mm. The seven type specimens were dredged at Station 3,600, lat. N. 55° 06’ 00”, lon. W. 163° 28’ 00”, 9 fathoms, in company with S. nebulosa (No. 20,502, U.S. N. M.). Variety.—Specimens obtained by Mr. Dall in Bering Strait (No. 13,311, U.S. N. M.), 402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. and at Cape Lisburne (No. 13,325, U. S. N. M.) and by Lieutenant Stoney in Norton Sound (No. 13,641, U.S. N. M.), differ from the types in having a stouter abdomen and a much more solid shell; they also lack color, not unlikely because of the greater length of time in alcohol. These specimens come from localities far to the north of the station where the types were obtained. More material in a fresh state may show sound lines of demarcation that are not sufficiently evident in the material at hand. Synidotea harfordi, new name. Fig. 13. Idotxa marmorata Harford, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., VII, p. 117, 1877. The name given by Mr. Harford was preoccupied by Professor Packard in 1867. (See p. 392). The front of the head is nearly straight, the sides are bent abruptly downward and inward; the eyes are on the angle thus formed, extending the range of vision to objects beneath. The length of the antennz laid off on the median line reaches from the front to the middle of the sixth thoracic seg- ment ; the fifth joint of the peduncle equals in length the third and fourth taken together; the flagellum has twenty-two segments. The body is widest at the second and third segments, tapering forward to the antero-lateral angles of the head ; its anterior outline is arcuate ; poste- ; riorly the body tapers to the end ofthe _Fig. 18. Synidotea harfordi narrow abdomen in nearly straight Benedict, new name. x 33. lines. The four anterior segments are the longest. The sur- face of the body is finely punctate under a lens. The median line of the thorax is dark-colored ; on the second, third and fourth segments is a light and slightly impressed V-shaped line, the V opening forward ; on these segments there is also on each side of the V a diagonally-placed light spot shaped like a half-moon: the sur- face is elsewhere spotted and blotched with light and dark. The specimen is labelled ‘ Magdalena Bay, L. C., W. J. Fisher.’ Length 16.5 mm., breadth 5 mm, 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403 Synidotea hirtipes (Milne-Edwards). Idotea hirtipes Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. des Crust., III, p. 134, 1840. Krauss, Die Sudafrikan. Crust., p. 61, 1843. Edotia hirtipes Miers, Jour. Linn. Soc. Lond., XVI, p. 68, 1883. Miers’ description of Milne-Edwards’ type is as follows: “Tn this species the body is somewhat ovate, moderately convex, arcuated on the sides, evenly granulated above, with large inequal- ities on the sides of the thoracic segments at some distance from the lateral margins. Head with the anterior margin very slightly ex- cavated, and with a semicircular curved impressed line posterior to its frontal margin, and another, nearly straight line near its posterior margin ; its antero-lateral angles prominent and nearly right angles. The first three thoracic segments with an impressed curved line in the middle of the dorsal surface, and rounded at their postero-lateral angles; in none of the segments are these angles prolonged back- ward. Postabdomen short, rounded posteriorly, with a fissure on each side at its base, and with a small and shallow median emargina- tion at its distal end. Eyes large. Antennules reaching nearly to the end of the penultimate joint of the antenne, with their basal joints very small. Terminal joint of the peduncle of the antennze longer than the preceding; flagellum with about 14-21 joints. Legs long, slender, hairy, aud terminating in a long claw. Terminal plates of the opercular valves irregularly four-sided, being much narrowed at the distal end. Length of the largest specimen nearly 1 inch (25 mm.), breadth nearly 7: inch (10 mm.).” Localities, Cape of Good Hope (Types); Simon’s Bay, South Africa, in 4-7 fathoms. Synidotea levidorsalis (Miers). Edotia hirtipes, var. levidorsalis Miers, Jour. Linn. Soc. Lond., X VI, p. 69, pl. II, figs. 1, 2, 1883. Miers says of this species “ Two males are in the collection of the Museum from Jatiyama Bay, Japan, obtained at a depth of 63 fathoms, lat. 39° 2’ N., long. 189° 50’ E., presented by Dr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys and collected by Capt. H. C. St. John, R. N., that differ so slightly from I. hirtipes that I cannot regard them as specifically distinct. The body is quite smooth in the larger example, and very nearly so in the smaller (which is of larger size than any specimen of the typical I. hirtipes that I have seen), and in both is of a decidedly narrower-oval form ; the antero-lateral angles of the head 404 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. are perhaps not so prominent and more rounded; the eyes are smaller. Length of the largest example about 1 inch, 1 line (28 millim.) ; breadth about +: inch (10 millim.). In this specimen the flagellum of the antennee is about 30-jointed, but in the smaller example (length ? inch, 21 millim.) only about 21-jointed.” 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 405 GEOLOGICAL SECTION FROM MOSCOW TO SIBERIA AND RETURN. BY Dr. PERSIFOR FRAZER. The accompanying notes were made during the excursion to the Ourals which was arranged by the local committee for a certain number of Geologists before the business session of the Seventh International Geological Congress at St. Petersburg. In addition to the complete preparations for the expedition, carefully edited brochures of its different parts were printed by those Russian geologists who had devoted especial study to the districts. So far as the excursionists were concerned the section was necessarily one of inspection and verification of what had been done, rather than one of exploration for the establishment of new facts, and con- sequently, in a description like the following, the data secured in the years of long and patient investigation by the Geological Survey of Russia have been used so far as this epitome required them. The lessons learned by the numerous, long and well planned excursions made in connection with the Congress, begin appropriately with the study of Moscow and its environs, for here many of the geological stages which form the-most important points of orienta- tion in the study of south-eastern and middle Russia are well developed and have been thoroughly investigated by numerous geologists. In general terms Moscow is a city of very large area occupying a number of hills from 400 to 500 ft. above the average water level, which latter, at the southern boundary, is 348 ft. above the ocean. The hills are cut out of the boulder clay and morainic sand, the Cretacic, the Jura-Cretacic, (or Volgian), and the Jurassic down to -the middle Carbonic (or Muscovian), on which the latter rests; by the Moskowa, the Yaouza, the Néglinnaia and their little tributaries, The lowest Mesozoic rocks overlying the Carbonic are of Middle Callovian age, and in the eastern part, of the government of Moscow they rest on the upper Carbonic rocks, chemically more altered than the Muscovian which form “the rocky base on which the ancient capital is built.” [See Livret Guide, I.]. Borings undertaken to find artesian water in the Devonic have revealed 27 406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. the following measured section from the summit of one of the hills 473 ft. above water level. Feet. Argilo-arenaceous Quaternary and Mesozoic, . . . . 70 Middle Carbonic (Muscovian) limestones, . . . . . . 992 Lower Carbonic limestones,. . . . . 243 Coal bearing Argilo-arenaceous stage of the same hone 161 Devonic limestones and Marls, ........ .« 439 Total, co ge su wees co ey, so: oer The bottom of the bore hole was left in the horizon last mentioned. Briefly stated the middle Carbonic or Muscovian of the vicinity of Moscow is typical of this stage, containing many fossil forms of which half are identical with those found in lower beds of the Carbonic of western Europe, while others have been found for the first time in the Muscovian. The Jurassic fauna is practically in perfect accord with that of western Europe, except that the Sequanian is not suspectible of differentiation and the Kimmeridgian is petrographically and stratigraphically confounded with the overlying Volgian. On the question of the Volgian appears the first of several sub- jects of debate among the Russian geologists. The author of the brochure (L. G., I.) M. Nikitin thus defines the Volgian to which he gave the name :— : “The Volgian comprises all those deposits in central and northern Russia which are found between the beds of the Kimmeridgian of Hoplites eudoxus and those of the middle Neocomian, lower part of the upper Neocomian (Hauterivian) stage containing Olcostephanus versicolor.” The author, while admitting the possibility that in many parts of Russia where the Volgian is represented by only a portion of its beds, the explanation may be found in the non-deposition or subsequent erosion of the missing parts, inclines to the opinion that so far as the vicinity of Moscow is concerned the apparent absence of Kimmeridgian is caused by the insufficient preservation of fossils, while the absence of the upper Volgian and of the middle Neo- comian is to be attributed to the first two mentioned reasons. These measures have been principally studied by Nikitin, Bogos- lovsky and Pavlov of the University of Moscow. Nikitin thinks that the Volgian group possesses a type of its own not recognized in the classification and terminologies of western 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 407 Europe, and prefers not to attempt its division between the upper Jurassic and the lower Cretacic until a great deal more work has been accomplished. Bogoslovsky terminates the upper Volgian at the horizon Olcostephanus nodiger which he considers the upper- most limit of Jurassic as that of Hoplites Rjasanensis is of the Neocomian and the bed Ole. polyptychus and Ole. hoplitoides the principal lower bed of the Neocomian. Pavlov, while accepting the succession of the others, classes the entire Volgian group with the Jurassic, adding also a part of the Neocomian of western Europe. With this preliminary glance at the formations in the vicinity of Moscow, we were prepared to enter upon the first of the great excursions, or that to the Ourals. The start was S. E. down the Moskwa on the Moscow-Riazan Railway, which runs over the lower arenaceous member of the boulder clay or the eluvion which was laid down upon it after the erosion of the morainie upper part. To Bykowa the cuts and pits show white stratified sands belonging to the upper Volgian. S. E. of Lioubertzy the surface of the hills is said to be formed of sands and sandstones, partially modified to quartzite containing ammonites typical of the zone of Olcostephanus nodiger and Oxynoticeras subclypeiforme. The lower Volgian is found at Miatchkowo resting on gray and black stratified clays with intercalations of dark brown argillaceous, combustible schists, 28 to 33 ft. in thickness, corresponding in general to the Oxfordian and Sequanian. M. Nikitin was led to conclude from a study of this series that at least in central Russia there exists an intimate connection between the beds of Cardioceras cordatum and those of C. alternans, which appears not only in the continuation of the greater part of the conchifers and gasteropods from one horizon to the other, but also in the gradual change and passage of some forms of ammonites and other species [L. G., II.].. This conclusion is of the greatest importance to the student of the Jurassic in Central Russia. Pursuing the route through the government of Riazan along the river Pronia, the lower Volgian and upper Jurassic representatives are seen to disappear so that the horizon Hoplites Rjasanensis rests successively, first on the Oxfordian and later, near the town of Skopine, on the Callovian. The Carbonic limestones also show gradually descending outcrops from the lower stages of the Mus- covian, through the different levels of the lower limestones of 408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Productus giganteus and finally to the lower coal in the neighbor- hood of Riajsk and Skopine. The quaternary boulder clay of this region contains large blocks of crystalline and quartzitic rocks from Finland. All these quaternary deposits of this region are covered by a dark brown or black soil, which the Russian investi- gators agree to divide into two classes. 1st. the “tschernozem ” properly so-called, which is dark brown or black, 0°5 meter or more in thickness, rich in humus, lime and zeolites, formed in place by the alteration of various superficial deposits, ete. 2. Forest earth, also dark brown or black, but of different physico- chemical constitution. It may be true, however, that the tschernozem of the steppes when covered by forests is gradually transformed into forest earth. These two kinds of soil and the resulting steppe and forest alter- nate in the region between the Pronia and the Volga. The line of route from Riajsk through Pensa to the neighborhood of Syzran follows the great trans-Siberian railway over upper Cretacic and lower Tertiary steppes of moderate glacial interest, and considerable monotony, but at the latter place there is an abrupt change. About 760 km. from Moscow by railway, or 1,400 km. from the head-waters of the Volga not far from St. Petersburg, a sudden change in the landscape and surroundings on close approach to the great river indicates that some special forces have been at work in this neighborhood. In the first place, the Volga, after pursuing a generally south direction from Kazan, abruptly turns to the east for about sixty kilometers while skirting the north flank of the Jegouli Mountains, but here breaking through them perpendicular to the axis of their prolongation, and leaving a large enough mass on the left bank to act as one of the two posts of the gates of Samara, it returns in a direction parallel and opposite to that by which it had come, and finally resumes its southerly course with some slight westing toward the Caspian Sea, distant about 1,000 kilometers. It appears that a gentle anticlinal, with an axis running northerly, and reeog- nized further to the north in the tilted Permian limestones of the right bank of the Volga, has suffered a local dislocation resulting in a fault cutting through it almost at right angles, and bent in the west flank. The fault passes along the north side of the peninsula, which is called Samarskaia Louka, after the large city opposite its extreme point. Both sides of this fault-line the measures dip S.S.E., but the north side has been depressed, while that to the south 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 409 has been elevated. In the depression of the river Syzran the depos- its of the Caspian have been laid down. Following the Syzran River down stream over its easterly course to join the Volga, one sees to the south of the fault the successive appearance of ever older measures, from the upper through the lower Cretacic, the Volgian, the Callo- vian, and, finally, near the town of Syzran, the upper Carbonic. The railway runs along the heights commanding the town of Syzran, which consist of Jurassic and Volgian, but as soon as it has passed that town it descends and runs along the right bank of the Volga, on the terrace of these formations resting on the Carbonic limestone, to the village of Batraki, south of the Samarskaia Louka. Thence a short distance down the Volga (+- 15 km.) one reaches Kashpour. On the hill of this name one sees in succession downward from the top various horizons of the Cretacic, the Volgian, and finally the river deposits. Above Batraki, a less distance, one comes to the great bridge of the trans-Siberian railway across the Volga, 1,485 meters long, on twelve piers, and estimated at 150 ft. above the river. At the abutments the Carbonic deposits are compact lime- stones more or less dolomitic, containing Fusulina and saturated with asphalt as at Syzran. The orographic feature of the approach to Syzran is the eleva- tion caused by the fault passing north of the Samarskaia Louka, at the great bend of the Volga. The part of this elevation at and west of Syzran is called the Syzran Mountains, that of the nucleus of the peninsula the Jegouli, and on the opposite or left bank of the river, the Mountains of Sok. The main mass of these mountains is composed of Permian-measures ; but in the neigh- borhood of Samara, as at Samarskaia Louka, deposits with shells of Cardium, Corbicula and Hydrobia give the impression that these are the remains of the the Caspian basin. The terrace clays are distinctly laid on the Permian, but the Caspian sediments which are only of insignificant thickness, are found in detached islands, and may be seen far up on the heights of the Volga throughout the whole course from Kashpour. The upper beds of the Permian at Samara are compact limestones with intercalations and masses of gypsum and silex, which have made the construction of the railroad bed very difficult in places on account of the tendency to landslides. The lower Permian beds, oolitic in places, are rich in lamellibranchs, gasteropods and brachyopods characteristic of the Permian. 410 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Below, there is a cavernous brecciform limestone formed of fragments of limestone cemented together by calcareous matter, but without fossils. It is about 83 feet thick, occurs about 4 kilom. up the Volga from Samara, and forms a large part of the upper part of the Mountains of Sok. Some kilometers before reaching the con- fluence of the Volga and Sok the Carbonic limestone shows itself beneath the brecciated limestone in the sandy beds as in the moun- tains of Jegouli. The upper horizon shows Schwagerina limestone. Separated from the Sok Mountains by the valley of that name is the mountain or hill called Tzarev-Kourgan (Hill of the Tsar). It shows in descending order from the top: Limestone with Fusulina longissima and other Fusulinas, Spiriferina Tarane, and Productus Villiersi. (d) Limestone with Bellerophon, large, as yet undetermined Spirifers, Nautilus, Orthoceras. (¢) Dolomites with Productus Cora. (6) Limestone of Productus scabriculus, Camarophoria crumena, Meekella eximia. (a) Limestone of corals and bryozoans. The Hill of the Tsar is thus formed by the same limestones as those constituting the greater part of the Jegouli, and like that of the fauna of gshélien age near Moscow. The long distance from Samara to Oufa over the trans-Volgian steppes is over the Permo-Trias and the Permian. The modelling of the country is so strikingly like that of the bad lands of South Dakota and other parts of the western United States that no one who had seen both could fail to be struck by the resemblance. The geology would seem to be of the simplest, viz.: the very gradual succession of continually lower horizons from the Volga to the Ourals. But we come unexpectedly here upon another burning question which divides the geologists of the official survey and others from Stuckenburg, Kratov, Netchatev, Amalitzky and still others. The Geological Survey sees in these beds which it marks P T., and which lie between the Permian and Trias, a series of transitional deposits not closely analogous to those in similar horizons in central Europe, and proposes for them provisionally the name Tartarian. The opponents of this view class all the upper beds of the iridescent marls as Permian. The Russian Survey recognizes two series of red and iridescent rocks. The first it calls the Tartarian, which 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 411 caps the beds of Zechstein fauna, and the other lies below the Zech- stein, corresponding in part with its lowest horizons. As approach is made to Oufa one after the other of the dis- tinguishing beds in the two formations rises slowly and loses itself farther east on the tops of the nearest hills. The gray group of schistose limestone and marls intercalated with friable sandstone marking next to the uppermost member of the Permian, recognized by the Russian Survey, shows itself for the last time on the summit of Yarych-Taou, the last of the conical mountains of erosion along the Dioma. ‘The appearance of a red group in the sections near Oufa has caused many geologists to ascribe this horizon to the Tartarian, which the geologists of the survey hold tu be an error, maintaining that the ravines and sections establish beyond doubt that the measures increase in age as one goes eastward. Oufa may be properly said to lie on the line which marks the foot of the Ourals, because at about this distance from the axis of the Oural chain the streams having broken through the west flanking foot hills of the main chain take the final courses to fulfil their ultimate destiny of irrigating and fructifying the trans-Volgian steppes. The Permian plateau on which Oufa stands is cut by three rivers: the Oufa, the Sim, and the Biéleia, into three elevated plateaux separated by deep and rich valleys. The immediate neigh- borhood of Oufa has not furnished distinctive fossils, but the sections along the Biéleia and its aflluents have convinced the geological surveyors that the upper part of the section at Oufa corresponds with the lower Permian red bed which is capped by the gray arena- ceous Zechstein bed, richly furnished with fossils that can be seen in the sections of Slak, the mountains Yarych-Taou, ete., between Samara and Oufa. The lower gypsiferous and calco-gypsiferous bed at the base of the Oufa section can be seen to have intimate relations with the gray, compact, tile-like limestones, and dolomites, and the cavernous, spotted brecciform limestones containing many casts of Bellerophon, remains of Productus and Orthoceras, accompanied by Schizodus truncatus, Astarte Permo-Carbonico, Macrodium kingia- num, and corresponds to the lower Zechstein of southern and central Russia, situated below the lowest bed of Permian red. [See L. G., Iif.] As an aid in understanding the orography of the western half of the Ourals (from which the eastern half is entirely different) let it be 412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. borne in mind that the westward flowing streams usually have their origin in extensive marshes and bogs lying in the elevated parts of the longitudinal valleys, and covering many square wersts' or kilo- meters. The first part of their course, or that more or less on the line of the meridian north or south, is usually rapid and tumultuous. In their middle course they take a sudden change in a direction at right angles to their final course and descending with the same rapidity cut through gorges ten wersts or so in length with abrupt and sometimes vertical walls 100 meters and more in height. Having passed the westernmost rocky barrier the rivers flow sluggishly through large alluvial valleys in which rock in place is rarely seen, and the affluents of the larger streams are few and small. These valleys are filled with the remains of ancient river and lake beds, and show distinctly alluvial terraces. Having brought the section to the lower Permian spotted lime- stones and dolomites the further journey east reveals a series to which the name Permo-Carbonic has been given.’ This band separating the two groups is divided into an upper or calcareo-dolomitic, and a lower member called the horizon of Artinsk. This latter contains sandstones, limestones, marls and various schists. Karpinsky, Kratow and Tschernischew have shown that it is characterized by original ammonitides of great interest since the discovery of similar forms at Darvas in Sicily, in Texas, and other places. It contains brachiopods also, of which the study has established the connection of the different subdivisions of the Pro- ductus limestone of the salt range with the paleozoic deposits of the Oural. The Carbonic of the South Oural consists exclusively of three sections of limestones each, and especially the uppermost, character- ized by an abundant fauna. The Devonic is also represented here in all of its three sections, of which the lower is much the most interesting, both because to it is attributed the rocks forming the highest chains of the Ourals, and because it is therefore the real crux in the geology of these mountains which is destined to give rise to a voluminous literature, and remain a moot point among geologists for many years to come. The middle division of the Devonic is also of interest as frequently containing a 1 Eleven kilometers are reckoned equal to ten wersts. 2 It would have been more in conformity with usuge had the name been Carbono-Permian. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415 development of its limestones and marls in innumerable swellings or lumps of various sizes from a few inches to a few feet in diameter, which on examination prove to consist either of concentric cabbage- like layers, or of irregular foliations like the bent leaves of a book. The immensely important conditions which follow from the acceptation of the Russian Survey’s determination of the relations of the rocks forming the Oural-Taou, or main chain of the Oural, makes it desirable to consider it a little more attentively. The Oural-Taou, or main chain, and water-divide of those moun- tains is formed of crystalline schistose rocks, which are in intimate connection with deposits of indisputable paleozoic age, and which themselves are nothing but modified paleozoic rocks, This is the ‘terse summing up of the thesis [L. G., III, 12], and the argument is contained in the ideal section (ib., p. 11), in which the lower Devonic member is shown to be a quartzite lying in a synclinal between schists and limestones above and below; and the lower of these lime- stones is stated to contain no fossils by which its age can be definitely ascertained in the northern Oural region. But in the South Ourals it contains an extensive fauna described by Tschernischew. Section trom the Ligaloa to the Avniar (from lLivret Guide ID. pu) Fie. 1, Dj? Limestone. Upper stage of the Lower Devonic. Dj} g Quartzose sandstone and schists. Di c Limestones. M Metamorphic schists and quartzites. The section representing the views of the Russian Geological Survey as to the structure of the Oural chain is seen in L. G., III, p. 11, and is thus described by M. Tschernischew :— “The most instructive section of the lower Devonic of the south Ourals extends south of the line of railway, from the chain of 414 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Zigalga to Avniar transversely to the direction of the Zigalga and of the Bakti and crossing the rivers Yourezan, Avniar, and Biéleia. This section shows the principal mass of the bed of quartzose sand- stone Di g between two schistose beds of which the lower rests directly on the oldest limestones Di ¢ of characteristic fauna. The predominant rock of the lower schistose hed is a black sericitic schist reflecting on its steel-gray surface, sometimes a silky lustre. Quite often is observed the passage of these schists into micaceous and chloritice varieties, very rich in magnetite and hematite. Taking up quartz these schists pass into micaceous and talcose quartzites. In places the black argillaceous schist shows inclusions of large pyrite crystals, and pseudomorphs of pyrite in limonite.” ‘This black schist is associated in the lower part of the bed D} e with a serecitic schist nearly of the same composition as the black, but poorer in carbonaceous matter and consequently of a lighter shade.’ ‘After a certain amount of practice it is easy to distinguish the lower schists, situated under the horizon of quartzites and sandstones, from the schists which surmount this horizon. The latter of very variable color, structure, and composition never have this reflexion on the plane surface but they pass also, though very rarely, and in exceptional cases, into chloritic and ottrelitic schists. Their color, sometimes banded, varies between dark gray almost black, yellowish, greenish, and reddish gray. Marly sandstone, marls, and limestones occupy a second rank in the bed Dj g.’ ‘A series of rocks Di g separates, as we have said, two beds of limestone essentially different from a paleontological point of view. The upper limestones D{ g of which the type is developed in the Yourézan valley encloses subordinate beds of argillaceous schists and marly sandstones. Their paleontological character is described in the paper, ‘ Die Fauna des unteren Devon am Westabhange des Ural,’ by Th. Tschernischew. This horizon is especially character- istic by its abundance of Leperditia Barboti, small trilobites of the genus Cyphaspis, Pentamerus fasciculatus, Pentamerus baschkiricus, remains of conchifers Conocardium crenatum, Buchiola sexcostata and other forms.’ ‘The lower limestones D1 ¢ capped by the bed Dj g and often found between metamorphic rocks (as in the upper course of the Biéleia), are distinguished by their lighter tints, and a marble structure. Their fauna described in the above work by Tschernis- 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415 chew is distinguished by a great variety of forms; 7. ¢., numerous remains of ostracodes, cephalopods, Platyceras, representatives of Hercynella (H. bohemica), and peculiar conchifers ( Viasta Dalila).” In the section this limestone apparently rests conformably on the group “M” of metamorphic schists and quartzites, which is thus assumed to be of lower Devonic origin. The lower division of the Devonic is thus described (1. ¢., 10): “Tt has great petrographic diversity. The varieties most devel- oped include quartzose sandstone without feldspar, arkoses and conglomerates. These are the rocks that form the ridges of the most cousiderable parallel chains of the South Oural. In the eastern summits is observed a gradual transition from sandstone, arkoses and conglomerates, to compact quartzites, charged more or less with mica. The lower schist is a black sericitic schist, giving a steel gray sometimes silky reflexion on the surface. Frequently the passage of these schists to micaceous and chloritic varieties, very rich in magnetite and iron oxide, can be observed. Taking up quartz these schists pass into micaceous and talcose quartzites. In places the black argillaceous schist shows inclusions of large crystals of pyrite and pseudomorphs of pyrite in limonite. his black schist is asso” ciated in the lower part of the bed Dig with a sericitic schist nearly of the same composition as the black, but poorer iv carbona- ceous matter, and therefore of lighter color.’”* “The rock most largely developed in the underlying group M is a mica schist composed of quartz and mica, to which is ordinarily joined a greater or less quantity of chlorite and magnetite. The element of greatest interest in these mica schists, and chloritic mica schists, is the orthose, which occurs in irregular and often broken fragments. Very often these are enclosed in grains of quartz or mica. Indications of the substitution of quartz and mica abound in the cleavage of these orthoses. Tourmaline, and in the neighbor- hood of Slatooust, garnets and staurotide are the most frequent in- clusions in the mica schists.” “ Besides these schists the crystalline region comprises M a series of argillo-schistose rocks which show the transition of typical phyllites into the clastic argillaceous schists of the lower Devonic. The massive rocks of M are represented only by granites and diabases. Among the granites can be distinguished the gneisso-granites and the coarsely crystalline porphyritic granites resembling what is called Rappakiwi from Finland, which is much used for building, and forms ~ 8 See preceding page. 416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. the pillars of St. Isaak’s as well as the parapet of the Neva within the city of St. Petersburg. Such is the veriest skeleton outline of the facts of structure stated by M. Tschernischew in L. G., III, and which he illustrated by the nine days of excursions between Oufa and the crest or median line of the Ourals. A point of the greatest interest, but connected with the structure at the uppermost extremity of the scale must not be forgotten for it constitutes a lesson of the trip second in importance to no other. It is in effect that the ex- plorations of the river terraces of the Biélaia leave no doubt of the relations between the upper terraces and the post pliocene deposits of the Caspian sea invasion. The conclusion is that these upper terraces belong to an epoch, when the Caspian Sea played the part of a dyke which brought about the raising of the level of the Kama, the Biéleia and their affluents with the consequent decrease of the rapidity of their currents and therefore of their erosive force. In proportion to the retreat of the Caspian sea, the erosive power of the rivers must haye augmented, from which resulted the narrow- ing and deepening of these beds and the formation of terraces. ‘This latitude is about that of the northernmost deposits, attributed to the former Caspian Sea, (57° North), while the southernmost similar formation ascribed to the action of the White or Northern Sea lies approximately on lat. 61° North, leaving 4° or about 440 kilo- meters (273 miles) in which the traces of neither sea have been found, but in their places the evidences of lacustrian remains filling the gap. The route from Oufa was along the post pliocene terrace of the River Sim, to the upper Carbonic limestone mountain, Kyssy- Taou, containing Sehwagerina, while on the left were the lower Permo-Carbonic deposits of Artinsk. Descending the mountain again to the terrace, this latter is followed to the station Ascha. Proceeding in general northeast beyond this the course is over upper Carbonic limestones. Just before reaching the mouth of the river Karagai-Elga, this formation suddenly gives place to the middle Devonie across a fault, visible on both banks of the Sim. A little below the confluence of the Chalcow and the Sim, one sees the cabbage structure of the upper division of the lower Devonic. Near the mouth of the Biarda the superposition of Dz on 2 isseen. Miniar is soon reached lying at the foot of a series of picturesque hills formed of D2. The next undertaking was the ~~ erp, 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. AIT examination of the rocks from Miniar to Simskaia. The cliffs were made up (counting from the base) of lower Devonic lime- stones (D;), the limestones and dolomites (D2), the Snirifer Archiaci limestones (D,), and the lower Carbonic limestones C,. Below the Miniar works the D3, limestones show in places the cabbage structure. About the mouth of the Kalosleika the lower Carbonic limestones crop out containing an abundance of forameni- fera, (Hudothyra parva, Fusulinella Struvii, Archediseus Karreri, and fragments of Productus striatus and Chonetes papilionacea.) The borders of the lake of Simsk offer a classical section for the study of the deposits of Artinsk, and Carbonic sediments. The journey was continued up the valley of the Eralka and down the valley of the river Berdiach, still in the deposits of Artinsk. At the (Baschkir) village of Yakhia the Carbonic limestones are , again met. These show themselves all along the route to Oust-Kataw, where the fossil remains are very abundant. Between Oust-Kataw and Wiazowaia the same Devonic series is several times repeated. At Wiazowaia the railway was left and a section was made in droschkes to the mines of Bakal. The succession D, D’, D2, is thrice repeated between Wiazowaia and the village of Perwoukhina the highest crests being formed of the first named bed, which, two faults successively raise. It is in these three mountains Chouida, Irkouskan and Boulandikha, (all of lower Devonic), that the very rich iron ores of Bakal are found. They have been worked for a century and a half but as yet and for a long time in the future the work has been and will be done in open cuts. The variegated quartzites and quartzose schists are cut by dykes and massives of diabase. The mineral masses of Hematite and Siderite are exclusively found in the middle member of the above series or the variegated schists where they are sometimes 40 meters and more in thickness. Besides this the minerals show themselves sometimes in pockets. A glance is sufficient to show the intimate connection between the dolomitic limestones and the mineral deposits. One can follow step by step the transition of the limestones into spathic iron and that into hematite. When the mines were first exploited only Hematite was found at a short distance from the surface, since then in proportion to the depth of the workings spathic iron has been found with passage into dolomitic limestone. The mines of Bakal and Satkinsk 418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. were examined and the return to the railway was made at the station Souleia over Devonic measures. From Souleia to Slatooust the upper divison of lower Devonic D} is passed over as well as D}. Near the station Berdiaouch the dolomites Dz are seen with thick dykes of porphyroid granite intercalated among them and resembling the Finland Rappakiwi. Between Berdiaouch and Toundouch the line pursues the horizon of the Devonic limestones and dolomites, showing frequently the foliated structure below described. Finally a complex succession of rocks begins at the village of Medwediova containing limestones, schists and argillaceous and sericitic sandstones, mica schists, diabases, amphibolites and gneiss, all thrown into folds of high dip and penetrated by faults. The mutual relations of the massive rocks, crystalline schists and the quartzites of Ourenga and Kossotour are clearly seen in the sections near Slatooust. This town lies in a picturesque valley of the river Ai. The Kossotour and Ourenga heights whieh border it, on the north and south respectively are similarly composed and are parts of the same orographic unit. Under the leadership of Mr. Tscherneschew, Kossotour was reached by a brisk walk through the woods from the station of Slatooust and sections were made along the river Ai, showing coarse grained mica schists and amphibolite, containing large Garnets, diabase, garnetiferous mica schists, diabase, mica schists, massive diabase containing an abundance of secondary products and strongly altered, mica schist of Biotite, Muscovite, Quartz, and Epidotes, enclosing large Garnets; diabase, mica schists with Almandine; amphibolite more or less schistose, and mica schists with small garnets. A section in the railway cut near the station from southwest to northeast, showed a series of mica schists dipping + southeast—65°. There are many inclusions of milk quartz and the bedding becomes thicker to the north-east, after the first 100 ft., but the general character of the rocks is comparatively uniform and resembles that of some American rocks, called by the late Dr. Hunt “ Taconic.” About 200 ft. from the commencement of the section is a mass of quartzite and further to the north-east again mica schists, followed by garnetiferous schist, the Garnets being large and round. To these succeed more mica schists, intercalated among which appeared other small outcrops of quartzite. The railway 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419 cut is about 400 ft. long with two sigmoid curves. One hundred and fifty feet from the northeast end a very much decomposed grayish layer occurs containing Garnets, some of them flattened on the planes of bedding. About 74 ft. from the northeast extremity a mass of white quartz occupies a large space and penetrates to the surface of the cut above, embedded in the mica schist. Another mass of white quartz strikes across the railway, south 20° west, mica schists follow this to the end of the cutting. The next object of study was the Bolchoi Taganai (or Great Taganai). There are three mountains called Taganai, viz: Bolchoi (or great), Srédny (or medium) and Maly (or small) north of Sla- tooust, which are connected together and with the Oural-Taou or main chain and water-divide by high plateaux. They are separated from the north flank of Kossotour by the valley of the river Bolchaia- Tessma. All of these heights are composed similarly of a quartzite summit overlying a friable sandstone with kaolinized Feldspar, and this latter resting on garnetiferous mica schist with subordinated lime- stones. The dips being to the north-west, faults with a southeast hade repeat this succession, three times, the easternmost repetition, being the lowest but the most extensively developed and formed by the chain Oural-Taou. On the east side the heights are abrupt precipices, but on the west they are gently inclined and accessible. The river Kiolim, which traverses the Ourals and forms part of the Siberian river system, descends this divide to the north, the river Tessma an affluent of the Si, taking its course to the south, where it ultimately joins the waters of the Caspian Sea. At the base of the Bolchoi-Taganai (called Otkliknoi) occur outcrops of diabases. The words of M. Tschernischew are herewith repeated. “ The detailed study of our section demonstrates that all the Taganais show the same succession of rocks rent by a series of faults. It is equally beyond doubt that the quartzites of the Taganais correspond completely with the quartzites and sandstones of the lower Devonic that we have already encountered on our trip to the mines of Bakal and environs. It results indubitably that the metamorphic rocks which support the quartzites of the Taganais are the same clastic modified rocks of the lower Devonic developed in the more western parts of the Ourals.” A study was made of the but little altered Deyonic measures near the works of Koussinsk where there is an outcrop of dolomitic lime- 420 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. stone dipping to the southeast and constituting the “ mountain” Silitour. In the neighborhood of Koussinsk also are interesting examples of the limestones with the foliated bosses often heretofore referred to. These limestones belong to the middle Devonic (horizons Dib with Spirifer Anossofi, and D?a with Pentamerus bashkiricus). On July 30-(August 11), the train was run back from Slatooust on the road some 20 kilometers to the “platform” (flag station) Kous- sinskaja, and the excursionists were taken in droschkes twelve wersts south to an exploitation of a mine called Schichimskaja Gora. This was simply a cut in the face of the hill of 100 feet or more in width, exposing tale and chlorite slate cut by porphyritic diorite. Many minerals occur at this contact, which may be found described in L.G.IV,3-+. Returning to the platform, we started after breakfast to the town and smelting works 14 wersts north of Koussinsk, where the pretty iron ornaments sold in Slatooust are made. The start was up a long ascent of the mountain Lipowaia. At a considerable hill called Silitour, just outside of the town, our examination was made ~ of a contact between diabase and the lowest member of the middle Devonic limestone, where M. Tschernischew maintains there is alteration at only one of the two contact planes. The ascent of the water-divide of the Oural, was accomplished in the train by crossing the Tessma and turning south, where a series of iron ore mines lying between the metamorphic rocks and the dolomitie limestones is passed. The mines are mostly abandoned. The limestones cover stratified deposits of hematite. The rocks are much dislocated, but maintain a general direction of N. 30° E. The dolomitic limestones correspond to limestones Dj ¢ of the upper part of the Biélaia and the mines of Bakal. On the east of the railroad the mica schists are cut by granites. In the two great zigzags made by the railroad in mounting the height, it traverses a development of garnet rocks analogous to those seen at Slatooust (Kossotour and Ourenga). About 38 wersts from Ourjum station, which is almost on the divide, in the rocky crest of Alexandrovskaia Sopka, composed of the same quartzites, as those of the Bolchoi-Taganai, the highly inclined beds dip toward the European side of the Ourals. The Asiatic side is covered with detritus and blocks. We have now arrived at the divide and seen all the rocky series which are displayed on its west side. These series starting from ‘ 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 421 Oufa may be resumed in the letters employed by the Russian Survey, as Permian (P), Permo-Carbonic (PC), Carbonic (C), Devoniec (D), and finally the material which constitutes the divide called M, and thought by the official geologists to be metamorphosed Devonie. It is supposed that the upper and lower black schists are part of tg and that Dic and D} are conformable with them. The demonstration turns upon this. Beneath Dj c¢ come the schists and quartzites marked metamorphic. It does not clearly appear how the limestones are superposed on it, but unless M be altered Devonie, this is of minor importance. No one would dream of calling in question the accuracy of the Russian geologists who have proposed this structure, without weeks or months of hard and patient labor in the field. Todo so would be to show an unpardon- able ignorance of the difficulties of the problem and a poor recogni- tion of the accurate work which these gentlemen have accomplished. But they will not consider it disrespectful if some of their recent guests declare that they are not entirely convinced of the Devonic character of these quartzites and schists which form the Oural divide. Only general considerations extenuating this inability to accept the Russian Survey’s determination as final are here in order. In the first place the time was not sufficient to observe the contacts M—Dij ¢ and Di c-Dji g, and Dig—Di. The first two of these are nowhere so explicitly stated in the Livret Guide as to establish the impossibility of faults. The absence of fossils where these beds were seen deprives us of much needed light. .Then again the absence of such impor- tant orographic elements as the entire Siluric, Cambric, and Archean is very hard to accept, especially after the investigations of Murchison. The question is one of the highest interest and importance, and it is hoped that more light may be shed upon it in the near future. There is another consideration which it must be confessed aids in preventing an immediate and unquestioning acceptance of the Russian structure, although it cannot be dignified by the title of an argument, and can be mentioned as an analogy only and with every reserve. Taken, however, together with the other considera- tions, it is not entirely destitute of weight :— If we might for the moment leave out of consideration the horizon of the limestone D} c, and its determination as Devonic we find petrographically an analogy too strong to be overlooked between the sequence of the formations from the crystalline eruptives and 28 422 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. massives, and the schistose and calcareous quartzites and sandstones in other countries and in the Ourals. Of course if it be necessary to accept the series Di ec as Devonic underlying the quartzite series Dig, this important quartzite member which is petrographically and schematically such a striking analogue of the Cambrie (Pots- dam) or Primal quartzite is lost: but even then the group M is not proven to be Devonie or even paleozoic by any evidence which it was possible to present to the participants in such a long and compre- hensive excursion. The writer does not mean in any way to deny that evidence exists which establishes the original paleozoic character of the group M, he only wishes to say that none such was seen by those fellow members of the excursion of whom he inquired. Of course long and patient investigation is required to place a critic of the Russian Survey’s proposed structure in a position to exercise his office. If, after all, this scheme is to stand, it will add another feature (and, perhaps, that which caused all the rest) in which the Oural chain stands out alone among the mountain chains of the world. Here then is the greatest of the cruces brought to light by the labors of the Russian geologists, and laid before their guests at the recent Congress. It is one which far transcends in interest and importance the Volgian, Tartarian and Permo-Carbonic questions. The difference in importance between the problem of such a structure and that of the permanent taxonomic value of the series P-C, P-T, Pb (Tartarian), J-Cr (Volgian), Q* (Caspian), or Cr ’ (Aptian), is that while in these latter cases the sequence is uni- versally admitted, and the only question is whether the members of these groups should be ascribed to one of the upper or lower series, should be divided between them, or in whole or part should stand alone; the question in the first case is whether three of the great mountain building systems are entirely wanting in the composition of the Ourals. The peculiarity of the Oural chain which most strikes the observer is that approaching from the western side the divide is reached before half of the Paleozoic series are crossed, or any of the continent backbone-making systems have appeared on the surface. From the end of the first quarter of an ordinary mountain chain crossing, one looks over the remaining three-quarters, (or where they ought to be) into the boundless lake-covered steppes of Siberian Asia. But another surprise is in store for the traveller. Approaching the Ourals 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 423 from the west there is nowhere the bold, rugged landscape that one sees in the Caucasus or in Switzerland. It is only by looking back on the steep basset edges of the formations that one realizes the mountainous character of the region. But starting from Ourjum to cross the Eur-Asian line, and descending from that line into Siberia towards Miass the mountainous character is lost altogether. As M. Karpinsky justly says (L. G., V. 2): “On the east slope and at a short distance from the axis the region loses almost at once its mountainous character so completely that, though its geological structure corresponds with a very complex mountain region, the greater part of it presents an area so flat that the relief is less accidented than that of most of the plains of European Russia.” It is like entering the basement of a house built on the steep side of a hill and climbing to the roof to find that a broad plain stretches itself out from that level. This is the first feature to strike the observer. The second is a corollary of the first, namely the infre- quency of exposures. The third is the enormous development of lakes. At least one-third of the surface of these steppes is covered by water which is supplied from countless bogs and morasses lying in all positions on the east side of the chain from close up to the axis to a distance further than the eye could see.* It has been mentioned that the water courses of the western half in their incep- tion follow the longitudinal valleys parallel with the axis of the chain for considerable distances and with considerable rapidity before breaking through the transverse gorges of about 10 wersts or kilometers more or less in length to the main water arteries on the trans-Volgian steppes. The reverse is the case with the Siberian streams. With a very few exceptions their early course is directly away from the axis of the chain, and the flow is parallel to circles of latitude for a very considerable distance. Over this part they flow sluggishly from and through impassable swamps, showing few or no outcrops on their banks. ‘The outcrops occur on the com- paratively elevated country between the water courses. On the other hand, in their middle course (which the excursion- ists could not observe) the outcrops of rock in place are reported as commencing to appear in isolated places, becoming more and more frequent, and finally uniting in a continuous outcrop. The river is 4 The characteristic features of the water courses to the east are taken from the Livret Guide, as the course followed by the excursion did not permit the participants to actually see the second and third divisions here referred to. 424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. shut in a narrow bed with rocky banks that often assume the aspect of a veritable gorge of 40 m. (131 ft.) and more in height. The country, which appears ordinarily flat, falls away only in the neighborhood of the rivers, where it is broken abruptly into rocky escarpments. The courses of the streams thus display scenery en- tirely different from the surrounding country. Their lower courses are said to be distinguished by large, flat, marshy valleys bounded Dad bedo River . i eee Fac LL se LA eth a st as FY — oS ee ee e+ Upper Course i | ‘ hl tk ot te at cle om TP amen im, lower Course ( from Livret Guide V pp. 5 &6 ) PIGS 2: by terraces ordinarily rounded and sometimes cut by ravines. The river meandering in this valley and approaching sometimes one and sometimes the other of these terraces, cuts escarpments more or less deep, sometimes vertical, permitting a view of the tertiary rocks and alluvial deposits. Here and there one sees the remains of old river beds called “ staritsa.” 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425 The following is a free rendering of M. Karpinsky’s general de- scription (L. G. V.): In the most important rivers of the east slope of the Oural, such as the Toura, Taguil, Nitza, Irbit, Pychma, Isset, Sinara, Tetch, Miass, Ouwelka, Oui and Togonzak, the lower course is the most extended. Their western limit coincides almost with the western limit of the region occupied by the tertiary deposits. (See the geological map of the eastern slope of the Oural.) The middle course of these rivers is generally the shortest. The rivers of the Asiatic system of the Ourals are also less abundant in water than those of the European system. The vast lake system of western Asia along the Ourals extends from the very mountain region itself down to the axis of the divide (as in the case of Lake Itkoul, etc.), In proportion to the distance from the Oural chain the character of the lakes changes more and more, and several types united by those of intermediate character can be recognized. Between the ramifications of the Ourals and near the boundary between the moun- tain and plain of the east slope, lakes which form on their borders islands and rocky promontories in greater or less number are found scattered far apart in a region constituted essentially by crystalline rocks. Their contours, predominant directions, and distribution, depend habitually on the direction of the schistose crystalline rocks forming the region. In this same direction strings of lakes are found ordinarily enclosed in a belt formed by the same rocks (see on map lakes Silatch, Soungoul, Kéréty, Kasli, Irtiach and Bol- chaia-Nanoga, Miassowo, Terenkoul, little and great Kissiagath, Yélowoie and Tschébarkoul). All these lakes have considerable depth even near their shores. Most of them have visible outflows, and their water is always fresh. The lakes of the steppe remote from the Ourals have an entirely different character. Their number is very great, as is the space over which they are distributed, which extends far to the east. These latter lakes are found in a region oceupied by horizontally stratified tertiary deposits. Their forms are simple, and in spite of their large dimensions they are ordinarily shallow. Near their margins one often sees terraces of rounded forms, a proof that at one time they occupied larger spaces. Regularity is observable neither in the directions of their greatest elongation nor in their grouping. Almost all of these are without efflux. Many of them contain fresh water, though in others the water is saline, and in a part of them salts have been deposited. The salt is predominantly NaCl with 426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. MgSO, and MgCl,. Almost all of these show evidences of gradual drying up. It is worthy of notice that the salinity of the lakes is subject to changes of weather and of the seasons. The eastern limit of the crystalline region characterized by lakes of type I is separated from the western boundary of the region of tertiary deposits with the lakes of the steppe by a belt composed partly of sedimentary and partly of massives and clastics (tuffs). The lakes of this belt are characterized by certain characters of each of the foregoing types, 7. e., the simple form, and straight and low beaches of the steppe lakes and the rocky islets, and correspondence of the lines of their greatest extension with the strikes of the enclos- ing rocks which are peculiar to the mountain lakes. The marshes deserve notice. Some are the beds of old lakes now covered with vegetation. Sometimes the small lakes are covered with a mantle of swampy interlacing vegetation. Others are situated on the belt which divides the rivers, and frequently on the quite steep slopes of the hills, independently of the marshes in evident connection with the lakes. Finally there are regions of salt deposits which characterize the east slope of the Oural. The thin sheets of salt which appear from time to time covering even the plants indigenous to saline terraces with a layer of salt, are developed in the saline lake region, but some small deposits are found in the western region and quite high up on the slope. The variation in the distribution of the saline lakes depends not only on the water infiltrated through the soil, but also on the wind scattering the pulverized salt into the lakes for longer or shorter time. The rocks most frequently encountered on the east slope of the Ourals are (commencing with the oldest) the lower Devonie (Hercyn. ian), represented by limestones, and containing a fauna described by Tschernischew. Among the characteristic fossils are Eutomis pela- gica, Aristozoe herzinica, Spirifer indiferens, Atrypa reticularis, A. granulifera, Rhynchonella princeps, Rh. nympha, Pentamerus galeatus, P. procerulus, var. gradualis, P. striatus, P. vogulicus, P. pseudoknighti, Strophomena stephani. The tuffs accompanying the porphyrites contain also organic remains (Pentamerus, Crinoids, etc.). Radiolaria have been discovered by Tschernischew in the jasper of the Ourals. The middle Devonic seems to be represented by limestones with corals and stromatopores. Griinwaldtia latilinguis, Rhynchonella 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 427 procuboides, Orthis striatula, Pentamerus galeatus and the trilobites near the village of Pokrovskoie in the district of Irbit Phacops fecundus, Anarcestes lateseplatus, Pleurotomaria subcarinata, Tenta- culites acuarius. 'To the upper Devonic may be classed the lime- stones of Lake Koltouban, Monticocerus intumescens, Spirifer dis- junctus, Sp. Archiaci, ete. The Carbonic system is composed of (1) schistose clays and argillaceous schists, sandstones and conglomer- ates, with intercalations of coal and concretions of Spherosiderite. The organic remains are almost exclusively plants (Lepido- dendron glincanum, Stigmaria ficoides). At times the rocks are much metamorphosed, and the carbonic schists are transformed into graphites with vestiges of plants. (2) Limestone with Productus giganteus Pr. striatus, corals, ete. (3) Limestone of the upper horizons, those of Chartymka, the fauna described by Verneuil. Gastrioceras marianum, Pronorites cyclolobus var. uralensis. One hundred species of fossils have been found, of which many have not yet been described. (4) Ordinarily the limestone of Pr. gigant. are replaced above by a schistose limestone, or by a coarse conglomerate, in which the fragments of limestone of different sizes are held together by a calcareous cement. The conglomerates are replaced by sandstones covered by marls or argillaceous limestones finely stratified with subordinate beds of limestones sometimes coralliferous (Chetetes radians) Syringopora parallela, Spirifer mosquensis. Above this is a clay with Gypsum. On the east slope of the Ourals are found islets of mesozoic deposits : clays and sandstones containing lignite. In general the fossils are badly preserved remains of plants. (Aspleniwm whitbiense var. tenuis, Phyllotheca striata, Prodozamites lanceolatus ete. and remains of Estheria minuta var. karpinskyana.) Finally on the east slope of the northern Ourals occurs the upper Jurassic, containing Ammonites; deposits of lower and upper Cretacic with Baculites beds of upper Cretacic with Belemnitella mucronata, Gryphea vesicularis, ete. The tertiary sediments are very remarkable. Commencing at 50 to 100 kilometers from the axis they extend in horizontal beds which grow continually thicker into the interior of Siberia. The predomi- nant rocks of these sediments in the zone nearest to the Oural are sandstones, presenting sometimes very peculiar characteristics, and particularly, a rock composed of an intimate mixture of amorphous clay with an equally amorphous silica. This material covers a very 428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. large area. It appears as a compact rock of light or gray color, some- times yellowish, of which the typical varieties have the property of disintegrating into minute particles with angular points and curiously curved surfaces. Fossils are extremely rare in these beds. Along- side of the teeth of squali, spicule of sponges and of radiolaria, are found the shells of Lingula, prints of shells of Lima nucata, and the sponge Botroclonium spasski. Various considerations have induced the Russian geologists to ascribe these beds to the Eocene. To the east of these silico-argillaceous beds are widely distributed sandstones slightly coherent, accompanied by sands and clays. In these deposits are found well-preserved remains of fishes: Lamna elegans, L. cuspidata, L. denticulata, Otodus macrotus, Notidanus serratissimus, Galeocerdo minor, Actobatis, Myliobates etc. Besides this the remains of mollusks have been found; the species most widely distributed—Cyprina—resembles very much C. perovalis. In addition occur Modiola, Psammobia (?), Fusus (Neptunea) gracilis, F. multisulcatus and Nautica sp. The above are classed as Oligocene. Among the most remarkable deposits of post-tertiary age of the east slope of the Oural besides the glacial deposits developed north of the 61st parallel are the auriferous and platiniferous sands (the latter belonging exclusively to the Ourals). Intimately connected with the serpentines and their primitive rocks, to the disintegration of which the platiniferous groups owe their origin, they are not so largely developed as the auriferous placers. The auriferous placers of the Oural are stratified masses, which vary from a very thin layer to a thickness of 4 metersand more. Gener- ally they vary between 0-5 metersand 1m. Their longitudinal extent, which is usually 20 to 40 m., often reaches 200 and even 500 m. They are rarely more extensive, though placers of 43, 6 and 12 kilom. are known (placer Pechtchanka, District Bogoslovsk). Their width is sometimes very small, 2 to 4 meters; ordinarily it is 20 to 40 m., and has been known 100 m. and more. Sometimes auriferous beds are found on vegetable earth or immediately under the grass, but usually they are covered by barren earth, 7. e., an alluvial bed desti- tute of gold, called “turf,” because the first placers found in the Ourals were covered by a real turf. The barren earth varies from 0-5 m. to 4 m., and occasionally reaches 20 m., and even more. The placers usually rest on hard rock, or that little disintegrated, called 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 429 ‘plotik,” but rarely on a barren alluvial bed under which is found a second auriferous bed which reposes directly on the “ plotik.” The auriferous placers are found in the valleys of rivers and brooks, or in dry ravines, and, of course, follow the axis of their depressions. A gold nugget weighing 36 kilogr. (Ibs. 79.2) was taken from the Tzaréwo-Alexandrowsky in the Miass district. Often a slender thread in the placer is found to be richest in gold, and probably indicates the strongest current. The gold of the explored placers varies between 0°57 gram to 2:69 grams per tonne. A larger yield is rare and when found is in the small placers, or in small parts of large placers where it sometimes reaches 16 kilos. per tonne. It is usually accompanied by Magnetite, which is obtained in the wash- ings as sand called “Schlich.” More rarely this sand is composed of Hematite, Ilmenite and Chromite. Frequently Quartz and often Platinum, Garnet, sometimes Zircon, Disthene and Diamonds are obtained. The richness of the Oural placers does not seem to depend on that of the neighboring rocks. The most important placers are in regions of greenstones, crystalline, talcose and chloritic schists, etc. The regions of granite, gneiss and mica schist are less productive. The placers on limestones are often found to be peculiarly rich. In this ease the rock is cut out in the form of natural buckets, in which the gold is deposited. The Oural placers are post-tertiary, or recent deposits, containing objects fashioned by man, and occasionally post- pliocene deposits containing the remains of mammoths, rhinoceros, etc. Almost all are on the east, very few on the west slope, of the Oural divide. Among the crystalline stratified rocks here are gneiss with Biotite, Muscovite, with two micas, amphibolic, uralitic, etc.; micaceous, talcose, chloritic, siliceous amphibolic schists; various phyllites and quartzites. Among the crystalline schists, limestones and dolomites (marbles) are found sometimes with organic remains. Among the massives, granites, various syenites, miaskite (Nepheline syenite with Biotite), quartz porphyries, felsite, ortho- porphyries, diorite, gabbro, norite, diabase, various porphyrites, various peridotites, diallages and pyroxenites, serpentine and a mixture of Corundum and Anorthite. Many of these have been sub- jected to more or less dynamic metamorphism, to which among other things the green and uralitic schists owe their existence. The mutual relations of the various formations here are confused from the dislocation of all the deposits (with the exception of those of the tertiary, post-tertiary and upper eretaceous, which latter is rarely 430 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. met with) and the cutting of all the sedimentary rocks by the massives. The rocks above mentioned occur sometimes in their natural order, but often without any regularity whatever. The beds generally do not dip with the slope but to the west. In proportion to the distance from the axis of the chain the stratifica- tion becomes less deranged and the metamorphism feebler, never- theless on the eastern slope up to the appearance of the tertiary deposits in force the different formations alternate without any order. The conclusion of M. Karpinsky is that the principal abrasion of the region has been due to the invasion of the tertiary sea (paleogene), and a considerable part of these deposits have been formed at the expense of the older rocks then rising above the present level of the country. The difference in the geological structure in the two sides of the Oural is reflected in their mineral wealth. Thus the stratified deposits, such as limonite, cupriferous sand and coal, are found principally on the west side of the chain, while the vein or massive deposits are found on the east: the placers are the only stratified deposits of minerals peculiar to the east side. After the above, which is the resumé by M. Karpinsky of the structure of the east slope of the Oural,’ it is, perhaps, the best place to consider the interesting question of the cause of this structure which the travellers over the route of the excursion have verified as accurately stated. Several points have been emphasized above to call attention to the part which they bear to the hypothesis advanced by one of these excursionists. Prof. Gétz of Munich is of the opinion that but two hypotheses are tenable. The first is naturally that the lake basins have been ploughed out by ice or other powerful physical agents (which he concludes cannot be maintained), and the others that they are due to atmospheric agencies—chemical and mechanical. The writer’s first suggestion, which he afterwards found had been advanced independently by Prof. I. C. White, was that the sub- jacent limestones had -been dissolved out by waters percolating the soil and the depressions thus formed had been filled with water. The following is the hypothesis of Prof. Arthur M. Miller, of the State College of Kentucky, Lexington, Ky.: “A” (Figure 2) represents the course of a tributary stream of the Irtysch, draining the Asiatic slope of the Ourals. Lo) WaT Ee 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 431 “ Prof. Karpinsky states that every one of these streams is divisible into three courses—a fresh-water-lake-region upper course, a gorge- region middle course, and a meander-flood-plain-region lower course. Oural Taou Plan of Drainage tor any tributary of the Irtyoch Draining Aviatic Slope of Urals. OuralTaou a --SS- Oural Taou Meander Course ~ ~~ _—-—-—-— (from gketch by Prof. Mu ler ) for this paper. Fic. 8. It is the peculiarities of the upper and middle courses that here demand explanation.” 432 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. “The presence of lakes nearly always point to recent disturbances in the drainage.” Recognized causes of lakes are :— 1. Glacial action. 2. Volcanic action—crater hollows and lava dams. 3. Chemical solution—producing inequalities. 4. Epeirogenic movements—phenomena associated with draining of newly established marine plains. 5. Sluggish stream action in deltas and flood plains. 6. Minor warpings of the earth’s crust—causing changes of gradient in streams. Of course we readily rule out causes 1 and 2 here. There is no evidence of recent glacial or volcanic action in this region under discussion. Cause No. 3 would find some advocates as applicable here; but evidence in favor of lakes being formed in this way is meagre. Cause No. 4 could have hardly operated here, though it may have had influence in the ease of the salt lakes of the Siberian steppe region farther to the eastward. “No. 5 must also be ruled out; we are not dealing with lower stream course phenomena.” “ We seem limited to Cause No. 6. Fig. B represents supposed section of district “A” just prior to the development of the lakes ‘and the gorge. We have here in the dotted line the low stream gradient of a plain lying at base level. Suppose a gentle warping of the earth’s crust to produce a fold (not a fault) with an axis parallel with the main chain of the Ourals. This is represented on an exag- gerated scale in Fig. “C.”’ Such a fold thrown across the paths of these eastward flowing streams would increase the gradient of that portion of their courses on the eastward half or limb of this low anticline. The erosive power of the streams would be intensified in this portion of their course. They would tend to cut gorges. In the upper course of the streams, that portion between the developing anticline and the Oural-Taou, the gradient would be lowered, perhaps €ven reversed, for the movement upward on the western limb of the anticline would act in opposition to the current, and form a barrier, which would tend to dam up the waters behind it. In addition to this there would probably be a downward synclinal movement in the region between the anticline and the Oural-Taou. The floor of the syncline would not only be relatively but absolutely lower than it 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 433 was before. The combined effect of these two movements would be to drown the upper course of these streams and favor the forma- tion of lakes.” . The hypothesis first referred to, for which I find that I am re- sponsible, is built upon the admitted structure of the river beds in their divisions described above, and is in effect that at some time posterior to the deposition of the rocks of the middle course, a profound dislocation occurred along the Ourals involving an up- throw of the entire eastern half along a line of fault parallel to and not far from the axis of the chain, which brought the underlying Archean rocks to the level of the Devonic of the western slope. The entire series of rocks forming the eastern slope as far as the present westernmost occurrence of the rocky gorges of the middle slopes were affected by this movement. The high angle and great precipitation eut channels for the rapid streams directly eastward, and ploughed out the cafions in the Tertiary rocks of the Siberian plains. A period of erosion ensued during which the elevated eastern half of the Oural was greatly reduced in height. Following this was a down-throw of less extent than the original elevation but of sufficient extent to reduce the rapidity of flow of the rivers near their sources and on their upper courses, and to transform these latter more or less into morasses and swamps. In time the sunken river beds of the upper courses werefilled by sediments, while the rocky gorges of the middle courses remained as before the channels of streams no longer possessing sufficient rapidity to have cut them, It seems reasonable to suppose that if there had been such movements, they might have produced all the dissimilarity now observable between the two slopes of the Oural, even if the structure of the two sides had been originally similar. The rivers of the east slope prior to the first movement probably originated in the longitudinal valleys of the harder crystalline and quartzite rocks of the east side. Their first courses very likely were rapid and tumultuous and more or less parallel to the axis of the chain, as is now the case with those of the west side, for considerable distances or until favorable places were found for them to break through in lines perpendicular to the axis of the range, when like those of the western slope they may have excavated their beds, first through the older paleozoic rocks and further east through the Tertiary, and finally have reached the level steppes far to the east. The first effect of the elevation would be naturally to produce direct east 434 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. trending channels and to cut them so deeply that they would still remain the water courses after the subsequent depression. The final sinking of the eastern half of the chain, would convert the river channels already cut out of the crystalline rocks into deep lakes lying as it is shown these do, more or less in the same direc- tion and within a belt of moderate width. The currents of the upper courses must have become sluggish and the sources of supply have changed to morassesand swamps. The gentle slope directly to the east would be the natural direction of these streams, instead of as originally before the first elevation of the longitudinal valleys, to the N. and 8. Wherever depressions of the level occurred, would be found a lake of greater or less extent and these lakes would increase in number and simplicity of form as the angle of descent became less and the rocks softer. The promontories and deep slopes of the old river-bed lakes which represented the parts of more than usually hard rock where the mountain streams had been deflected, and the deep cafions where the maximum erosion had been ac- complished, would be less and less frequently seen, the further one followed the river courses to the east. The production of lakes with and without efflux in the level region would follow as a matter of course as is seen in the courses of the Mississippi, the Volga and other large streams. The existence of the third or intermediate type of lake of which M. Karpinsky speaks, lying between those close to the Oural axis and those on the steppes would be very natural in a part of the country where both orographic and petrographic characters were changing from those of the rocks containing the lakes of type I, to those containing the lakes of type II. Finally many of the shallower lakes would be transformed into marshes and swamps. On the other hand the existence of large masses of metamor- phosed rocks; of the evidences of distortion and crushing; of rents filled by eruptives and their disintegration produets; the occur- rence of valuable mineral deposits in that part of the mountain system nearest to the axis; would be naturally explained by the dynamic and thermal effects resulting from the regional downthrow. It appears much at least as plausible that such causes acted as that the former eastern counterparts of the rocks constituting the west slope of the Oural have been eroded and redeposited as the rocks of the retreating Tertiary sea. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 435 On July 31 (August 12), 1897, we left Slatooust for Orjum, where a halt was made, and a few hundred yards beyond which the conti- nental divide forming the Eur-Asian frontier was reached and passed, and the moderate descent on the Siberian side to Miass at the foot of the Ilmen mountains begun. On the road thither, and at the station Syrostan, a cutting exposes phyllites, a porous taleosé rock (listvénite) aud serpentine. Further on schistose rocks including metamorphosed porphyrites occur. The other sec- ondary elements are Chlorite, Quartz, Calcite and Epidote. After these, alluvium covers the surface to the station of Miass. Almost the entire region between Syrostan and the Ilmen mountains is auriferous, the central part of the auriferous belt containing the site of the town of Miass. The gneiss on which the town of Miass is built traversed within town limits by peridotite, in its western part is replaced by siliceous schist (kieselschiefer) and phyllite. The Miass placer situated only two kilometers from the station is typical of the eastern Oural deposits of this character. The bed above the auriferous gravel is about 2 to 4 m. thick, and consists of turf, sand and clay. The auriferous bed itself consists of argilla- ceous sand with many pebbles, and of gravel containing fragments of gneiss, quartz and siliceous schist, of 0-7 m. in thickness. The gold varies from 0°6 to 0-8 gram per tonne. This bed lies on gravel, sand and clay, 2 m. thick. Borings show talcose and argillaceous schists and serpentine below it. A little gold is found above these rocks, but not in paying quantity. The placer which lies in the ground immediately adjacent to the Miass river is about 1,380 m. long by 320 broad. The terrace is the ancient bed of the river. The gold is sought in the lowest points of the ancient and present valleys. The peat or turf which lies upon this gravel is that which extends over so large a part of the Siberian steppes and in which at other places the remains of the mammoth and rhinoceros have been found. The river is about 500 meters east of the present workings. This placer was stated to be but 60 m. above sea level, and the mouth of the Miass but 40 m. (?). The gravel is screened in a primitive circular rotating screen, of which the axis is inclined, and is then passed over a table having two amalgamated plates at the top and two at the bottom. The shoot is about 5 feet wide and 35 feet long, with a fall of about 20°. The coarse slimes are carried to the top of a scaffolding, while the fine slimes are left. 436 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. The I]men mountains which lie close to the town of Miass are celebrated as the depository of many, both intrinsically and scien- tifically valuable minerals, some of which are peculiar to the range. Thus, Miaskite (nephelinic or elceolitic syenite with Biotite), named by Gustay Rose, is not peculiar to these mountains only, which bear the name of Ilmen, but also to their prolongations and the mountains Baiksky, Sobatchia, Potanina and Wichniowaia. In this continuation another characteristic rock is found composed of Anorthite and Corundum. In the gneiss of the Ilmens and their northerly prolongations veins of a rock composed essentially of corundum and orthose are found. M. Karpinsky considers this an analogue of the syenites, the corundum taking the place of the biotite. The Ilmens are thus more uniform and characteristic throughout the 150 kilom. of their length than the main chain of the Oural itself. “ Miascite” (or Miasskite, or better Miassite or Biotite- nepheline Syenite) is found in many places in the I]mens, of which the chief is near Lake Ilmen. There and in most of the other localities are developed the granular and gneissic varieties of Miassite, cut by veins of very coarse-grained Miassite. A foot note in L. G. V., 22, gives the following as yet unpublished analysis of Miassite by M. Bourdakow: \4 I eA G0 | SiO, | 52.03 | 56.26 | 54.17 TiO, 0.99 0.47 0.98 || Al,O,; 22.34 23.59 23.25 || I. Granular Miassite near Fe,0, 1.13 0.85 0.69 || Lake Ilmen. Ne 1.63 2.61 2.95 || ge ha 0.41 0.09 0.16 | IIL. Schistose Miassite from CaO 2.09 0.54 2.02 || Mt. Sobatchia. ae ae naa nee | II. Schistose Miassite from Ko | 516 579 619 | Mt. Wichniowaia. CO, 1.32 1.37 1.14 H,0 1.79 0.37 Osa" 98.00 | 99.91 98.53 | There are over 150 mineral localities exploited in the Ilmen mountains in the neighborhood of Lake Ilmen. The minerals (of which a list of 83 is given in L. G. V. by Karpinsky, and 35 are 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 437 specifically described by Arzruni in L. G. IV) lie either in miassite, syenite or gneiss. The veins most extensive and remarkable for the minerals they contain are in a peculiar green granite traversing the gneiss. The granite typical of the veins consists of amazon stone (microcline), albite, gray colorless or almost black quartz and biotite. The miassite is often very coarsely granular, the individual crystals attaining frequently 10 centimeters and more, and a speci- men of biotite weighing 62-67 kilog. having been found. Some fine graphic granite is formed of quartz and amazonite. The rock contains cavities filled with argillaceous matter called “salo” (grease) in which are found attached to the walls finely developed crystals of Topaz and among other minerals, Beryl] (Aqua marine), Phenacite, Tourmaline, Columbite, Samarskite, Monacite, Monazitoid, Helvine, Garnet, Malaconite, Cryolite, Chiolite, ete. The veins of micaceous syenite, consisting of Orthose, Plagioclase, Biotite and sometimes Muscovite, which cut the gneiss, contain very various minerals: Zircon, Pyrochlore, A¢schynite, Monacite, and sometimes Apatite, Sphene, Magnetite and Ilmenite. On August 1 (13) the portions of the Ilmen mountains near the station were examined by the excursionists. The distance to the first opening was about 4 wersts, exhibiting miassite containing Zircon, Elzolite and Nepheline. Besides typical miassite we obtained Elzeolite with white masses of Nepheline, Biotite and Ilmenite. The Ilmens themselves are the most gently sloping of hills and of very moderate height. Further on were found openings where Sodalite and Amazon-stone were pro- cured. Among the more important minerals, of which more detailed description will be found in L. C. IV by Arzruni, are A‘schynite, Amphibole, Apatite, Bery],Cancrinite, Chiolite, Columbite, Desmine, Eleolite, Epidote, the Feldspar group, Microcline, Fluorite, Garnet, Graphite, Helvine, Ilmenite, Corundum, Cryolite, Magnetite, Mar- tite, Mobybdenite, Monacite, Orthite, Phenacite, Pyrochlore, Quartz, Rutile, Samarskite, Scapolite, Sodalite, Titanite, Topaz (which was the first mineral found here in the XVIII Century by the Cossack Protow), Tschewkenite, Tourmaline, Uralite and Zircon. After an examination of these localities the route was continued toward Tchéliabinsk. At the station Bichkil a party of ten excur- slonists set out in droschkes sixty wersts to visit the gold deposits of Katch-Kar (or Kotch-Kar). This region is situated 80 kilometers southwest of Miass. The 360 to 400 mining localities that the dis- 29 438 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. trict contains are found in the upper course of the rivers Kotchkara, Tschornaia, Osseika, Kamenka and Sanarka. The exploitation of gold began in 1844, when the placers in the southern part of the region Kamenka and Sanarka were discovered. Later these placers became famous on account of the precious minerals, Cyanite, Beryl, Rose Topaz, Amethyst, Euclase, Ruby, Corundum ete., which occur with the gold. The first gold in primitive rock in place was dis- covered in 1863.° The auriferous region lies in the middle of a large granite zone running north and south. The gneisso-granites strike approximately east and west, but have been broken through in a direction per- pendicular to this, as is shown in numerous more or less parallel cracks and faults. The faults have in their turn caused the enclo- sure as veins of masses of granite transformed by dynamo-meta- morphic action to a dark greenish gray rock generally schistose, and composed of very finely crushed masses of Orthose, Plagioclase, Quartz and Mica, with secondary elements, Biotite, Amphibole Gn certain veins), Chlorite, Tale, Calcite, Pyrite, ete. The country rocks are a granite called bérézite with Feldspar partially or entirely transformed to Quartz and Muscovite. The thickness of the ex- ploited veins varies between 0°05 m. and 2 m. The veins consist of gray or green opaque Quartz, in which are inclusions of little veins of Chalcedony in very variable quantities (here and there of Calcite and Chlorite), but filling the whole crack. The Chalcedony is repre- sented principally by Mispickel, Pyrite mixed with Chalcopyrite, Stibine and Galena. Over the greater part of the mining area the primitive rock is disintegrated on the surface to a depth of 20 to 50 meters. The granite is transformed to a pinkish-white clay, unctuous to the touch. The Quartz becomes spongy, and contains the products of the oxidation of the Chalcedonies, Ochers, sometimes oxides of manganese and copper, here and there Pharmacosiderite and Arseniosiderite, also haloid silver minerals with the appearance of Embolite Ag (Cl Br). The gold content is 5 to 18 grams per tonne. The veins are richer at the top, although the gold is more equally distributed in the lower parts. The gold augments proportionally to the amount of mispickel, and contains about 50 p.c. Ag. The different locali- ties of ore resemble each other closely. Up to the present time that ° The information as to this region is taken from Wyssotsky’s description in LG. Vi. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 439 part of the belt of sufficiently disintegrated rock which allows the extraction of ore by the simplest processes (crushing and amalga- mation) has alone been exploited. To separate the chalcedonies the “stossherd ” and Frue vanner are used. The most important opera- tions are those of the Mitrofanovsky shaft (40 m.), Woskressensky (80 m.), the shafts Gavriilo-Arkhanguelsky (70 m.), Loukochinsky (733 m.), Woskressensky (56 m.), Pavlovsky (50 m.), Alexan- drovsky (63 m.), ete. In latter years the yield of gold from the primitive rocks, where it occurs as an ore, has been 1300 to 1425 kilogr. per year for the district of Kotchkar, while the placers have given but 300-350 _ kgr. The total production of gold from 1844 to 1897 in this region is about 47,067 kgr. (103,547.4 lbs.=51.77 tons) of which 25,160 kgr. came from the placers, and 21,900 from the veins (since 1868). To this some 450 kgr. of silver must be added. Amphibolic and biotitic gneisses crop out over the entire space which stretches to the Lake Tschébarkoul, and beyond veins of the amazonite granite disappear imperceptibly, but the ordinary our- alian granite with Biotite grows more frequent and extensive until it becomes predominant. The gneiss squeezed between masses of granite contains frequent injections of it and innumerable dykes and veins. Beyond Tschébarkoul the outcrops become more rare. At 43 kilom. from the station siliceous schists appear, interrupted by a serpentine; further on, chloritic, taleose and argillitic schists sue- ceed. These schists are replaced by green-stones, augitic and ouralitic porphyrites and aphanites, transformed here and there by dynamo-metamorphic action into uralitic schists. Here and there along the line of the railway gold is exploited in placers and veins. On August 2 (14) the party moved along the line of the trans- Siberian railway to Tchéliabinsk, the easternmost point which was reached during our sojourn in Russia, viz., over 30° east longitude from St. Petersburg, or about 61° E. of Greenwich. This very im- portant railway center is a new town built on a number of gold veins which have been exploited in latter years. The mines are mostly from 16 to 20 kilom. southwest of the town, and have a general similarity to those of Kotchkar. One of the best organized mines is St. Michael Arkhanguel, belonging to M. Wonliarliarsky & Co. Along the line of the railway towards Kytchtym the granite is followed for 8 kilom., and near the crossing of the Miass is cut by ramified veins of quartziferous diorite. The granite underlies red 440 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. and yellow post-tertiary clays covered by tschernozem. From the 7th to the 52d werst from Tchéliabinsk the clays cover the oldest rocks almost everywhere. It is only in rare instances that one observes the islets of tertiary conglomerates and sandstones, which have escaped erosion, appearing above the surface (12 to 43 wersts) and siliceous clay with Glauconite (44 wersts), a Kaolin produced by the alteration of a subjacent granite, a diorite (?) (82 wersts), a dioritic porphyrite (Lake Kissiagutch) and a Labradorite porphyry (46 wersts). From the 50th werst such outcrops become more frequent. First come aphanitic and other massive altered and clastic rocks. At the 64th werst an uralitic porphyrite occurs, becoming an uralitic schist ; then serpentine and chloritic schist, and finally gneiss and granite alternating with chloritic and uralitic | schists, which predominate further on, and upon which are built the Kytchtym works. The gneisses are vften biotitic, often amphibolie, and often garnetiferous. The strike of all the crystalline rocks is nearly that of the meridian. (L. G., V, p. 33.) August 3 (15) the party of excursionists left the station of Kytch- tym in droschkes and drove around lakes Kytchtym and Sougomak to the base of the Sougomak mountain. Between Kytchtym and Sougomak mountain only biotitic and amphhibolice gneiss were ob- served, cut by peridotites more or less serpentinized on the north of the lake. At the same place appear in irregular prominences masses of granitic and syenitic character. The mountain is partly schistose, and contains limestone with a grotto among the gneiss, but in the main it is composed of massive, extremely tough serpen- tine with antigorite. From the summit of the mountain a magnificent view is obtained of the Siberian plain and of the mountainous part of the Ourals. The ascent was along the border of Kytchtym lake and through the town of that name around lake Sougomak and up to the arréte over a grassy slope of easy grade. Hence, the ascent was completed by a circuitous path over a species of col to the shoulder beyond, where a path led up to the summit. On the top was a fine compact rock determined to be serpentine. The view from here of the Siberian lakes and steppes was very extensive. To the west the Ilmen mountains were in sight and also Mt. Yourma, which Humboldt erroneously supposed to be the nucleus of three independent mountain chains. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 44] From Kychtym to Ekathérinebourg the road passes over bands of gneiss cut several times by granite (traversed by veins of syenite). There is a region of chloritic talcose, ete., schists among which is found for instance at the 91stwerst uralitic porphyry transformed to schist. At the 99th werst these schists change the west dip to south for half a werst. Beyond the station Maouk, where the schists have been studied by Morozéwicz, serpentines occur and predominate to the 115th werst. The chloritic schist contains large crystals of Magnetite, the talcose schist nests of radiating Actinolite of emerald green, and the serpentines a number of veins of Asbestus. The whole is covered by a bed of turf three meters thick. The serpentine contains marble at the 126th werst. Among numerous hills of serpentine one may observe numerous nuclei of gabbro and gabbro-diorite, and other rocks giving origin to serpentine. The summit of the divide between the waters of the Tschoussowaia and those of the system of the river Isset consists of chloritic schist. Marble accompanied sometimes by listvénite has been exploited for years in the vicinity of the village Mramorskoe. Succeeding this for six wersts or more come gneiss and granite, followed by more chloritic and talcose schists, ete., accompanied by serpentines, diallage, pyroxenite, uralitic por- phyrite and occasionally by granite and porphyry. Ekathérinebourg.—Chloritic schists occur within the limits of the city, as well as listvénite, serpentine, diorite or gabbro-diorite, ural- itie porphyry, usually changed into green so-called uralitic schist. Here and there these schists contain beds of gneiss. Besides these (See L. G., VII) in the neighborhood occur lime- stones and granite.’ While a part of the excursionists were examining the so-called stone tents and the archeological remains of Werkh-Issetsky, others visited the mineral localities of Eugénie-Maximilianovna to the 1 Ekathérinebourg is the seat of a very active and learned society of amateurs of natural history, which has made valuable natural history and archeological collections. A fire destroyed many of the most valuable objects of the former collection, but this has not prevented the growth of the society. Valuable remains of a former tribe have been found on theislandin lake Werkh-Issetsk and in the vicinity of the hamlet of Palkino. M. George-Onésime Clerc is the very efficient secretary of this society, a savant amateur, who has for twenty-five years been the chief active spirit within it. He has recently made the discoveries of human relics previously referred to, and desires to eee to compare some of the objects with those of the North American lan. 442 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. northwest of that village, to the right of the river Isseta, and almost on the summit of the Oural divide. Besides minerals about which the data are not yet complete, such as Disthene, Bery] of lilac color, red Corundum, etc., there are met with here Aqua marine, Vesuvian- ite, Garnet, Essonite and Almandine, Epidote in great abundance, Pouschkinite, Axinite, Yttrotantalite, Titanite, Chinochlore, Amazon stone (Microcline) in great crystals, Amphibole, Rock Crystal Pyrite transformed to Limonite, ete. These occurrences are in a development of gneisso-granites. The predominant rock isa feldspathic rock, poor in mica and almost destitute of Amphibole. This feldspathic rock is accompanied by a rock very rich in Amphibole, sometimes closely associated with amphibolite (Mt. Medwejka, Romanorka), some- times with amphibolic gneiss (Medwejka, Poup), sometimes with a diorite (Séwernaia, Yélowaia), which occupy lower horizons than the feldspathic rock, although they constitute independent and not very great elevations. The above minerals are the product of metamorphism. They are found usually at a slight depth in contact with feldspathic and amphibolie rocks, and are almost always accompanied by Epidote. In the mountain Poup the minerals accompany the crystals of dolo- mite, and are found in places where the dolomite comes in contact with amphibolic gneiss, the surface of the hill being formed of granite. The deposits of the greatest interest are: Mount Medwejka—Yellow Essonite, rose colored and brown Pis- tacite. Mount Yélowaia (Great mine Yevguénie-Maximilianovskaja)— Axinite, Pouschkinite and Titanite. Mount Poup (Mine Iwano-Rédivotsevskaja)—Essonite, Epidote, Clinochlore. Mount Séwernaia- Yéréméievskaia)—Aqua Marine, Vesuvianite, Sphene, Garnet, Epidote, Yttrotantalite, Amazon stone etc. [See Gs Vil] The imperial lapidary establishment in Ekathérinebourg, and the depot where minerals, cut and uncut, are exposed for sale, both under the authority of the government and under private auspices, is of great interest, but the cutting was not being carried on at the time the excursion reached the city. The cups and vases of rock crystal, malachite, jasper, etc., were of great beauty, and showed the skill which has been attained by the Russian lapidaries. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445 The minerals offered for sale comprise all those which are known in the entire Oural region as well as those from this particular district, and have no further claim to enumeration here, since they will be mentioned in connection with the visit to the localities where they occur. This and the other great lapidary institution of Russia at Peterhof employ some of the most skilful artisans in the world. Leaving Ekathérinebourg on August 6 (18), the railroad passes successively over the narrow belt of diabases, etc., bordering the city on the west, and runs northwest nearly parallel to the upper shore of the lake Werkh-Issetsk through narrow tongues of diallage and limestones, and of crystalline schists called M, into the broad belt of granites and syenites containing lakes Isset, Tawatoui, and others. Skirting the southwest and west shores of these at some distance at about the middle of the last named the road swerves to a direction east. of north, and follows a thin band of the crystalline schists, M, to its extremity, then passing along the contact of limestones and diabases, and subsequently through first one and then the other of these rocks across a very complicated area. A long course is made through gabbros, etc.; to the station Anatolskaja, near which is the boundary of the mining district of Nijni-Taguil. Between Anatolskaja and the mining center Nijni-Taguil the road lies in granites and syenites, and finally in diabases, porphyrites and tufts to Taguil and Nijni-Taguil, which are situated at the contact of these rocks with the lower Devonic limestones and marbles. Nijni-Taguil the most considerable mining locality of the Ourals, is the property of the heirs of P. Démidow, Prince of San Donato. The founder of the works was Nikita Démidow, who enjoyed great favor with Peter the Great, and established a number of iron works in the Ourals. The river Taguil isdammed at this mining center, and makes a long, narrow lake 12 wersts long, at the northern extremities of which are the hills (or mountains) named Lyssaia-gora (Bald mountain) and Wyssokaia (High mountain). This latter, situated at the west of the village, contains the rich deposits of magnetite which furnish the works of Nijni-Taguil, Niéwiansky, Alapaievsky, Werkh-Issetsky, Soukhsounaky and Réydinsky. At Wyssokaia the predominating rocks are porphyries without quartz, and very varied in respect of their constituent elements. The passage from typical porphyritic texture with well developed crystals of Orthoclase and sometimes of Plagioclase and Augite into augitic syenites or 444 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. holocrystalline uralite on the one hand, or into compact orthose on the other is here observed. The intimate correlation of the combined: elements of different structure and color appears in the ribbon or spotted structure of the rock, offering a good example of the composition of the “Schlieren.”*® The interpretation of the structure by M. Tschernischew is that the metalliferous masses and the accompanying rocks were formed simultaneously, and that the beds of magnetite have separated themselves from the magma of orthose rocks. The magnetite and accompanying rocks of Wysso- kaja dip generally southeast and east, but the structure is compli- cated by throws and faults to be seen on the west end of the mountain. Brecciform rocks form the base of the series of metalliferous beds of Wyssokaja. Here can also be seen the disintegrating action of the orthose rocks, which results in the formation of thick beds of white and pink clays, enveloping blocks of magnetite. The iron of Wyssokaja is distinguished for its purity and excellent metallurgical qualities. The magnetite is very often observed passing into martite, a mineral very abundant near Taguil. Among the minerals of Wyssokaja are Asbolan and Rabdionite, forming in places very thin deposits on the walls of fissures in the Magnetite and Martite. Immediately to the south of these mines occur the outcrops of a white siliceous limestone, which forms the western boundary of the rocks which contain the Médnoroudiansk deposits. The Médnoroudiansk copper mines are situated to the south of Wyssokaja-Gora, between two narrow bands of limestones enclosing clays, and disintegrated porphyries and tuffs. Along the line of the deposit is found a band of argillaceous limonites and clays. The southern part of the mine is separated from the northern by a thick vein of lamprophyre oblique to the general direction of the deposit. These iron minerals appear to fill a crack produced by a fault irregularly bounded on the east and west. The clays of yellow ocher are rich in copper oxides, and great masses of Malachite taken _ 8 These passages of massive to schistoid and gneissic structure, the insensi- ble transition of gabbros and gabbro-diorites by a series of intermediate phases to diallage and amphibole-diallage rocks composed of only bisilicates, appear- ing not only on the same outcrops, but even in the same fragment of rock, carry conviction to the mind that these complicated combinations of fels- pathic with non-felspathic masses which Reyer proposed to call “Schlieren,” exist. L. C., IX, 3. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445 out here have given great celebrity to the mines of Médnorou- diansk. The celebrated block of Malachite weighing 20,000 pouds (Ibs. 720,000, or 360 short tons) was found at a depth of 35 or 40 sagenes (245 to 280 ft.) from the surface. In the neighborhood of the limestones the metalliferous rocks become richer in copper salts as the limestones are constantly being dissolved by infiltrating waters. Fossils from these limestones are observed in great number (Pentamerus vogulicus, Atrypa reticularis, Murchisonia Demidofi, Pleurotomaria ventricosa, Euomphalus subalatus). M. Tscherni- schew concludes that a chemical action takes place at the contact of the limestones and the ore bearing rocks. On the one hand the limestones are dissolved, and from the argillaceous envelope re- sults the insoluble residue. On the other hand the deposits of copper are brought about by the precipitation of this metal, which is carried to the limestone by waters holding it in solution. The manganese mines of Taguil—About a werst to the northeast of Lébiajaia is found the manganese mine which is exploited by two trenches. The south wall of the south cut exhibiting bright gray and white limestones dipping southwest 60°, and containing Atrypa kuchvensis, Spirifer kuchvensis, Sp. pseudo-kuchv., Entomis pela- gica, stems of crinoids and corals. Beneath this isa white dolomite, resting on a marble-like limestone, which is in immediate contact with yellow, pink and violet schists, cropping out in the north wall of the mine. North of the schists appear the same limestones seen in the hanging wall, honey-combed with stems of crinoids and corals. Presumably this represents a tightly folded and inclined synclinal of limestone enclosing the schists. 'The manganese ore is collected in nests and pockets, and seems to indicate a relation between its occurrence and the lower Devonic limestone. Ascent of Mount Siniaia.—Leaving Taguil and proceeding north through Laia and to Barantcha the road runs on porphyrites and tuffs. From the crossing of the Taguil to the latter place the road crosses gabbros and diallage rocks. The best exposures of the rocks composing Siniaia are seen in the quarries, which show a diallage alternating with gabbros. Here may be seen excellent instances of Schlieren. The structure is not to be explained by gabbros cutting the diallage rock, for, on breaking it in various directions, even under the microscope, it is impossible to define the limits of the two rocks. 446 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. The summit of the Siniaia mountain known as “ Koudriawy- Kamen” is almost entirely formed of coarse grained diallage rock containing a considerable quantity of olivine. From the summit of Siniaia or Koudriawy-Kamen (crumpled stone) a splendid view is obtained of the summits of the ranges. To the north appears Mt. Katchkanar, and Mt. Blagodat, to the southeast is the village of Laia and the works of Taguil, to the west is the Oural chain, here running nearly north and south. Kouchwa and Mount Blagodat.—After a short run of nine wersts north and northeast through gabbros, gneiss, and diabase, we reach the station Kouchwa, on the last named formation, where the crown owns works. The station is at the junction of the great and little Kouchwa. The western part of the village extends over the large low plain of these streams. Two wersts from the town is situated Mount Blagodat. The constituent rock of this mountain, like that of Wyssokaia, is an orthophyre without quartz, but with crystals of Orthose and sometimes Plagioclase or Augite. All transitions from coarse grained uralitic and augitic syenites to perfectly compact orthose rocks resembling in external aspect the Swedish “ Hallajlinta” as observed by G. Rose. The rocks also approach the structure of “Schlieren.” The microstructure, the predominance of Feldspar in the matrix and among the porphyritic elements, and finally the nota- ble content of sodium bring the greater part of the rocks of Blagodat near to the group of quartzless augitic porphyries called, after M. Giimbel, ceratophyres. In Blagodat as in Wyssokaia the orotho- phyres on the side of diminished mineral masses are enriched by secondary Epidote, by Garnet, Analcime, Calcite, Chlorite and Mica, and pass into epidote-garnetiferous and calcito-garnetiferous rocks. The appearance of these rocks is connected with the disappearance of the masses of Magnetite, as has been proven by the mining opera- tions conducted at Blagodat. The magnetic ores of Blagodat appear as red and as blue. The blue minerals abound in pellets of green chlorite disseminated through the mass. Near the surface the Chlorite is destroyed and the mineral becomes porous and easily fusible. Of course as depth is increased the red mineral is more and more re- placed by the blue. The deposits occur without definite boundaries, over the entire east side of Blagodat to the summit wherever there is orthophyre, but sometimes in the shape of tolerably regular veins, and sometimes in nests and nodules. The veins gradually increase in feldspar and pass insensibly into pure Orthose without Magnetite. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 447 On the east side the rocks are separated into strata and dip to the east and southeast. Near the summit the rock is in the form of an anticlinal and the direction of its axis about corresponds with the trend of the mountain. The deposit is faulted in lines nearly perpendicular and approxi- mating north-northwest and east. Asa result of the first faulting, part of the wall of the deposit is thrown to the west flank of the mountain, and owing to the second, the main deposit is cut off to the south on the eastern slope. The folds and faults corresponding with the first of these are anterior to those corresponding to the second or trans- verse, which accounts for the folding back of the rocks of Epidote and Garnets and their appearance on the west flank to the foot of the eastern slope in many places as a result of the first movement. (See TG. EX. Pl k-). The mineral deposits have experienced the same fractures as the rocks containing them, as is evident from the strips of Magnetite included in the breccias which fill the cracks, and the slickensides of magnetite. The narrow bands of limestone compressed within the porphyritic rocks to the east and south of Blagodat contain a fairly rich fauna often well preserved. The limestones of the lower Devonic (hereynian) along the rivers Kazanka and Izwestka for a distance of 4 wersts southeast of Blagodat abound in fossils, among which M. Tschernischew has described Calymene, Entomis pelagica, Pleurotomaria kuschwensis, Merista passer, Spirifer pentameriformis, Sp. kuschw., Sp. pseudo-kuschw., Atrypa kuschw., Pentamerus parvulus, Pent. integer, Orthis pseudo-tenuissima. The occurrences of these ores of Wyssokaia and Blagodat, and the relation they seem to bear to the orthophyres on the one hand and to the eruptive diabases and porphyrites on the other, will naturally suggest to the mind of the student of Pennsylvania geology the Cornwall and Dillsburg deposits. The quotation by M. Tschernischew of G. Rose’s comparison of one of the transition forms of these rocks to the Swedish Hillaflinta only increases the the analogy to the series in Pennsylvania and other parts of the United States, as well as in Wales, to which the late Dr. T. Sterry Hunt so often referred. There are many other analogies, as in the presence of copper and manganese in the Wyssokaja, and the irregular pocket and mass occurrence of the ore in Blagodat. The resemblances in the two countries in these respects is very striking, and is not marred by the Devonic limestones at various 448 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. points south and east of Blagodat. It would seem that the complete history of these very interesting mineral deposits remains to be told, and that there is some reason to believe that it will be found to be similar in Pennsylvania, Czernarvonshire, and the district of Goro-Blagodat. Recrossing the Eur-Asian frontier—Leaving Kouchwa the rail- way continues for a short time in a northerly direction, when it turns northwest before reaching the river Toura. Up to this point it is laid almost exclusively on porphyries accompanied by tuffs and breccias. The porphyrite breccias consist of a paste of plagioclase and augite, showing plain fluid structure in which occur Labradorite and Augite (partly Uralite). Fragments of different sizes of dark gray ribbon schist, of porphyrite and of quartz, are held in the paste. Occasionally a large fragment of schist a meter in length enclosed in the porphyrite indicates the vicinity of a continuous mass of schists. Up to the present only one outcrop is known, viz.: to the left of the Toura, between the great and little Garevka. About two wersts from the Eur-Asian crossing a region of much metamorphosed gabbros is entered. These gabbros are remarked also west of the station. Then (197 wersts from Ekathérinebourg) commences a region of indubitably metamorphic Chlorite and micaceous schists which constitute the central part of the crest of the Ourals. Beyond the boundary station the railway crosses the Toura for the last time and approaches the head waters of the rivers descending the European slope and mingling their waters with the Kama. [L.G., EX]: The boundary station between Asia and Europe on the further journey is 426.1 m. (1,397.6 ft.) above sea level, and near the head waters of the Liéwaia Toura, and of the Tiskoss, which latter is an affluent of the Koiwa, and at a distance of 255 wersts from Perm. Following the Koiwa at the ridge near the 237th werst from Perm it attains an absolute height of 285.7 m. (957 ft.). Following the right bank and turning obliquely to the northwest it ascends a sharp incline of a ridge parallel to that of the main chain, and reaches the maximum elevation of 469.7 m. (1,540.6 ft.). The first cut in the line reveals argillaceous and chloritic schists striking nearly north and dipping sharply to the east. Gray and partly friable quartzites intercalated with disintegrated chloritic schist, yellowish and reddish talcose clays, and light gray quartzites 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 449 dipping east 75°, bring us to the 242d werst, where black dolomites of fine grain intercalated with thin veins of calcite dip along with the quartzites. Further on black argillaceous schists and chlorite and argilo-chloritic schists appear. At the 230th werst the gabbros of Douplianoi-kamen, a southern continuation of Teplogorskaja-sopka, are met. From the 215th werst, at the maximum elevation of 469.7 m., the road pursues the crest of the water divide between the affluents of the Wejai and the affluents of the Koiwa, and descends rapidly for 43 wersts to the station Pachya. In the cuts between the 189th and 185th wersts black argillaceous schists occur. Beyond the station Biélaia, in a cut on the 184th werst, a light gray arkose coarse-grained sandstone appears, and further on argillaceous schists alternating with finely stratified sandstone. At the 177th werst light gray, compact and dark gray crystalline limestones of middle Devonic appear with Cyathophyllum. From this point to the station Pachya the upper Devonic limestones appear with Cyrthia murchi- sonia, Atrypa reticularis, Orthis striatula, ete. Beyond Pachya the road enters the Carbonic deposits, which it follows to Vsiéswiatskaia. A cut at the 166th werst shows compact gray fine grained limestones C?b with Spirifer mosquensis, Productus cora, Pr. semireticulatus, Pr. Humboldtii, Chonetes variolaris, Fusulinella spheroidea, ete. From here to Vsiéswiatskaia only a few outcrops are seen of white quartzose, fine grained sandstone and clays. The occurrence of Carbonic measures continues. At the 122d werst Ci b again is seen with Spirifer mosquensis, Pr. cora, Pr. semiret. Near to the junction of the Arkhipovka and the Tschoussowaia C, crops out with Fusulina verneuili, Pr. cora, Spirifer stri., Streptorhynchus eximicformis, ete. The limestones of the upper Carbonic dipping northeast in the cut of the 121st werst hold a thin bed of calcareous sandstones of greenish gray, with remains of calamites, species of Productus, etc., interstratified with a gray conglomerate and an arenaceous schistose clay. The presence of this permo-carbonic sandstone between the upper carbonic limestones dipping to the northeast is explained by a reversed fold to the southwest. To the north of the station Tchoussowaia the outcrops of the white Gypsum of the permo-carbonice series are seen on a little hill. From the station Tchoussowaia to Perm, a distance of 119 wersts, only Permo-Carbonic, Permian and _ post-pliocene exposures are found in the infrequent and shallow cuts. Between the stations Liévchino and Motowilikha the road follows the right bank of 450 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. the Kama. At the 11th werst a gray, friable, caleareous sand- stone P}appears. Between the village Malaia-Yézowaia and Motowilikha is an outerop of gray friable, partly calciferous sand- stone P {horizontally bedded and alternating with marly clays of reddish brown and gray marls. Near Motowilikha the hill is eut by the deep valley of the rivers Motowilikha and Iwa. On the right side of this valley in a hill known as Wychka the greenish or reddish gray calciferous sandstones P} crop out, alternating with clay marls of deep red and thin seams of light gray marl, all covered by sandy clay of vellowish brown,and pebbles. From here to Perm the outcrop is almost continuous of more or less friable calciferous sandstones of greenish or reddish gray color alternating with deep red or gray clay marls, and covered by post-pliocene deposits, more or less yellowish brown sandy clay, yellow or gray argillaceous sand and pebbles. The dip near Perm and Motowilikha is very gentle, but visible S-3°. [L. G., X.] Perm.—The city is built on the left bank of the great river Kama, which resembles in many superficial features the upper Missouri. The first view of this river at Perm, (which is 650 kilo- meters over its bed from its source, and about 700 kilometers from its junction with the Volga), is likely to cause astonishment at its breadth and importance; and indeed at the delta near Bogovodskoie where it joins the mighty Volga, the Kama appeared in August to be the larger stream of the two. The city of Perm is built on quite high hills which are cut deeply by the Tchoussowaia and by ravines, one of which latter is a short distance north of the town. The Kama is perhaps three-quarters of a mile broad at the landing place of Perm and its banks are reddish on the steep face next to the water. The shores are well covered with sod and the hills back of the flats on the right bank are well wooded and.from 100 to 250 feet high, showing in places clearings and cultivated farms. On the hills of Kama’s left bank as well as on those laid bare by the ravines just alluded to, the beds of the upper part of the lower Permian stage, are well exhibited, (P?). They are gray or brownish gray sandstones interstratified with more or less marly red and brownish red clays. In the river section and also in the ravine just alluded to, these beds are partially covered by a more or less arenaceous clay, inter- calated with sand passing in places into gravel. These last deposits belong to the post-pliocene era. The typical Permian of Perm 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 451 contains large deposits of copper minerals (principally cupriferous sandstones) which have been exploited until very recently and the ore smelted at the works of Motowilikha. The lower horizon P} of lower Permian can be seen in the mountain named Tschourbina which is on the right bank of the Kama opposite the mouth of the Tschoussowaia. This horizon of gray calcareous slaty marls inter- Stratified with gypsum and reddish brown sandstones carries the bed P? composed of greenish gray sandstone, interstratified with reddish brown clay. The right bank of the Kama opposite the city of Perm is low and barren, and formed of post pliocene de- posits such as gray and brownish gray argillaceous sands with beds of pebbles and recent deposits. A short distance down the stream from Perm these sands lie on the Permian bed P? which contains somewhat cupriferous sandstone. Throughout the entire distance from Perm to the confluence of the Kama with the Volga, the banks of the former river exhibit exclusively Permian measures. ‘The overlying beds are con- sidered by some of the Russian geologists to be lower Triassic, but others think they are not sufficiently well known to be ascribed either to the upper Permian or the lower Triassic, and designate them Permo-Triassic or PT, and call them provisionally Tartarian. For two thirds of the distance from Perm to the Volga only the lower Permian beds P*, and Quaternary are seen, unless the deposit at Kerakoulino below Sarapoul be considered Tartarian in accord- ance with the views of some members of the Russian Geological Survey. M. Stuckenberg, who is the author of L.G., XI, which des- cribes the geology from Perm to Nijni-Novgorod. and was also the leader of this part of the excursion, holds this to be erroneous. Ac- cording to him the middle Permian (P,) commences to appear at Tikhia-Gory, and continues to Sentiaki where the upper Permian (or Tartarian) appears and lasts to and beyond Tschistopol. The further localities on the river from here to Laichew are credited by him only with the middle Permian P,. For the rest of the Kama’s course, these higher beds with Quaternary persist. He states that in the Kama section the lower Permian is represented by but one member, P, which consists of gray or brownish gray sandstone, interstratified with more or less nearly red or reddish brown clays, often containing caleareous concretions. Very rarely are found remains of conchifers accompanied more frequently by remains of plants. This bed is 70 to 80 inches thick in the sections near Perm, 452 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Ossa, Ochansk, Sarapoul, etc., and disappears finally further down near Elabouga. The middle stage of the Permian (P,) is composed of limestones, dolomites and gray clay marls, and contains the organic remains characteristic of the Zechstein of Germany. It crops out in incom- plete sections in the banks of the Kama, between its confluence with the Ij and its confluence with the Volga. At Elabouga the bed P, is seen lying on the lower stage P%. The upper stage P, or PT is seen between Sarapoul and the nearest confluent of the Kama to the south*® covering occasionally the middle stage. It consists principally of clays and marls of a variously tinted red, alternating with beds of white, greenish or gray color. Organic remains (conchifers) are very rare. The post-pliocene deposits which crop out in the banks of the Kama are represented partly by a fluviatile terrace, and partly by sediments deposited in the Caspian basin of this period: or, to be more accurate, in the series of lakes which were in communication with that basin. These deposits crop out between Tchistopol and the mouth of the river, by preference on the left bank. The post-plio- cene terrace is composed of yellowish brown clays with which sands are oftentimes associated. The Caspian beds though nearly of the same nature as those of the post-pliocene terrace are more sandy. These beds contain the remains of mollusks still living in the east of Russia. The fresh or brackish water forms are often accom- panied by Caspian marine forms. Here and there in the post-plio- cene deposits, bones of the Mammoth, and other animals of that epoch are found. Not very long since a tolerably complete skeleton of a young mammoth was discovered on the right bank of the Kama above Laichew. Below this town and near the confluence of the Volga and Kama isolated bones of post-pliocene mammals have frequently been seen. In that part of the Volga between the Kama and Nijni-Novgorod, and for a considerable distance above and below these points, travellers have invariably been struck by the great difference between the two banks. Except in a few localities where the river is con- siderably deflected to the left (i. e. E [?]) the right bank presents a continuous succession of escarpments and outcrops of rock in place. The left bank, on the contrary, forms an alluvial valley, which, 9M. Stuckenberg says: ‘Entre Sarapoul et le confluent de la Kama,” L1G, X12, 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 453 penetrating several kilometers into the interior of the country pre- sents Quaternary terracesin gentle echelons. When the confluents of the Volga on the left bank unite with the major stream, their valleys are merged into vast spaces like lacustrine basins which owe their origin to the impeded flow of the melting snows and the strong floods of spring. At the confluence with the Kama the lacustrine enlargement begins in the Volga, twenty-five kilometers above Laichew and extends south to Spassk and the ruins of the old town of Bolgary. In the months of May and June the waters of the Volga and Kama at this junction occupy a basin so extensive that from a steamboat it is occasionally impossible to see the shores. In these cases the level of the water is 12 to 13 meters above the normal level. But in the month of August the two rivers have returned to their original beds and the water level has attained its minimum. It happens frequently at this season that the steamers seeking the sinuous and constantly changing channels run aground. ‘This shal- lowness is most annoying toward Nijni-Novgorod and above. The left bank of the Volga between the Kama and Nijni-Novgorod shows no older rocks. Most frequently only recent sediments are seen. Insome rare localities are found post-pliocene deposits, clays and sands of the terraces, and between the mouth ot the Kama and Kazan Caspian lacustrine deposits. The right bank throughout the whole distance is of middle and upper Permian and of Tartarian or Permo-Triassic age. The middle Permian stage, the representative of the German Zech- stein, is composed of limestones and dolomites, partly of oolitic structure, with interstratified beds of silex, and more or less consider- able deposits or accumulations of Gypsum. This stage, which con- tains almost everywhere many organic remains characteristic of the German Zechstein, rises from beneath the upper stage between Bogorodskoie (the mouth of the Kama) and Kozlovka (opposite the mouth of the river Ilet and 30 kilometers below the town of Sviajsk). The upper stage (P,) or the Tartarian (PT) consists princi- pally of different colored (red, pink, white, greenish and greenish gray) marls, accompanied by thin beds of white limestone, variously colored clays, and sandstone. This bed is very little fossiliferous, and contains only some conchifers.”” 10 Fifteen years ago the opinion was held by certain Russian geologists that the beds of iridescent marls P, or PT were parallel formations with a part of the beds P,., with passage of the marls into these latter horizontally. Now, thanks to the labors of the Geological Survey and to recent researches of the geologists of Kazan, it is beyond doubt that P, and PT are independent stages bedded the one in the other. [L. G., IX, p. 10.] 30) 454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. At the landing place of the village Bogorodskoié, a little above the mouth of the Kama, the following is a section of the right bank. P,—Light red and brownish red marl. P,—Greenish gray marl. Gray limestone, finely stratified with brown spots, contain- ing casts of conchifers. Brown, friable sandstone, with white strata. Finely stratified gray marl. Boulders. The beds, which are hidden by boulders, are shown a short dis- tance below. P,—Finely stratified grayish limestone, . . . . O75 m. Friable:sandstone;: «(2 2 «+ oy <> uso. ese Gray marly. < 6. as bo" ots 2} vee bee oe ee Boulders, zc. .5, hs 2) We. take ake ee Between the above two outcrops, in a rocky promontory, are shown: P,—Finely stratified, gypsiferous limestone, ays = the fingers,. . . » , = 2 OFoime Finely stratified, paawieh Limestone: with remains of conchifers, . . . 2- Gray clay marl, reereennned w ith, gypsum, ah containing many specimens of es orien- als. te ie - 076 _ Gray oolitie cnesraes anon in nifoeils ae acteristic of the Zechstein, . . . . . . 105 A limestone analogous to the last crops out immediately at water level at 2-3 wersts above Bogorodskoié. Near to the landing place at Kozmodémiansk, on the Volga, the following section was made: P, (PT)—Light red marl with ase and gray beds, = ies: She Ay . . Lose Light gray rien i 5 2° Reddish brown mar! with piconisl gray beds, 3 Brownish gray friable sandstone, . i: Boulders, he its Boulders beneath ach seco a ooo nant 6 The right bank of the Volga between Kozmodémiansk and Niyni- Novgorod.—Here are found upper Permian, Mesozoic and Post- 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 455 pliocene deposits. The first of these predominate in all the outcrops and are almost always covered by the others. The upper Permian, P, or PT, attains a thickness of 100 m. and more. It is developed in an uninterrupted series of marls, sandstones, conglomerates and more rarely limestones. The predominance in the series of this or that deposit affords a differentiation of the following horizons: A. Clay and marls with interstratified beds of limestone. B. Sands and conglomerates with subordinated marls. C. Marls and sands with subordinated sandstones. D. Sandstones and sands with subordinated marls. E. The same rocks with beds of limestones and conglomerates. In- all the sections the horizons B and C are the most defi- nitely and best expressed. The horizon A is in most cases eroded. The lower horizons are most frequently masked by slips and detritus and are not very visible, except near the villages of Issady, Barmina, and Wassilssoursk. The faunais represented by numerous conchifer mollusks of the group Anthracoside, especially by the genera Paleomutela, Oligodon and Paleoanodonta ; by rare gastero- pods Estheria, Paleoniscide, Ceratodus and Stegocephali. The plant remains are generally badly preserved. The Jurassic and Volgian deposits cover in separated islets the Permian series of the environs of Issady, Barmina and Wassilssoursk. These are dark gray clays with subordinate beds of sand, conglomer- ates and limestone. ‘Their ages are referred to the Callovian, Kim- meridgian and Volgian epochs. The Post-pliocene is represented by yellow loessoid clays enclosing a few pebbles and crystalline rocks. - Below Issady the Volga valley’s right slope forms an enormous curve, in the upper part of which are seen from the steamboat yellow outcrops more frequently of leessoid clays (Q,), gray outcrops of the Jura (J) partly hidden by thickets, and below, the outcrops of Permian (Tartarian) rocks (P, or PT). The Jura, which is of excep- tional interest in this section, is unfortunately less visible to-day than afew years ago, when Sibirtzew, in 1886, established the following sequence : (1) Yellowish brown lcessoid clay. (2) Dark green sandstone with Aucella mosquensis of the Volgian horizon (horizon of Ozynoticeras catenulatum). (3) Black bituminous clay without fossils. 456 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. (4) Brownish and yellow clay with-a bed of limestone (Oppelia, Perisphinctes) determined as a zone of Hoplites of the Kim- meridgian. (5) Sandstone of the lower Callovian and conglomerates with Cosmoceras Goweri, Cadoceras subleve, some forms of Peri- sphinctes, accompanied by Belemnites, Protocardium, Con- cinnum, ete. (6) Gray clays of the gypsiferous lower Callovian, with prints of Cadoceras. (7) Variously colored marls. (8) Sands and conglomerates with subordinate marls. (9) Marls interstratified with limestone. Issady— Nijni- Novgorod.—Among the outcrops on the old right bank, between the landing places of Issady and Nijni-Novgorod, that below Takinsky deserves especial attention, on account of the appearance of the middle and lower horizons of the marly and sandy Permian rocks, notably the series C_—marly, D—arenaceous marly, E—marly calcareous. Nijni-Novgorod.—The city is situated on the high and rather steep right slope of the valley, at the confluence of the Volga with the Oka. On the side of the Volga the slope is partly covered with vegetation, partly with buildings, débris, ete. On the Oka side, on the contrary, fine outcrops permit one to see the structure. Two sec- tions are especially characteristic: the first in the banks of the river Yarilo and the other in the ravine nearthe camp. The first of these sections is seen near the town opposite the steamboat landing of the Oka, in the great ravine of the Yarilo. The section is as follows: Post-pliocene, yellow lessoid, sandy argillaceous clay with a very few marly and a few pebble inclusions. Permian deposits: A. Marls imperfectly visible in the right slope. B. Thick bed of sand, sandstones and conglomerates, with sub- ordinate beds of marls. In the left slope the conglomerate of this horizon contains casts of Paleomutela. C. Thick deposits of variously colored marls interstratified with limestones and many beds of sands and sandstones. Between the upper layers of this bed there is a thin layer of much disintegrated limestone, containing numerous perfectly pre- served shells of various Anthracoside, especially the groups Paleo- mutela keyserlingi, Paleoanodonta fischeri and Oligodon. These 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 457 same shells are encountered in other beds of limestones and marls, but very badly preserved and in the form of interior casts. The lower horizons of the Permian deposits appear more dis- tinctly above and below in the ravine. There is visible 30 or 40 meters below the place just described, between variously colored marls, a bed of sandstone and conglomerate in which are encountered the shells and other remains of ganoids, accompanied by casts of conchifers. From the plateau the view extends far into the valleys of the Volga and Oka and over the terraces of the left slope of the valley. From Nijni-Novgorod to Moscow.— The railway from Nijni- Novgorod to Moscow, following up the valley of the Klinzma crosses a band of Permian, and later a long and narrow belt of middle Carbonic limestones, following which it again crosses a narrow band of Permian before reaching the Jura-Cretaceous or Volgian on which it continues all the way to the ancient capital. The Oural excursion was thus concluded after having passed rapidly over 3,750 kilometers, (2,330 miles) of the most important of the geological horizons in south and east European Russia, in- cluding a long and typical part of the Volga, nearly a sixth of the entire length of the Oural Mountains both in Siberia and in Europe, and more than half the length of the river Kama. The insight which this journey affords to the geological structure of central European and Asiatic Russia could not have been obtained in any other investigation of equal length and time, nor in any other less well prepared, illustrated, and conducted.” 1 The sincere thanks of all students of geology are due to his Imperial Majesty, the Tsar, for the boundless liberality he extended to the foreign visitors ; to the Russian geologists for the enormous and intelligently directed labor they devoted to the preparation of the means for demonstrating their vast and difficuit problems to hundreds of strangers ignorant of their customs and language; to their energy and pluck in carrying out their programme without a mishap; and to the hospitality and kindness of all classes of their countrymen, who made the long journey a continuous succession of pleasur- able experiences. 458 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. NOVEMBER 2. Mr. Cuas. P. Perot in the Chair. Twenty-six persons present. NOVEMBER 9. The President, SamurEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Twenty-seven persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— “ New Brazilian Streptaxide,” by Henry A. Pilsbry. “Notes on Living and Extinct Species of North American Bovide,” by Samuel N. Rhoads. NovEMBER 16. The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Thirty-five persons present. The death of Harrison Allen, M. D., on the 14th inst., was announced. Whereupon, after a statement by the Chair of his services to the Academy, the following minute was unanimously adopted :— The AcADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA desires to place on record its appreciation of the great loss it has sustained in the death of Dr. Harrison ALLEN. His earliest scientific work was accomplished within its walls and his subsequent investi- gations, including those which engaged his attention at the time of his death, were all either directly or indirectly contributions to its credit and standing in the scientific world. In the several executive and administrative offices to which he had been appointed—Corresponding Secretary, Member of the Council and of the Library Committee—his performance of the duties of each was characterized by loyalty to the best interests of the society. While his fellow-members rejoice in the just recognition accorded him by the scientific world as Comparative Anatomist, Mammalogist 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 459 and Anthropologist, they deeply regret the untimely loss of his co-operation. As a student of the works of nature he was conscientious, accu- rate and thorough; as a friend he was generous, sympathetic and helpful. The members of the Academy, while thus giving expression to their regret for the death of their associate desire to convey to his wife and children their sincere sympathy in their irreparable be- reavement. NovEMBER 23. The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Seventeen persons present. A paper entitled “The Plants of Lewis and Clark’s Expedition across the Continent during the years 1804-1806,” by Thomas Meehan, was presented for publication. NOVEMBER 80. The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Thirty-four persons present. A paper entitled ‘‘ New and Little-known Bees from Washington State,” by T. D. A. Cockerell, was presented for publication. The death, on the 24th inst., of George H. Horn, M. D., was announced and a resolution was adopted authorizing the appoint- ment of a committee to make arrangements for a Memorial Meeting to commemorate the services to science of Harrison Allen, M. D., and George H. Horn, M. D. A minute from the last meeting of the Anthropological Section of a communication made by the late Dr. Harrison Allen on a method of comparing skulls was read by Mr. Chas. Morris, who was requested, in view of the fact that it is probably Dr. Allen’s last contribution to science, to prepare it for publication in the Proceedings of the Academy. Mr. J. Waln Vaux was elected a member. Dr. Fridtjof Nansen of Christiania, Norway, was elected a corres- pondent. The following was ordered to be printed :— 460 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. REPTILES FROM SONORA, SINALOA AND JALISCO, MEXICO, WITH A DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF SCELOPORUS. BY JOHN VAN DENBURGH. This paper is an enumeration of the species of reptiles contained in three small collections, and is presented in the hope that it may be of use to those who are interested in the distribution of Mexican lizards and snakes. Two of these collections are in the California Academy of Sciences: the first, gathered in Sonora by Dr. Gustav Eisen and Mr. Walter E. Bryant in April and May, 1392; the second, due to the efforts of Dr. Eisen and Mr. Frank H. Vaslit in Sinaloa and Jalisco in October and November, 1894. The third collection was secured by Dr. David Starr Jordan and a party of students at Mazatlan in December, 1894, and January, 1895, and is in the Zoological Museum of Leland Stanford Junior University. 1. Phyllodactylus tuberculosus Wiegm. A fine specimen of this gecko (Cal. Acad. Sci., No. 3,389) was obtained at Matzalan, Sinaloa, in October. The California Academy possesses two specimens (248, 249) secured in Durango by Mr. C, A, Hamilton. 2. Gehyra mutilata (Wiegm.). Eighteen specimens of this lizard (C. A.S. 3,350-3,367) were collected at San Blas and one (C. A.8., 3,180) at Tepic, Jalisco. Females taken in October contain eggs which must have been nearly ready for laying; femoral pores vary from eleven to twenty on each side. In connection with Dr. Ginther’s suggestion that this species has been recently introduced into America,’ it may be of interest to note that geckos sometimes come to San Francisco in the holds of vessels. 8. Coleonyx variegatus Baird. Several specimens were caught at San Miguel de Horcasitas, in Sonora, in April, 1892. 4. Anolis nebulosus (Wiegm.). Dr. Eisen and Mr. Vaslit secured this species (3,181-3,188) at Tepic, Jalisco, in October. The California Academy possesses also ' Biol. Centr. Amer. Rept., 1898, p. 81. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 461 two specimens (C. A. S. 351, 352) caught by Captain Wm. Lund on the Tres Marias. Dr. Jordan’s party found the species at Mazatlan. 5. Iguana igvana rhinolopha (Wiegm.). Three specimens were obtained at Mazatlan, Sinaloa, and four (C. A.S., 3,339-3,342) at San Blas, Jalisco. 6. Ctenosaura teres (Harlan). ‘ This species is more numerously represented, both in the Stanford University collection and in that belonging to the California Acade- my, than any other species. These specimens were shot at Mazatlan, Tepic and San Blas. Many of these specimens are very large and have dorsal crests so well developed that I have no hesitation in abandoning Cope’s brachylopha as a name for them, although I have seen no specimens from near the type locality of Harlan’s Cyclura teres. It well may be that western specimens differ from the typical form, but until some better character has been found to separate them I cannot recognize them as distinct. 7. Crotaphytus baileyi Stejn. One specimen was brought back from Hermosillo, Sonora. 8. Callisaurus ventralis ‘Hallow). A Gridiron-tailed Lizard (C. A. 8., No. 3,390) taken at Mazatlan, Sinaloa, in October, appears to be identical with Californian and Arizonan examples of this species. Its femoral pores, however, are only ten instead of from fourteen to eighteen. This locality is much farther south than any at which this lizard had previously been found. The species was found also at San Miguel de Horcasitas, Sonora, in May, 1892. 9. Holbrookia maculata approximans (Baird). A typical specimen of this subspecies was caught at Duras Nillas, Sonora, in May, 1892. Several young from Mazatlan, January +25, 1895, are also referred to this form, although their snouts appear to be more pointed than those of Arizonan examples. 10. Uta ornata B. & G. This lizard was obtained in Sonora at San Miguel de Horcasitas, in April, and at Duras Nillas, in May, 1892. 11. Sceloporus utiformis Cope. Numerous specimens of this Sceloporus were shot at Tepic, Jalisco, in October. 462 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF . free 12. Sceloporus pyrrhocephalus Cope. A single young male (C. A.S., No. 3,329) agrees closely with Cope’s original description of this species. It was found at Tepic, Jalisco, in October. 13. Sceloporus obscurus new species. Two male specimens, one young and one adult, obtained at Tepic appear to differ in important characters from all known species. Type.—Cal. Acad. Sci., No. 3,213, Tepic, Jalisco, Mexico, Gustav Eisen and Frank H. Vaslit, November, 1894. Description.—Upper head-shields nearly smooth; enlarged supra- oculars in one row, separated from mesial head-shields by a com- plete series of small scales; two scales on canthus rostralis; frontal divided transversely but not longitudinally ; interparietal wider than long; parietals small; ear-opening with very slight denticula- tion of scales much smaller than those immediately preceding. Dorsal scales strongly keeled, sharply pointed, without marginal serrations, in nearly parallel longitudinal rows. Laterals keeled and pointed, in oblique rows, changing gradually to the larger dor- - sals and smaller ventrals. Twenty-eight to thirty dorsals on a line between interparietal plate and base of tail; about seven equaling length of shielded part of head. Ventrals smooth, emarginate ; gulars weakly keeled, emarginate. Upper caudals considerably larger than dorsals. Distance between base of fifth and end of fourth toe equals distance between end of snout and posterior bor- der of ear-opening. Tibia equals length of shielded part of head. Sixteen to eighteen femoral pores on each side, the series not meet- ing mesially. Males with enlarged postanal plates. All the upper surfaces are bluish steel-color, lighter and more bluish about the centres of many scales, sometimes with bronze re- flections, without collar or other markings of any kind except indis- tinct cross-bars on the toes. The lower surfaces are similarly colored, but are paler, with a greenish or bronze cast on the throat and chest and a large area of campanula blue on each side of the belly. There is a light streak along the middle of the throat. mm. mm. Snout toanus... - sed ses. 22 2 Oko Thength sof tail). = 3 2%. ace ss: Ser 5 Snout £0) CBE. s. ws avi WO oe, wpe 2 eee es Shielded part of head-< .. sae. ihe 2 ae Fore limb. Se, Ol et eee Hind limbs. 724. ARS 2. 23) eee Base of fifth to end ay fausth: face os DB ia ae eee 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 463 14. Sceloporus boulengeri Stejn. A very large number of Scelopori collected at Mazatlan and Tepic, are certainly identical with Dr. Stejneger’s S. boulengeri. I believe that this is the same form as Cope’s S. oligoporus. It may even be true that these are not distinguishable from S. horridus, but, without an opportunity to examine the types or specimens from the type localities, it seems best to use a name of unquestionable applicability. 15. Cnemidophorus deppii lineatissimus Cope. Two specimens (C. A. S., 3,344, 3,343) taken at San Blas, Jalisco, in October, 1894, seem typical of this lizard. 16. Cnemidophorus gularis B. & G. A lizard caught at Guaymas, Sonora, May 12, 1892, is identical with Arizonan specimens of this species. 17. Cnemidophorus mariarum Giinther. A large number of lizards from Mazatlan, San Blas and Tepic seem to be identical with Giinther’s specimens from the Tres Marias Islands. Whether they are also identical with Cope’s C. communis and Peter’s C. mexicanus I have not been able to decide. The upper lateral light lines are much farther apart than in C. gularis, causing the specimens to bear some resemblance to C. sex- lineatus. 18. Sympholis lippiens Cope. One typical specimen (C. A.S., 3,127) of this rare snake was taken at Tepic in October. 19. Bascanion flagellum frenatum Stejn. The cross-bars on the neck are rather faint in a snake of this sub- species (C. A. S., 3,412) which Mr. Bryant procured at Hermosillo, Sonora, in May,1892. This snake was brought back alive and died in San Francisco in October, 1892. 20. Bascanion semilineatum Cope. This racer was taken by the Academy’s collectors at both Tepic (Nos. 3,131, 3,182) and Mazatlan (No. 3,391) in October. 21. Bascanion lineatum Bocourt. A single example (C. A.S., No. 3,130) with one hundred and eighty-four gastrosteges, one hundred and twenty-one urosteges, and scales in seventeen rows, was shot at Tepic in October. 464 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. 22. Hypsiglena torquata (Giinth.). The Academy’s collectors secured a single representative (C. A. S., No. 3,394) of this species at Mazatlan. 28. Natrix valida (Kenn.). One specimen was secured at Tepic in October. 24. Hapsidophrys diplotropis (Giinth.). Two typical specimens of this beautiful snake were obtained at Mazatlan in October. 25. Sibon punctatum (Peters). Dr. Jordan’s party secured a single snake of this species at Mazat- lan. Its scale rows are nineteen and its gastrosteges one hundred and fifty-five. 26. Sibon personatum Cope. One snake of this kind was caught at Tepie, Jalisco, in October. It has one hundred and sixty-three gastrosteges, eighty urosteges, and scales in twenty-one rows. 27. Trimorphodon biscutatus (D. & B.). Two specimens from Mazatlan are in the Stanford University collection. They have gastrosteges 249, 250, urosteges 72, 79, scale rows 24, 25. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 465 SCAPHOPODA OF THE SAN DOMINGO TERTIARY. BY H. A. PILSBRY AND BENJ. SHARP, M. D. This account of the Scaphopods of the San Domingo tertiary strata variously denominated Miocene or Oligocene, is an outcome of investigations undertaken by the writers in the course of work upon a monograph of the Scaphopoda published in the “ Manual of Conchology.” It is based upon collections made by W. M. Gabb, and briefly described in the Transactions of the American Philoso- phical Society. Owing probably to Gabb’s illness when he prepared the pale- ontological part of the ‘‘ Geology of San Domingo,” and to his death before its publication, the study of his material seems to have been incomplete. Our examination of the material shows that of six species described or recorded by him from the beds in question, Dentalium rudis is the tube of a Serpuloid worm ; D. ponderosum is, as Guppy has already claimed, a form of D. dissimile of the Jamai- ean Oligocene; D. affine bears a preoccupied name, and Gadus dom- tnguensis is not that species, but a new one allied to the form called Ditrupa dentalina by Mr. Guppy. Among the specimens of the species discriminated by Gabb, and in several trays of undetermined specimens, we have been able to distinguish ten new and well-charac- terized forms, besides several which are probably distinct species, but being represented by young or very fragmentary individuals have been ignored in the following account.’ As to the age of the deposit in San Domingo furnishing these remains, and that of the same horizon at Bowden, Jamaica, there is diversity of opinion. Gabb and some others have considered it Miocene; and in view of the considerable number of species still existing in the Gulf of Mexico, and the close relationship of many of the extinct forms with living species, this estimate is not without support. Conrad, however, in 1852? and again in 1866* expressed ‘Among these, fragments of a species probably referable to our subgenus Episiphon may be mentioned. This group is represented in the German Oligocene by Dentalium ottot Sharp & Pils. 2 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1852, p. 198. 3 Check List of the Invertebrate Fossils of North America, Eocene and Oligocene. Smiths. Mise. Coll., VII, no. 200, p. 37. 466 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. his belief that the San Domingo deposit was Oligocene. This opin- ion has recently been re-affirmed by Dall* who considers the Bow- den marls of Jamaica and the beds of similar age in Santo Domingo to be upper Oligocene. In considering so small a fragment of the fauna as the Seapho- poda constitute, a full discussion of this question is uncalled for ; the more because the Scaphopods afford no conclusive data. Key to species of Scaphopoda. I. Shell largest at the aperture, tapering to the apex, : DENTALIUM. a. With distinet longitudinal sculpture. b. Circular sculpture conspicuous ; tube slowly taper- ing. c. Somewhat compressed; sculpture of many longitudinal cords alternating with threads, crossed by close, circular lamelle. D. callioglyptum. c. Circular in section; sculpture of many lon- gitudinal alternately smaller threads, crossed by regular, blunt, obliquely encircling striae, D. Tryon. b’. Circular sculptured inconspicuous. c. Tube markedly conical, with 6 or more ribs at apex, secondary and numerous tertiary riblets developed in the intervals, D. gabbi. ce’. Tube very slowly tapering, with six narrow, distant and sharply detined longitudinal ribs; intervals wide and plain, D. Cossmannianum, e”. Square at apex, with 4 ribs, numerous threads soon developing in intervals but lost on larger part of tube, which is circular and smooth, D. dissimile and var. ponderosum. a’. No longitudinal sculpture. b. Tube nearly or quite circular in section, almost straight, slender, considerably tapering; smooth and polished, D. haytense. b’. Tube ovate in section, being laterally compressed ; slowly tapering, thin, smooth ; apex with a terminal “sheath” and v-shaped slit, D. pyrum. *Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIX, p. 304, 1896. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 467 b”. Tube oval in section, compressed between the con- vex and concave sides; slowly tapering; moder- ately arcuate; smooth except for very fine growth lines, D. precursor. II. Shell contracted toward the aperture, which is smaller than the largest diameter of the tube; smooth, CaDULUB. a. Acicular, much attenuated posteriorly, the greatest diam- eter or “equator ” very near the aperture. b. Length 6-7 mm., about 8 times the greatest diam- eter, C. phenaz. b’. Length 8-12 mm., about 12 times the greatest diam- eter, C. elegantissimus. a’, Slender, but not conspicuously attenuated posteriorly, the greatest diameter near the aperture, where there is a small depression on the ventral side, C. depressicollis. a’, Stout and short, the greatest diameter near the anterior third of the length, gradually tapering toward each end ; length about 44 times greatest diameter, C. colobus. Dentalium Cossmannianum n. sp. PI. X, fig. 11; Pl. XI, figs. 10, 11. Shell a hexagonal prism with slightly convex faces, slender, slowly tapering, moderately solid, glossy. Sculpture: there are 6 very nar- row equidistant longitudinal threads, well raised and sharply de- fined, the wide intervals between them flat on the smaller end of the shell, but become decidedly convex toward the larger end; circular sculpture of rather strongly impressed annular growth marks at un- equal intervals, sometimes close, sometimes distant. Aperture not preserved in the material before us, but apparently not oblique and with nearly circular peristome but slightly modified in shape by the longitudinal threads. Apex not known, but evidently hexagonal. Length of (broken) type specimen 23 mm.; greatest diam. at larger end 3:5, at smaller end 2°7 mm. The type has lost from the smaller end a considerable portion of its original length and probably somewhat less from the oral extrem- ity. When perfect it probably measured not far from 45 or 50 mm. The portion remaining is perfectly characteristic, and unlike any Tertiary or living species of this region in the filiform riblets run- ning from end to end, with wide convex intervals showing no inter- mediate longitudinal sculpture, or only the faintest traces of riblets in places, visible only under the lens at a certain angle of reflection. ‘This is the form mentioned by Gabb under his remark on D. dis- 468 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. simile, in his paper “On the Topography and Geology of Santo Domingo,” p. 244. It is named in honor of Maurice Cossmann of Paris, whose fruitful labors upon the Parisian Kocene are justly esteemed by workers upon Tertiary mollusks. ) Dentalium callioglyptum n. sp. Pl. X, figs. 10,12; Pl. XI, fig. 21. Shell large, solid and but very slightly curved; noticeably com- pressed between the convex and concave surfaces; decidedly taper- ing. Sculpture, many longitudinal cords or riblets alternating with threads, altogether numbering about 65 near aperture, about 40 near the middle of the length, the ridges averaging about the width of the grooves; the whole crossed by circular raised lamelle running a little obliquely around the tube; these lamelle very close, nearly regular, most conspicuous in the intervals, and so fine that they are scarcely visible to the unaided eye. The circular lamellz subobso- lete toward the aperture in large specimens. Aperture slightly oblique, judging by the lines of growth; apex unknown ; but accord- ing to the fragments before us both orifices are slightly oval in con- sequence of the compression of the tube. Length unknown, but from the taper of the fragments probably about 115 mm.; greatest diam. of larger end of largest fragment 13, least diam. of same 12 mm., length 15 mm. Another fragment from near the middle of the shell measures, length 30, greatest diam. of larger end 7-9, of smaller end 46 mm. ; therefore tapering to the extent of 3°3 mm. in a length of 30 mm. The specimens were collected by Gabb, who referred them with a “?” to his D. affine. We at first thought to identify it with the recent D. carduus Dal, which has similar file-like circular sculpture; but upon appeal- ing to our kind friend at Washington for a comparison, the follow- ing differential features became apparent: “ D. carduwus is lighter ; the fossil form is not so much curved and the elevated lines are dis- tant, with no longitudinal sculpture between them ; the anterior part of the adult carduus has fine longitudinal striz covering the inter- spaces as well as the elevated riblets.” D. Tryoni differs from this species in the character of the circular strie and some other features mentioned below. Dentalium Tryoni n. sp. PI. X, figs. 5,9; Pl. XI, fig. 22. - Shell long, rather slender, slowly tapering and nearly straight, the very slight curvature mainly posterior; circular in section ;. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 469 quite thick and solid. Sculpture: many longitudinal threads about as wide as the intervals, alternately larger and smaller, crossed by slightly less strong, regular, blunt, encircling striz, rising into low granules as they cross the longitudinals; these striz are markedly oblique, bending well forward on the concave and backward on the convex side of the shell, and toward the larger end of adults be- coming irregular and, in part, obsolete. Aperture and apex not preserved, but both orifices are apparently circular. Estimated length 90 mm. in a specimen having a greatest diam, of 8°5 mm. A fragment measures: length 36, diam. at larger end 7, at smaller end 4:7 mm. The strongly developed and decidedly oblique encircling sculp- ture is conspicuous and characteristic. In D.carduus and D. callio- glyptum the circular sculpture consists of sharp, raised lamelle; in D. Tryoni of blunt cords, more widely spaced, and with the longi- tudinal riblets, enclosing rhombic depressions (Pl. XI, fig. 22). In the imperfect specimen 36 mm. long, measured above, there are 33 longitudinal cords and threads at the smaller end, double that num- ber at the larger, where some of the threads are very small. Be- sides the alternation in size, there is a more or less marked tendency for every fourth riblet to be larger, on the median portion of the tube. The largest of the fragments (diam. 8°5 mm.) has about 84 subequal longitudinal threads. The increase in number of riblets is by the regular intercalation of a thread in each interval, so that at various ages a specimen would have 16, 32 and 64 riblets; the increase thereafter being confined to the convex side, where the in- terposed threads appear earliest at each successive increase. In the general contour D. Tryont is not unlike the living D, cap- illosum Jeftr. Dentalium dissimile Guppy. Pl. XI, figs. 3, 4, 5. Dentalium dissimile Guppy, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., XXII, p. 292, pl. 17, f. 4 (1866). Dentalium ponderosum Gabb, see below. This species, described by Mr. Guppy, from the island of Jamaica, is apparently identical, as Guppy has stated, with a form collected by Gabb in San Domingo. It is a member of the “group of D. quadrapicale” as defined by us in the “ Manual of Conchology,’—a group distinguished by the quadrangular shape of the apex, the tube having lateral, ventral and dorsal angles posteriorly. Abund- 5 Vol. XVII, p. 31. 31 470 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. antly developed in the Pacific, this type is not known to have living representatives in the Atlantic or Gulf of Mexico, although Miocene and Pliocene forms have been found in the southern United States. In D. dissimile the tube is square at apex (Pl. XI, figs. 4, 5), but soon becomes circular in section. Each of the angles at and near the apex is pinched up into a narrow rounded rib. The interven- ing spaces are flat and plain near the apex, but soon a median thread or pair of threads arises, and a little later other threads ap- pear in the intervals, until there are 30 to 36 threads, varying in size, in the girth of the tube. This sculpture then gradually be- comes weaker, leaving the larger part of the tube cylindrical and smooth, except for circular striation (Pl. XI, fig. 3). The shell walls are unusually thick. Ordinarily a specimen of mature growth loses a great part of the sculptured portion by truncation, so that the square section of the earlier part of the tube is hardly noticeable. This was the case with Guppy’s type. The other characters of this species may be seen by reference to the figures here given and to Guppy’s original descrip- tion and figure. Var. ponderosum Gabb. PI. X, figs. 1, 2,3; Pl. XI, figs. 15, 16. D. ponderosum Gabb, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (N. Ser.), XV, p. 244 (1873). Larger, heavier, excessively solid, the cavity reduced to a small perforation by the excessive thickening of the shell. Quadrate form and accompanying sculpture very soon disappearing; form long and slender. Aperture rather oblique, the peristome, when per- fectly preserved, thin and sharp. In this remarkable form the thickness of the shell wall, when an adult is broken across the tube, is greater than the diameter of the orifice. The sculpture disappears sooner than in typical dissimile, and the taper of the shell is very gradual. Dentalium Gabbin.n. Pl. X, figs. 6, 7, 13; Pl. XI, figs. 1, 2. D. affine Gabb, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (N. Ser.), XV, p. 244 (1873). Not D. affine Deshayes, 1864, nor of Biondi, 1859. Shell slightly curved near the apex, the greater part of the length nearly straight; thick, solid and strong; rapidly tapering. Sculp- ture prominent near apex, weak and low toward aperture. At and near the apex, hexagonal with six narrow rounded ribs at the angles, but the symmetry often impaired by the prominence of one or more of the secondary ribs; the latter lie midway between the six primary 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 471 ribs, for the greater part are decidedly smaller than these, and at- tain or fall short of the apex according to the age and consequent degree of posterior truncation. In the secondary intervals there arise a variable number of tertiary threads, generally one, two or three in each space ; and at the aperture there is much variation in the number of riblets and threads, different specimens having 36, 40, 52, ete. In perfectly preserved shells there is seen an excessively fine but clear cut longitudinal striation in addition to the coarser sculpture described. Growth-striz fine, inconspicuous and oblique. Aperture slightly oblique, circular, the peristome bevelled to a thin edge. Apex rather wide, the orifice subcircular, with a minute notch on the convex side. Length 41°5, diam. at aperture 7-4, at apex 2°3 mm. The largest specimen measures 8 mm. diam. at aperture. A large, solid and markedly conical species, with very little curve, and that mainly quite near the apex. It is somewhat like D). disparile on a very large scale, and, as in that species, the nnm- ber of ribs at the apex is subject to considerable variation, although the fundamental form is hexagonal, the tube soon becoming circu- lar. D. thalloides Conrad of the Claiborne Eocene lacks the fine, clear-cut longitndinal striation of this species, and, moreover, tapers much less rapidly. Gabb’s diagnosis, published after his death, is not very full, and he gave no figure. As the name imposed by him is preoccupied, we have considered it best to present a detailed description, in propos- ing a new name for the form. Dentalium haytense Gabb. PI. XI, figs. 8, 9. D. haytensis Gabb, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (N. Ser.), XV, p. 244 (1873). Known only by fragments, the largest of which is probably one- half the original length. These indicate an almost straight, rather rapidly tapering but slender shell, circular or nearly so in section, with smooth, polished surface ; growth-wrinkles light, rather irregu- lar, running somewhat obliquely around the tube; and there is an occasional constriction so slight as to be hardly mentionable. No trace of longitudinal sculpture. Shell moderately thick (as shown by the section, fig. 8), but becoming very thin at the aperture. Apex unknown. Length of type (broken at both ends) 9°4, diam. at larger end 1:28 x 1°35, at smaller end 0°68 mm. 472 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. This is one of those simple species of the subgenus Levidentalium which has no prominent specific characters. It is still readily dis- tinguishable from other smooth forms of the Miocene or Oligocene of this region. D. pyrum is, perhaps, nearest, but that has a dis- tinctly ovate or pear-shaped section. Dentalium pyrum n. sp. PI. XI, figs. 6,7. Fragments, by which alone this species is known to us, indicate a shell of slight curvature and slow increase ; thin; distinctly ovate in section, compressed laterally, the narrow end of the egg-form toward the coneave side. Surface smooth except for light growth-lines, polished. Apex with a narrowly oblong orifice, passing into a short, narrowly V-shaped notch on the convex side of the tube ; the orifice, except at the slit, surrounded by an erect sheath. Length of largest fragment 6°45, greatest diam. at larger end 1°8, least 1°65 mm.; diam. at smaller end 1°3 x 1°4 mm. The apical characters are exactly as in the recent Antillean D. perlongum and D. matara Dall. It is the typical Antalis apex. Dentalium precursor n.sp. Pl. XI, figs. 12, 13, 14. Shell small, thin, slowly tapering, moderately arcuate, compressed between the convex and concave sides, the section therefore oval. Surface smooth except for very fine growth-lines, without longitudi- nal sculpture. Dimensions of type, which is broken at both ends: length 5°6, transverse or greatest diam. at larger end -95, least °85 mm. A member of our subgenus Compressidens,® but less rapidly in- creasing in transverse diameter than the several recent American species, among which it is most like Dall’s D. ophiodon. We know of no allied form in the American tertiaries. It is readily distin- guished from other smooth forms described herein by the vertically compressed and more arcuate tube. Cadulus phenax n. sp. Pl. XI, figs. 23, 24. Shell very slender, acicular, well curved posteriorly; rather abruptly swollen quite near the aperture, contracting rapidly an- teriorly, gradually tapering posteriorly to a small apex; nearly circular in section; surface smooth, glossy, with slight growth lines but no corrugation or circular riblets posteriorly. Aperture circu- lar, somewhat oblique; apical orifice circular with entire edge. Length 6°5, greatest diameter 0°8 mm. ‘Type D. pressum Sharp & Pilsbry. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 473 Exceedingly similar to C. dentalinus Guppy, of the Jamaican Oligocene,’ but easily distinguished by the lack of circular riblets upon the smaller half of the tube. It differs in form from all of the smooth species of the same group. We have examined a great many specimens. This is Gadus dominguensis of Gabb’s paper; not of d’Orbigny. Cadulus elegantissimus n. sp. PI. XI, figs. 28, 29, 30. Shell similar to the preceding, but larger, much more elongated. Tube compressed vertically, very obliquely but indistinctly striated, glossy. Greatest diameter close to the aperture; contraction rather slight. Aperture oval ; anal orifice oval, nearly circular. Length 11°75 mm.; greatest antero-posterior diameter of tube 0°65 mm. A smaller specimen measures, length 8°75, greatest antero-poste- rior diam. 0°7 mm. Two perfect specimens and several broken ones were included by Gabb in his lot of “ Gadus dominguensis.” It is excessively slen- der, quite arcuate, and decidedly longer and larger than C. denta- linus Guppy. The measurements are from the largest of the un- broken shells. Fragments indicate that somewhat larger individuals occur. Cadulus depressicollis n.sp. PI. XI, figs. 25, 26, 27. Shell long and slender, arcuate, much compressed between the concave and convex sides throughout. Regularly and slowly en- larging from the apex nearly to the aperture, then noticeably con- tracted on all sides; on the middle of the convex side having a distinctly depressed, concave area about one-third the width of the shell, and extending from the peristome backward a distance about equal to the greatest diameter of the aperture; surface smooth and glossy. Aperture oblong; apex oblong, simple, with subcircular orifice. Length 11:75 mm.; greatest diam. of tube 1°63, least diam. at same point 1-25 mm. ; aperture, greatest diam. 1°06, least 0°8 mm. This was one of the four species discriminated, upon separating Gabb’s tray of Gadus dominguensis into its elementary constituents. With Cadulus dentalinus Guppy, C. dominguensis d’Orb., and the various forms associated with it, C. depressicollis has no close rela- tionship. It is slender for a Cadulus, and remarkable for the ™Manual of Conchology, XVII, Pl. 36, figs. 1, 2. 474 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. decidedly concave area on the flattened surface adjacent to the lip on the convex side. Cadulus colobus n.sp. Pl. XI, figs. 17, 18, 19, 20. Shell small, thin, moderately curved, rather short and stout, but slightly swollen. Greatest girth at about the posterior third of the length of the tube, slowly tapering to the rather large apex, the anterior contraction equally gradual. Posteriorly the tube is strongly compressed vertically, but at the “ equator” and aperture it is nearly circular in section; surface polished. Aperture circu- lar, not oblique. Apical orifice transversely oval. Length 2:95 mm.; diameter at “ equator,” antero-posterior. 0'658, lateral 0-688 mm.; diam. at apex, antero-posterior 0.24, lateral 0.53 mm.; diam. of aperture 0°55 x 0°58 mm. C. colobus isa much smaller and more “ stumpy” species than C. parianus Guppy of the Trinidad Oligocene. It is very unlike C. dentalinus, elegantissimus or depressicollis. It was found with Gabb’s lot of “ Gadus dominguensis.” ’ VERMES—SERPULIDZ. ‘‘Dentalium rudis’’ Gabb. PI. X, figs. 4, 8. ? Dentalium rudis Gabb, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (n. ser.), xv, p. 244 (1873). The fossils referred doubtfully to Dentaliwm under the above name are unquestionably the tubes of a worm of the family Serpu- lide. The fragments indicate an almost straight, tapering tube with no trace of lateral attachment to other bodies. It is thick and seems to consist of three layers of different structure or composition. Externally there are eight rude, strongly convex longitudinal ridges separated by narrow grooves, and rendered irregular by rather numerous impressed lines running circularly around the tube, and occasional constrictions also irregular in occurrence. The ribs run almost straight, on some of the fragments, slowly spiral on others, the torsion being opposite in direction to that of the thread of an ordinary screw. The largest fragment measures, length 22, diam. at large end 7, at smaller end 5 mm. The measurement given by Gabb was from a number of fragments from several individuals fitted together according to the taper (as in fig. 4), and as the latter seems rather regular, his result is proba- bly not far from the truth. 1897.] In the present condition of the literature upon tubicolous worms, it is impossible for us to determine the generic position of these remains, but we take them to be something of the nature of Ditrupa, Hamulus or Pyrgopolon ; the massive, sculptured tube being not unlike the Cretaceous groups mentioned. NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 475 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PLATE X. (All figures natural size). 1, 2,3. Dentalium dissimile var. ponderosum Gabb. “ Dentalium rudis” Gabb. Fragments of three individ- uals. : Dentalium Tryont n. sp. Figs. 6,7. Dentalium Gabbi n. sp. Figs. Fig. 4. Big. "5. Fig. 8. Bis. 9. Figs. Bis. 11. Fig. 13. Figs Fig. 3. Fig. 4. ig: «6. Fig. 6. Big. 7. Hie. - 8. Bio. 9. Fig. 10. Bios 11. Fig. 12. Fig. 13. Fig. 14. “ Dentalium rudis” Gabb. Fragment. Dentalium Tryoni n. sp. 10,12. Dentalium callioglyptum n. sp. Dentalium cossmannianum n. sp. Dentalium Gabbi n. sp. PLATE XI. 1,2. Dentalium Gabbin. sp. Enlarged view of the apex. Dentalium dissimile Guppy. Enlarged view of anterior portion. Dentalium dissimile Guppy. Enlarged view of posterior end. Dentalium dissimile Guppy. Enlarged view of apex. Dentalium pyrum n. sp. Enlarged view of aperture. Dentalium pyrum n. sp. Ventral aspect, enlarged. Dentalium haytense Gabb. Aperture, enlarged. Dentalium haytense Gabb. Lateral aspect, enlarged. Dentalium Cossmannianum n. sp. Lateral aspect of anterior portion. Dentalium Cossmannianum n. sp. Section, enlarged. Dentalium precursor n. sp. Aperture, enlarged. Dentalium precursor n.sp. Lateral aspect, enlarged. Dentalium precursor n. sp. Dorsal aspect, enlarged. 476 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Figs. 15,16. Dentalium dissimile var. ponderosum Gabb. Two Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Figs. *Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. sections of one individual (Pl. X, fig. 2) enlarged. Cadulus colobus n. sp. Dorsal aspect, much enlarged. Cadulus colobus n. sp. Aperture. Cadulus colobus n. sp. Lateral aspect. Cadulus colobus n. sp. Anal orifice. Dentalium callioglyptum n. sp. Sculpture, much enlarged. Dentalium Tryoni n. sp. Sculpture, much enlarged. 23,24. Cadulus phenax n.sp. Lateral aspect. | 25. Cadulus depressicollis n. sp. Outlines of aperture and “ equator.” Cadulus depressicollis n. sp. Lateral aspect. Cadulus depressicollis n. sp. Ventral aspect. Cadulus elegantissimus n. sp. Lateral aspect. Cadulus elegantissimus n. sp. Outline of aperture. Cadulus elegantissimus n. sp. Lateral aspect. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 477 NEW BRAZILIAN STREPTAXIDZE. BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. In the course of identifying Brazilian Streptazide some time ago, my attention was called to the fact that in the collection of the Acad- emy there were several different and very distinct species labelled “ Streptaxis candidus Spix,” mainly in the “ Robert Swift” and “A. D. Brown” collections. I was thus induced to reexamine the large species of the group Artemon, to which these forms belong, and to investigate their characters and literature. Tryon' enumerates the following species: S. candidus Spix (in- cluding S. Spixianus Pfr.), S. intermedius Alb., S. regius Lobbecke, S. wagneri Pfr., S. Rollandi Bern., S. Paivanus, conoideus, costulosus and cypsele Pfr., S. apertus and depressus Martens. S. regius, Rollandi and cypsele I have not seen. The identity of S. candidus Spix with S. Spixianus Pfr. is very uncertain. There is nothing in the collection of the Academy altogether fulfilling the requirements of the Spix-Wagner description, which indicates a broadly umbilicated shell, of 25 mm. diam. and half that height. The larger size of Pfeiffer’s shell is of course not significant, for most of these species periodically form expanded lips, which, with further growth, remain visible, varix-like, on the base of the shell; so that the size of apparently mature examples is not a safe specific crite- rion. The following forms seem to be new :— S. helios n. sp. Shell depressed, with low-conoid spire, umbilicate, the umbilicus deep and somewhat funnel-shaped, one-fifth the diameter of shell; rather thin and not very strong, buff tinted ; the surface with varn- ish-like gloss, very smooth, with only a faint puckering below the suture representing the costulation of the allied species. Apex minute, smooth; whorls fully 63, moderately convex, at first slowly, then more rapidly increasing, the last decidedly wider than the penultimate (viewed from above), well rounded at the periphery, convex beneath, very obtusely subangular around the umbilicus. 1 Manual of Conchology, (2), I, pp. 61-63. 478 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Aperture oblique, roundly crescentic, the width hardly exceeding the height; peristome thin, but very slightly expanded below, the columellar margin expanded, slightly recurved, but little impinging upon the umbilicus; Alt. 15, greater diam. 24, lesser 21:7 mm.; width of aperture 11, height 11 mm. Brazil. Smoother above than any of the other large species. Perhaps. Pfeiffer’s “Streptaxis candida var.,” Chemnitz, edit. 2, Helix, Pl. 103, f. 29, 30, is this species; but in fig. 29 the basal lip is less deeply rounded than in typical helios. 8. tumulus n. sp. Shell subglobose-depressed, umbilicate, the umbilicus deeply pen- etrating, cylindrical or well-like, one-seventh the diameter of shell ; solid; white or yellowish with brilliant gloss, the upper surface sculptured with smooth, regular, slightly arcuate, rounded costule,. wider than their intervals, and on the last whorl about 24 in the space of a millimeter; becoming obsolete at the periphery, the base being smooth with the luster of varnish. Spire low dome-shaped, the earlier whorls slightly conic. Whorls 7, very slowly increasing, the last scarcely wider than the penultimate (viewed from above),. rounded at periphery and convex beneath, showing two slight vari- ceal ridges marking former peristome positions. Aperture oblique, rotund-crescentic, mainly basal, but little wider than high; peri- stome not expanded above, becoming slightly so at base, and ex- panded and slightly recurved at the columellar margin, where it is. dilated somewhat and impinges upon the umbilicus. Alt. 18, greatest diam. 25, lesser 23 mm.; width of aperture 12, height 11:7 mm. Brazil. The outlines of the spire are more convex than in S. spixianus Pfr., the whorls more compactly coiled, the last conspicuously nar- rower. The aperture is rounder and more basal, and the umbilicus decidedly smaller. Compared with S. regius Lobbecke, this species is less elevated with decidedly narrow umbilicus. S. capillosus n. sp. Shell closely resembling S. Spixianus Pfr. in general contour, openly umbilicate, the umbilicus from one-sixth to one-fifth the diam. of shell; moderately solid; grayish-white or yellowish. Sur- 1897. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 479 face slightly shining, very finely and closely costulate-striate through- out, the costule clear-cut but minute, about 5 in the space of a millimeter, on the last whorl; becoming lower and fainter on the base. Whorls 6 to 64, convex, at first slowly, then more rapidly increasing, the last decidedly wider than the penultimate, rounded at the periphery, obtusely angular around the somewhat funnel- shaped umbilicus. Aperture rounded lunate, oblique; outer and basal margins of peristome slightly expanded, columellar margin dilated above; basal margin slightly bent forward in the middle. Alt. 13°5, greater diam. 21, lesser 18°3 mm.; width of aperture 11, height 9°5 mm. Alt. 12°5, greater diam. 20°5 mm. Province of Bahia, Brazil. Resembles S. Spizianus in form, but the series of a half dozen spe- cimens before me differs constantly from that species in the smaller size of the shells and the extremely fine striation. S. decussatus n. sp. Shell depressed-turbinate, narrowly umbilicate, the umbilicus deep and well-like, one-ninth or one-tenth the diam. of shell; moderately solid; pale yellowish. Surface glossy, closely and finely costulate above, the costulee wider than the intervals, about three in the space of a millimeter, and decussated by numerous fine spirals, which cut or indent them but do not appear in the intervening grooves; the base similarly but less strongly costulate. Spire low conoid, with the lateral outlines but slightly convex, apical whorls costulate ; whorls 64, at first slowly, then more rapidly widening, the last bluntly but conspicuously angular at the periphery, convex beneath, angular around the umbilicus. Aperture rhombic, somewhat ob- lique, angular at middle of outer margin and at junction of the basal with the columellar margin; peristome unexpanded, becoming slightly so below, the columellar margin vertical, dilated above, impinging upon the umbilicus. Alt. 16, greater diam. 22, lesser 20 mm.; width of aperture 12, height 11 mm. Brazil. Peculiar in the decussated sculpture and continuation of the cos- tulation to the apex. The angular periphery and verge of the nar- row umbilicus are also conspicuous features. 480 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. DECEMBER 7. The President, Samurt G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. Twenty-eight persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— “Descriptions of two new forms of Perideris,” by Henry A. Pilsbry. “Synopsis of the recent Psammobiidze of North America,” by We eeDall: “The Gerrhonotus of the San Lucan Fauna of Lower California with diagnoses of other West American Species,” by John Van Denburgh. “The Petrifaction of Bones,” by E. Goldsmith. DECEMBER 14. The President, Samurt G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. Forty-four persons present. DECEMBER 21. The President, SamuEx G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. Forty-six persons present. A paper entitled “Anatomical Notes on certain Western American Helices,” by Henry A. Pilsbry and E. G. Vanatta, was presented for publication. The death of the Rey. Samuel Haughton of Dublin, Ireland, a Correspondent, was announced. Additional Note on the Gastropod Genus Tatea, Tenison- Woods. —Mr. H. A. Pirssry offered the following remarks : Owing ‘to the incompleteness of our series of the “ Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania,” and to the omission of an entry in the “ Zoo- logical Record,” an important note on Tatea,’ by a corresponding member of this Academy, was overlooked by me in dealing with this genus in these Proceedings, p. 360. Professor Tate correctly refers Dardania Hutton, 1882, to Eaton- della, following Hutton ; and he further includes Matean in Eaton- 1On the classificatory position and synonyms of Eatoniella rufilabris, by Professor Ralph Tate, F. L.8., 2 Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. W ales, TX, 1885, p- 940. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 481 iella. This union I have proven to be inadmissible on the ground of the totally different dentition of the radula. Professor Tate’s note, therefore, does not in the least affect the conclusions reached in my paper, viz., that Tatea is a valid genus of Amnicolide ; that it is not at all closely related to the Rissoini- ne; and that it is not equivalent to the genus Eatoniella. It only remains to add that the paper of my esteemed colleague may be consulted with advantage for the full specific synonymy, and for details of the external anatomy of Tatea not given in my own communication. DECEMBER 28. GENERAL Isaac J. WISTAR in the Chair. Thirty-six persons present. A paper entitled “ Odonata (Dragonflies) from the Indian Ocean and from Kashmir collected by Dr. W. L. Abbott,” by Philip P. Calvert, was presented for publication. The following was offered from the Anthropological Section :— The Anthropological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences views with the deepest regret the untimely death of its late able and esteemed Director, Dr. Harrison ALLEN, to whose earnest efforts the organization and subsequent success of the Section were mainly due and who served it as Director from its first meeting until his decease. Dr. Allen’s broad interest in the science of anthropology in general and his valuable series of studies in the characteristics of human crania in particular, were indicated by numerous communications to the Section, of which one, on a new method of estimating the comparative measurements of skulls, given in October, 1897, was probably his last communication before any scientific body. The high value and wide diversity of his scientific work, the originality and suggestiveness of many of his views and the deep earnestness of his devotion to scientific research render his death a serious loss to the world of science as a whole, and in particular to the institutions with which he was intimately connected. By the Anthropological Section it is felt to be a loss which cannot easily be repaired. The communication above alluded to has been reported as follows :— 482 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Comparative Measurements of Skulls—At the meeting of the Anthropological Section of the Academy, held October 8, 1897, Dr. Harrison ALLEN presented a number of Hawaiian skulls, placed in his hands by Dr. Whitney, who had enjoyed exceptional opportunities for their collection. It had been found, he said, that the Hawaiian people of high caste selected different burial places from those of low caste, the former choosing caves as places of sepulture, the latter interring their dead on the sea coast. This custom renders it easy to divide the skulls into two classes, whose distinction is also indicated in their characteristics. He had found, on comparison of these classes of skulls, that they presented well- marked distinctions, not due to any difference of race, but simply to different habits and conditions. The skulls of high caste origin were found to have characters due, in his opinion, to higher intelli- gence and more luxurious habits of living than those belonging to the lower caste, all the differences observed being probably referable to these causes. In comparing these characters he adopted a special method, con- stituting a modification of the ordinary method. Instead of indi- cating variations by curves, he arranged the numbers representing the measurements of significant features in the series of skulls, in steps, or terraces, each step indicating by its width the degree of preponderance of its corresponding number. Omissions in the series of numbers were likewise indicated. He considered this method superior to that of curves, as greatly simplifying the com- parisons of a series of numbers, and enabling conclusions to be readily and quickly drawn. This communication possesses a special value in its being the last made by Dr. Allen, whose death took place shortly after its deliy- ery. The following were ordered to be printed :— 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 483 NOTES ON LIVING AND EXTINCT SPECIES OF NORTH AMERICAN BOVIDE. BY SAMUEL WN. RHOADS. Through the courtesy of his friend Stewart Culin, of the Depart- ment of Archeology and Paleontology, University of Pennsylvania, the author has been permitted to examine a collection of mammal- ian fossils forwarded from Alaska to the University. These fossils were collected ‘‘on the tundra, back of Point Barrow,” a locality from which no mammalian fossils appear to have been previously recorded, and situated 500 miles farther north than the celebrated Elephant Point. fossil beds on the shores of Eschscholtz Bay. They comprise numerous parts of the skeletons of Elephas, to- gether with the skulls of three individuals of the genus Bison, all in an unusually good state of preservation. In identifying these for Mr. Culin it was found necessary to make comparisons with the type specimens of Bison in the Museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. The results of this study appear to war- rant publication, affecting as they do the question of the relation- ships of Bison latifrons (Harlan), B. antiquus Leidy, B. alleni Marsh and B. crampianus (Cope). The two smaller specimens, Nos. 13,752, 13,753 of the University Museum Catalogue, undoubtedly represent the smaller extinct bison of N. America, named in 1854 by Richardson, Bison crassicornis, from specimens taken at Eschscholtz Bay, Alaska. The smaller of these two specimens, No. 13,752, is from an adult animal, probably a male, of four or five years. The fronto-parietal and occipital por- tions of the skull from the posterior line of the orbits to the basi- occipital inclusive, are intact, as also the horn-cores. The distance from tip to tip of horn-cores is 812 millimeters. The frontal breadth between the bases of horn-cores is 318 mm. Specimen No. 13,753 is a skull in much the same condition as the preceding, excepting the horn-cores, whose terminal thirds have been destroyed. It be- longs to an older animal than No. 138,752, the frontal breadth be- tween the bases of horn-cores being about the same as in that speci- 484 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. men but the interorbital width is 325 mm. greater. The horns of both these specimens agree closely in size, curvature and relative dimensions with the larger horn-core and attached frontal bone forming the type of Leidy’s Bison antiquus from Big Bone Lick, Kentucky. Dr. J. A. Allen, in his Memoir of the American Bisons,’ not only shows the specific differences of the smaller extinct bison of America from the living animal, but establishes the priority of Leidy’s name antiquus over Richardson’s crassicornis, and shows that both these names were, with little doubt, applied to the same species. In the Museum of the Academy is the most complete cranium of fossil American bison’ yet recorded (Pl. XII, fig. 2). It was sent to Dr. Leidy by Messrs. Calvin and Wilfred Brown, who discovered it in the Pilarcitos Valley near San Francisco, Cal. It is classed by Leidy under /atifrons, to which he subsequently referred his antiquus specimens. Its relations to the existing bison are much closer, how- ever, than to Leidy’s type of antiquus. A comparison of the type of antiquus from Big Bone Lick with the newly acquired specimens from Alaska, confirms the views of Dr. Allen and Prot. E. D. Cope,* viz., that we have in B. antiquus a near prototype of the existing bison. In antiquus the stout, subcircular horn-cores have first a lateral growth at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the skull (or directed slightly backward) and on a level with (or slightly be- low) the frontal plane, rather abruptly curving upward along their distal third within a plane intersecting the frontals at right angles, or at an angle from 5 to 15 degrees posterior thereto. In Bison bi- son typical specimens show the following characteristic differences from B. antiquus: a, the size of the cranium in largest known ex- amples is 10 to 15 percent. less; b, the relative length of the horn- cores to the breadth of frontals between the bases of horn-cores is 5 to 10 per cent. less; ¢, a straight line drawn from the tip of horn- core across the median superior base of same in B. bison will, if con- tinued, intersect the orbits; in B. antiquus, a line similarly drawn intersects the base of opposing horn-core—in other words, the chord of the smallest arc in horn-cores of B. bison is at about an angle of 45° to the longitudinal axis of the skull, while in B. antiquus the same chord is more or less nearly at right angles (90°) to that axis ;. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 485 d, the vertical and longitudinal (transverse) diameters of the horn- cores of B. bison, measured at one-third of the distance of whole length of core from base of same, are about equal, and the superior (concave) surface of core well rounded, in B. antiquus the longitudi- nal diameter is much the greater, and the superior (concave) sur- face of core more or less flattened.‘ The third, and by far the most interesting, of all the Alaskan specimens loaned by Mr. Culin, is a large cranium of a long horned fossil bison (No. 13,754), in which the frontal and occipital por- tions, with their horn-cores, are intact. The upper margins of the orbits and the basal suture of the nasals are also present. The specimen is evidently of a fully adult male animal, and is much the best preserved and strongly fossilized example of bison that has come to hand. In the latter respect it is in strong contrast to the other bison specimens which accompanied it from Alaska, or, in fact, with any in the entire series now at the Academy. As com- pared with the antiquus skull from Alaska already mentioned, it is: more thoroughly mineralized, and shows but slight traces of the water-worn appearance so evident in the latter. Its specific gravity is 13 to 12 times that of the antiquus specimens. Whether they all came from the same site and geological horizon we have no source of information, but the comparatively recent characters of the antiquus skulls, their color and frangibility, bespeak a much later age and indicate a surface exposure to the elements, so that they do not greatly differ in character from the weathered skulls of recent Musk Ox sent to the University from Alaska in the same shipment. The large-horned specimen, which may, for the present, be referred to as number 13,754, shows, in the size and curvature of its horns, a very different type of bison from either B. bison or B. antiquus, in these and other respects indicating their closer relation- * In the type of antiquus this flattening is very marked, as also in the Alas- kan specimens. In Leidy’s California specimen the flattening is very slight, and in cross section the horn differs very little from B. bison. Indeed, this specimen in this regard is so different from the type of antiquus and from all the antiquus specimens from Alaska as to raise the question of their specific identity. Just before this article went to the printer, the author consulted a valu- able paper in the Kansas University Quarterly for July, 1897, on the osteol- ogy of B. antiquus, by Alban Stewart. While Mr. Stewart unfortunately makes no comparisons between his fine skull of antiquus and other American fossil species, and omits to mention many characters which are essential in such comparisons, his paper brings out some strong distinctions between typical antiquus and B. bison hitherto only conjectured because of the frag- mentary state of all other specimens. ‘ 486 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. ship to the huge-horned B. latifrons of Harlan, the type of which is in the Museum of the Academy. It is, however, a much smaller- horned species, and the horn-cores are much more curved and flat- tened than in latifrons. The difference in the size of the cranium in the two species is not great, the frontal breadth heing the same, but the greater breadth and massive development of the occi- pital region in /atifrons is very noticeable, a difference necessitated by the great relative weight of the horns and the consequent de- velopment of the cervical muscles and their attachments at the base of the cranium. The species to which No. 13,754 shows closest rela- tions is B. erampianus of Cope, recently described,’ from the Pleis- tocene of Kansas, the type of which is also in the Museum of the Academy. The horn-core and rostral portion of cranium which represent this species are intermediate in size and characters between /atifrons and No 13,754. As pointed out by Prof. Cope, the characters separating latifrons from crampianus, based solely on the horn-cores, are, without much doubt, specific, the difference in size alone amounting to 40 per cent., while in curvature and the relative dimensions of cross section the distinctions are equally pronounced. It therefore remains to consider the status of the Alaskan speci- men with regard to crampianus. Before doing so, however, the question of sexual differeuces in the development of the horn-cores of the genus Bos and Bison should be considered. Dr. Leidy, in his study of the extinct bisons, evidently believed, or at least thought it possible, that sexual variations in size of horn-cores of the extinet bisons might account for some of the so-called species described by himself and others, and, subsequent to describing antiquus as a dis- tinct species, he made it a synonym of Jatifrons! The extreme im- probability of this conjecture is made evident by Dr. Allen in his monograph. It is impossible to determine the sex of fossil speci- mens, except where they are perfect enough and numerous enough to exhibit the characters which determine this in nearly related liv- ing species. The number of specimens of fossil bisons is yet too small and their condition too fragmentary to arrive at a very satis- factory answer to this question. So far as it goes, however, it is pertinent to show the extent of difference in the size and shape of § Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., IV, p. 456, pl. XXII: (= B. alleni Marsh). 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF, PHILADELPHIA. _ 487 horns between males and females in living species of the genera Bos and Bison. A comparison of males and females in old world species of Bos, as B. indicus, B. caffer and B. grunniens, not only confirms the diagnosis of the bovine section of the Bovide made by Flower and Lydekker :* “horns of nearly equal size in both sexes,” but shows also the relative position of the horns to the skull and their curvature is subject to no specific sexual variations. In the existing American Bison, to which all the fossil remains of Nearctic species appear more closely related than to the Palearctic species, we have excellent opportunities to determine the sexual characters of the horns from very large suites of specimens in several of our museums as well as among herds of the living animals. Of the latter the author has examined the herd of the Philadelphia Zoological Society, in which about twenty individuals, including six adult females, are represented. Without exception, these females prove that the only difference between male and female bison horns is in the smaller basal calibre of the latter. With respect to curvature and angle of growth from the skull they are singularly like the males in the same herd. With respect to length, the maximum female horn fully equalled the longest of any male horn examined, in this respect showing a length relative to the size of body about 20 per cent. greater than in the male.’ With respect to the shape of the horn- cores in the two sexes, those of the female are more cylindrical throughout, almost entirely lacking the slightly flattened contour exhibited by the superior surface of male horn-cores. It would seem fair to assume, therefore, where there is no evidence to the contrary, that the extinct species of Bos and Bison were anal- ogous to our existing forms in respect to the slight differences be- tween the horns of males and females of the same species, and that marked differences in size and diametric proportions of the adult horn-cores, making due allowance for the more slender and eylin- drical character of the female horn, are diagnostic specifie charac- ters. On this basis we will return to a comparison of the horn-cores of the Alaskan skull, No. 13,754, with Cope’s type of B. crampianus. The basal processes of the left horn-core of crampianus are wholly wanting, but the contour lines and sulcations of the original parts indicate that but a small portion of the base of the core is missing. ® Mam. Liv. and Extinct, 1891, p. 360. 7 The relative length of sheath to core is greater in females than in males, so that the cores of females average shorter than males of same age. 488 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. e A conservative estimate of the original length of the horn-core, add- ing two inches (50 mm.) to the broken apical portion and two more for the basal part, makes it 800 mm. when measured along its pos- terior are on a plane with the occiput; the same measurement in No. 13,754 is only 520 mm. The girth of core of crampianus measured half way from base to tip, where the specimen is best preserved, is 305 mm., while that of No. 18,754 is 241 mm. These dimensions show that in crampianus we have a species bearing horns more than 4 heavier and longer than the large-horned Alaskan animal, and in this respect showing a difference out of all proportion to the greatest known dif- ference shown by adult males and females of the same species in exist- ing bisons. Examining next the shape of the horns in the specimens under consideration we note a striking difference, quite sufficient when present in living species, to denote specific values. The greatest diameter of the horn-core of crampianus, measured ata point half way between base and tip, is 105 mm., the least diameter 92 mm., the first of these measurements being taken along a line parallel to the facial plane and the second at right angles thereto. In No. 13,754 these measurements are respectively 88 mm. and 67 mm., showing the greater superior flatness of the horns of the Alaskan animal. A median cross-section of the core of crampianus, in the words of its describer, “is a triangle, with a broadly rounded apex.” Itis more properly a truncated oval or ellipse, the flattened or hollowed truncate portion corresponding with the posterior face of the core. In No. 18,754 the same section presents a rounded hemispheric out- line, the flat side of which is on a line with the facial plane and forms the superior anterior face of the core, and the truncated side, seen in crampianus, is replaced by a convex, rounded curve, falling posteriorly into a larger one and terminating anteriorly quite abruptly along the superior posterior edge, which forms a distinct ridge at this part along the distal half of core. The relations of No. 13,754 to crampianus being now made appar- ent, it should be stated that the author considers the latter a syno- nym of B. alleni Marsh, briefly described in the American Journal of Science,® from a single horn core “ from the lower Pliocene of Kansas.” The dimensions and curvature of this specimen, together with the locality and geologie stratum from which it was taken, duplicate too closely the characters and history of the crampianus type to warrant any other conclusion, and the foregoing remarks 8 Am. Jour. Sci., 1877, No. LX XXI, p. 252, Appx. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 489 showing the relations of crampianus to No. 13,754 will, of course, equally apply to B. allenit. The use of crampianus in the above comparisons was necessitated by the writer’s inability to procure the type of allent. Prof. Marsh also described on the same page of the American Journal two horn-cores of another and smaller and straighter-horned bison from the lower Pliocene of Nebraska which he named Bison jerox. Its specific distinction from B. alleniis, perhaps, well-founded (although it is not enough smaller than that species not to be its female), because of the straightness of its horns. In this respect and in its much greater size it is, without a doubt, a different species from that represented by the large Alaskan specimen No. 15,754. Both ferox and alleni, of course, are not comparable to latifrons, and both are as equally removed from antiquus (= crassicornis) as cram- pianus has been shown to be. Before making a final decision as to the status of this large Alas- kan specimen it remains to consider some important questions of synonymy and identity arising from the original description and figures of crassicornis. Richardson’s species erassicornis, as originally described in the “ Zoology of the Voyage of the Herald,” is founded primarily on the skull formerly secured by Captain Beechey at Eschscholtz Bay and figured by Buckland in the appendix to Beechey’s Voyage. This skull is figured by Richardson on Plate IX of his work, no other reference being given in the headline of his article on this species (p. 40). On page 42 he enumerates a “ No. 91,” stating: “This number indicates the large horn-core, of which aside view on the facial aspect is given in Plate XIII, fig. 1, and a view of the coronal aspect in fig. 2, both of the natural size.” On the next page he refers to this specimen, stating, after a comparison with other remains from Alaska and with Bos primigenius—‘“it has therefore been considered a horn-core of an older and probably a male individual of the race that produced the skull marked No. 1 A, and to which, from the thickness of its horns, I have given the distinctive epithet of crassicornis.” Leidy, Allen and others have already almost conclusively shown that crassicornis, based on the Beechey specimen as a type, is a syn- onym which must yield priority of publication to antiquus of Leidy. The fine series of specimens of fossil bison now in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia confirms this conclusion. But 490 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. a comparison of the figures of the large horn-cores on Plate XIII of Richardson’s work, which he also refers to crassicornis, shows unmis- takable similarity to the horn-cores of the large-horned Alaskan specimen from the University of Pennsylvania, No. 13,754. Not only is the shape and curvature of these horn-cores, as figured by Richardson, remarkably similar to those of No. 13,754, but the measurements of the latter coincide almost exactly with those given for the former. Indeed it would be almost impossible in a series of hundreds of such skulls to find two individuals so nearly alike. As has already been pointed out, we cannot account for the dif- ference between Richardson’s type skull of crassicornis and the large horn-cores which he attributes to a male of the same species, on the ground of sex. There is little doubt that the Beechey type specimen of crassicornis is of a male, and that the small, rounded horn-core, which Richardson figured on Plate XIII in contrast with the large ones under the name “ B. priscus,” is of a female antiquus (—erass- icornis). An exactly similar specimen of same size and curvature with its accompanying sheath is in the collection of the Academy, being presented by Dr. B. Sharp, who secured it at Elephant Point, Kotzebue Sound, Alaska. It is also worthy of mention that these supposed female horns show a close analogy in their slenderness, length and deep sulcation of cores as compared with that of the supposed male specimens of “ crassicornis”’ from the same locality, to the same characters in B. bison. From the foregoing we may arrive at the following conclusions : a. B. crassicornis, as described and figured by Richardson, is a com- posite species; b. The name crassicornis was “first applied” and “primarily related” to a type specimen “No.1 A,” Pl. IX, ¢, which has been determined to be specifically the same as the type of an earlier named species, B. antiquus, of which, therefore, B. crassicornis becomes asynonym ; ¢c. Therefore, Canon XX VIII, and “affirmation (f),” A. O. U. Code, the name ecrassicornis cannot ap- ply to the other and large-horned species enumerated under that name by Richardson; d. It having been demonstrated that this large-horned species is identical with the Alaskan specimen, No. 13,754, which differs in many essential characters from any bison yet named, therefore it is proposed ,to designate this species as: Bison alaskensis sp. nov. Great Alaskan Bison. PI. XII, figs. 3 and 6. Type from “Tundra back of Point Barrow, Alaska.” Ad. ¢, No. 13,754, Col. of Mus. of Sci. and Art, Univ. of Penna. Basal part of cranium with attached horn-cores in good condition. — 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 491 Syn. Bison erassicornis Richardson, Zool. Voy. Herald, 1854, pp. 42, 43, Pl. XIII, figs. 1 and 2 (including solely the references to large $ horn-core “ No. 91”). General characters.—Size intermediate between B. antiquus and B. alleni; frontal breadth equalling that of B. latifrons, the occi- pital development much weaker. Horn-cores strongly curved up- ward and forward, their tips reaching behind the plane of the occi- put; greatly flattened and smooth superiorly, broadly rounded and deeply furrowed inferiorly, showing a rounded hemispheric outline in median cross-section as contrasted with type of crampianus (= alleni). Frontal and occipital characters as in B. bison and its other extinct allies, when contrasted with Old World forms. Ratio of length of single horn-core to breadth of frontals between horn- cores much smaller than in type of crampianus’ (—=alleni) and Jati- frons. Ratio of greatest median diameter of horn-core to the least median diameter of same, much less than in any known American species of bison. For more detailed comparative characters con- sult the preceding pages of this paper. Measurements.—Greatest extent of horn-cores, measured between tips, 1,180 mm.; chord of are of left horn-core from tip to superior base, 405 mm. ; shortest frontal width between basilar processes of horn-cores, 465 mm.; greatest interorbital width, 400 mm. ; length from basal suture of nasals to posterior edge of occipital crest, meas- ured along mesial frontal profile, 333 mm.; greatest mastoid breadth, 8308 mm.; vertical height of occiput, from lower border of foramen magnum to highest point of occipital crest, 174 mm.; great- est width between the outer edges of the lateral wings of the con- dyles, 162 mm.; girth of frontal shoulder of left horn-core, meas- ured 20 mm. from basal border of core, 349 mm.; greatest girth of left horn-core, measured along basal border, 410 mm.; girth of left horn-core at a point 200 mm. from its inferior basal border, 241 mm.; greatest diameter of core at same point, 86 mm.; least diameter of core at same point, 66 mm.; length of left horn-core meas- ured along superior are (adding 15 mm. for portion of tip worn off), 497 mm.;.the same measured along inferior are of same, 526 mm. Habitat and Geologie Position—Northern Alaska (and British America?) from Kotzebue Sound northward ; living in early Plis- tocene time, anterior to but perhaps overlapping the existence of the * Judging by the dimensions of the antorbital section of the type of cram- pianus, its cranium was about the same size as those of alaskensis and latifrons. 492 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. more southern B. antiquus, whose remains are found in the same deposits along the southern range of alaskensis. Note on “ Bison appalachicolus” Rhoads. In the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia for the year 1895, pages 246 to 248 inclusive, the writer described the horn-core of a fossil bovine from a limestone cave in Pennsylvania as a new species, under the above name. A more critical examination of the type of appalachicolus suggests the fol- lowing remarks: The portion of the frontal plate attached to horn-core presents us with a sagittal suture showing that the forehead of this animal was smooth and nearly level between the horn-cores, that the width of the skull at this point was only 90 millimeters, and that there was a well defined, low, osseous prominence along the sagittal suture. These and other characters of the type bespeak a fully adult ani- mal. A fragment originally associated with the type, from the character of the matrix and its label, contains a nearly perfect cross- section of the more distal portion of the same horn-core. At its smaller end this piece of core measures transversely 48 by 40 mm. It indicates a horn-conformation approaching more nearly to Ovibos than Bison, in this respect verifying the supposed affinity of the specimen to the musk ox rather than to the bison. The charac- ters of the base of the horn-core, after careful comparison with cor- responding parts in Ovibos and Bison, indicate it to belong to the right side of the skull. This identification is also in the direction of Ovibos, as it indicates that the horn had a forward drop like the musk ox. Considered in this light, eppalachicolus presents us with a small, flat-browed type of ox, lacking the osseous frontal rugosi- ties of Ovibos, with horns resembling in their shape the extinct Ovibos cavifrons in being more rounded and slender at base than O. moschatus. It is much smaller than cavifrons and the drop of horns very much less, in this respect being intermediate between cavifrons and Bison antiquus. As originally pointed out, its relation to O. bombifrons is very remote, and its place in the bovine series forms an interesting link between Ovibos and Bison. It may stand mure properly in nomenclature as Ovibos (Boétherium ?) appalachicolus. Notes on the Woodland Bison of Boreal America, with Description and Name. For many years the existence of a race of buffalo peculiar to the wooded tracts lying between the Liard and Peace Rivers, Great 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 493 Slave Lake, and the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains in Atha- basea, has been asserted by hunters and travellers in this portion of the great northwest. Many have been the opinions of naturalists as to the relations of this so-called “ Wood Buffalo” to its congener of the plains, the Bos bison of Linnzeus and the Bos americanus of Gmelin and subsequent authors generally. Unfortunately the sub- ject has, up to the present time, never got beyond the domain of hearsay. theory and hunter’s stories, because no undoubted specimen of typical Wood Buffalo has been made a basis for the critical de- termination of its characters as compared with the buffalo of the more southern plains and prairies. In searching among the litera- ture touching upon the Wood Buffalo this radical deficiency became more and more apparent, and it was with no small satisfaction that the writer succeeded in discovering, through correspondence with his friend, Professor J. Macoun, of the Canadian Geclogical Survey, that a specimen of an adult male Wood Buffalo had recently been added to their museum at Ottawa. The characters of this specimen sufficiently confirm the more trustworthy statements of those who have had a field acquaintance with the Wood Buffalo to show its claim to recognition as a well defined race of Bison bison. Nor is this to be wondered at when we consider the decidedly different en- vironment and habits of this northern race, and from what we know of other American mammals living in similar conditions, the differ- entiation between the two had practically become a foregone conclu- sion. Before giving a detailed description of the Wood Buffalo it will be of use to the reader to know something of its literary history. Among the earliest notices we have of the existence of the American bison in the limited area now exclusively tenanted by the woodland race was Mackenzie’s narrative in his “ Travels to the Polar Sea,” Vol. Il, pages 147, 155, 156, 377, where he states that he found them abundant at the headwaters of Peace River. Sir John Rich- ardson, in 1829, made the following statement of the northern range of the bison in his “ Fauna Boreali Americana,” page 279: “ Great Slave Lake, in latitude 60°, was at one time the northern boundary of their range, but of late years, according to the testimony of the natives, they have taken possession of the flat limestone district of Slave Point on the north side of that lake, and have wandered to the vicinity of Great Marten Lake, in latitude 63° or 64°.” On page 282 of the same work he thus briefly refers to the woodland 494 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. form: “The bison which frequent the woody parts of the country form smaller herds than those which roam over the plains, but are said to be individually of greater size.” This is the first published intimation known to the writer of a distinction between the two forms. In Hind’s “ Narrative of the Canadian Exploring Expedi- tions,” published in 1860, the relations of the wood and plains buf- faloes are quite fully considered but no conclusions arrived at, as the author got nearly all his information from hearsay. He says: “Many old hunters with whom I have conversed on this subject, aver that the so-called Wood Buffalo isa distinct species, and al- though they are not able to offer scientific proofs, yet the difference in size, color, hair and horns are enumerated as the evidence upon which they base theirstatement. * * * Theskin ofthe so-called Wood Buffalo is much larger than that of the common animal, the hair is very short, mane or hair about the neck, short and soft, and altogether destitute of curl, which is the common feature in the hair or wool of the prairie animal. ‘Two skins of the so-called Wood Buffalo, which I saw at Selkirk Settlement, bore a very close resem- blance to the skin of the Lithuanian Bison, judging from the speci- mens of that species which I have since had an opportunity of see- ing in the British Museum. The Wood Buffalo is stated to be very scarce, and only found north of the Saskatchewan and on the flanks. of the Rocky Mountains. It never ventures into the open plains.” Dr. J. A. Allen, whose painstaking monograph of the American bisons,'® justly entitles him to speak authoritatively on the subject, was unable to recognize the ‘‘ Wood ” or “ Mountain ” Buffalo as an authentic variety or subspecies of B. bison, although his researches. brought the subject up to the year 1876. A short summary of his conclusions may be made as follows: a. The Wood Buffalo as-defined by Hind (1. ¢c.) and the Mountain Buffalo of the United States, referred to by hunters and travellers in the Rocky Mountains, are probably identical in their so-called differences from the plains animal in larger size and darker, shorter and softer pelage. 6. The most trustworthy accounts of the Wood and Mountain Buffaloes are so contradictory that it is almost impos- sible to believe in its existence. c. There is ample scientific proof, however, that the bisons formerly living in the high wooded por- tions of the central Rocky Mountains averaged larger than those of the plains. d. The difference in environment surrounding the ‘0Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., IV, 1876, pp. 39 to 41. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 495 mountain and woodland animal, should it be proven that such en- vironment was the chosen and constant habitat of this so-called race, would tend to develop just the differences claimed to distin- guish them. In 1885 Mr. E. T. Seton (now Ernest E. Thompson) read a paper on “The Ruminants of the Northwest” before the Canadian Insti- tute, Toronto. An extract from this paper relating to “The Wood Buffalo” was published in 1886 in the Proceedings of the Institute, pages 114 to 117. This paper adds somewhat to our previously published knowledge of the animal in question, but has the same defects which embarrassed the investigations of previous authors, absolute lack of material for comparison. Mr. Seton mentioned that both tne Indians and a Mr. E. Mignault, who spent twelve years on the Peace River in the service of the Hudson Bay Co., aver the Wood Buffalo to be a distinct species, keeping entirely aloof from their plains relatives. As proof of this he says that “the last Prairie Buffalo ever seen in the valley was killed in 1866. It was a solitary, mangy bull, a complete outcast, and this need not to have been his condition had the Wood Buffaloes, [of that same region] been his immediate kindred.” Mr. Seton seems convinced that his “Wood Buffalo” is a good “variety,” but, like all who wrote before him, dares not assign it a distinctive scientific name, ealling it ‘“‘ Bison americanus var.?” He also advances the theory (and there are many reasons for adopting it) that our plains buffalo is a degenerate, modern offshoot of the ancient woodland stock, which last named species exclusively inhabited the country before the prairies, as such, existed. Parallel instances which he cites in support of this theory are the timber and prairie wolves of the same regions and the timber and barren-ground caribou. In Chapter X, pages 141 to 159 of his book, “ Barren Ground of Northern Canada,’ Warburton Pike, Esq. describes a hunt for Wood Buffalo in February, 1890, on a tributary of Buffalo River, about 50 miles south of its outlet into the southern waters of Great Slave Lake. This is the first authentic published account, written by an eye witness, of the country exclusively inhabited by the Wood Bison, and the only specific account of a hunt for this race of buf- falo by so competent an observer. Mr. Pike is ‘‘ inclined to think that the very slight difference in appearance [of the Wood Buffalo] is easily accounted for by cli- matic influences, variety of food and the better shelter of the woods.” 496 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF . ELSaF This is all he has to say regarding the main subject of the foregoing discussion. It is quite sufficient, however, to show that he recog- nized a difference and attributed it to well known laws upon which the systematist bases his limitations of subspecies. His remarks re- garding the country and the buffaloes of the region extending from the Liard River and Great Slave Lake to the Peace River, on the east side of the Rocky Mountains, are of great interest. “Scattered over this huge extent of country,” he continues, “are still a few bands of buffalo. Sometimes they are heard of at Forts Smith and Vermilion, sometimes at Fort St. John close up to the big mount- ains on Peace River, and occasionally at Fort Nelson on the south branch of the Liard. It is impossible to say anything about their numbers as the country they inhabit is so large, and the Indians, who are few in number, usually keep to the same hunting ground.” Describing the scene of his final hunt, he says: ‘“ Prairie and timber were about in equal proportion. * * * About noon we found the track that we had been looking for, easily distinguishable from the many tracks of moose and woodland caribou that we had crossed. Little Francois made a capital approach, and after a couple of hours walk we sighted a band of eight buffalo feeding in a small wood- surrounded swamp.” In the Smithsonian Reports for 1896, pages 407 to 412, Mr. W. T. Hornaday devotes considerable attention to the “ Wood or Mountain Buffalo.” It is disappointing to find that in all his re- searches concerning the buffalo our author brings us no nearer a solution of the question, for he never saw a specimen of this sup- posed variety. In the absence of direct evidence and with an evi- dent misconception of the reputed size of the woodland form, he proposes a theory to occount for the relatively “smaller” propor- tions of that race! He concludes that “at present there is not the slightest ground for considering that the ‘ Mountain Buffalo’ or the ‘Wood Buffalo’ is entitled to rank even as a variety of Bison amer- acanus.” One of the latest and most reliable published references to the wood buffalo appeared in “ Forest and Stream,” Oct. 23, 1897, page 323. It is from the report of Inspector Jarvis, sent to the far north by the Canadian Government with instructions regarding game, etc., and reads: “ I have taken great pains in making thorough inquir- ies as possible in connection with the buffalo, their habits, number, and range. The range of a scattered band of about three hundred 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 497 is from Peace Point to Salt River, and from Salt River to within twenty miles of Fort Resolution, on Great Slave Lake.” Through the courtesy of Mr. G. B. Grinnell the writer was put in communication with Mr. H. I. Moberly, of the Hudson Bay Co., at Winnipeg, whose personal acquaintance with the woodland and plains buffaloes renders his opinion of much value regarding their so-called distinctions. Mr. Moberly writes as follows in answer to a set of questions on the points in controversy :— WILLOUGHBY, Sask, N. W. T., November 9, 1897. S. N. Rhoads, Esq. Dear Str.—I have to acknowledge receipt of -your letter dated 29th ult., and will be glad to give you as full particulars as I can regarding the Buffalo :—1st, as to size: They are much larger than the Plains Buffalo. In full-grown animals they are from 100 to 200 Ibs. heavier. 2d, relative length of limbs: They are longer limbed and longer in the body than the plains’ ones. 3d, length of horn: The horns of the Wood Buffalo are nearly or fully twice the length of the plains’ ones, and much straighter. 4th, fur: The long fur [of head, neck and shoulders] is longer and more of a silky fur than the plains’ ones, and the under fur thicker and finer pelt, caused, no doubt, by the high latitude they live in. 5th, habitat and habits: They lived formerly from the beginning of the woody country north of the Saskatchewan to Great Slave Lake, and further north along the east slope of the Rocky Mountains. At present there are not more than two hundred and fifty to three hundred alive, and they are in two bands, one on the lower Peace River, north of it, and run from close to Great Slave Lake at Peace Point, which is some ninety miles below Fort Vermilion. The other is on the upper Hay River and ranges between Peace River and the Liard River, and run down some two hundred and fifty miles east of the Rocky Mountains and up to the foot of the Rocky Mountains. I certainly think they are a different animal from the Plains Buffalo. One reason is that formerly, when they were both numerous and met time and again on the edge of the timber line, I have never known any [of one kind] to go with another band [of the other kind]. The Wood Buffaloes live principally on the small branches of birch and willows, although at times they also eat grass. I think there is as much difference between them [wood and plains animals] as there is between the Wood Caribou and the small Barren Ground ones, which [species] meet every winter but never join together. I am 498 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. not aware of any specimen of the Wood Buffalo that has been stuffed, but I know that formerly some heads were sent out to Sir George Simpson, who was the Governor of the Hudson’s Bay Co. Hoping this may be of service to vou, I remain, Yours truly, H. I. Moser ty. As previously remarked, Prof. John Macoun has kindly furnished the writer with full data concerning the mounted specimen of Wood Buffalo in the Ottawa Museum, and it is upon this specimen that the following description is based. It was carefully mounted by Ward, of Rochester, New York, in a tightly closed iron and glass ease. In consequence, Prof. Macoun was unable to get access to it for more exact measurements. Bison bison athabasce subsp. nov. Woodland Bison. Type :—ad. 3, in the Geological Museum, Ottawa, Canada. Pre- sented through Warburton Pike, Esq., by the Hudson Bay Com- pany. Secured presumably (fide Prof. J. Macoun) in March, 1892, by Indians within fifty miles southwest of Fort Resolution, Great Slave Lake. Specimen consists of well-mounted skin, with accom- panying skull and horn-cores separate, all in one glass and iron case. Syn. Bos or Bison americanus (= Bison bison) of authors, in part. “Bison americanus, var.?” Seton [Thompson], Proc. Canad. Inst., ITI, 1886, p. 114. General Characters.—Size larger, colors darker, horns slenderer, much longer and more incurved and hair more dense and silky than in B. bison. Description of type specimen from data furnished by Professors J. Macoun and H. A. Ward: Pelage everywhere dense and silky ; short and fine over much of hinder half of body, becoming very dense and curly and long anteriorly, especially on shoulders and neck and also quite long on the frontal aspect. Color along crest of hump and vertebral line to rump “light brown,” shading in all di- rections to darker brown and becoming almost black on the whole head, legs and belly. “ Looking at head and legs you would say at once they were black.” Ears, muzzle, hoofs and horns and distal half of tail black. Horns (on mounted skin) very long and strongly recurved. “Curved inward so as to come towards the eye within two inches of 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 499 the line of the base;” nearly semicircular in exterior outline, but more abruptly incurved along terminal third. Horn-cores of de- tached skull strongly curved, directed at base “ slightly downward” below frontal plane, “then outward and upward, the tips slightly incurved, the general] direction of core being slightly backward; a line drawn from middle of orbit to tip of core intersecting base of core higher than in Bison bison.” Horn-cores nearly circular in section at base, becoming slightly flattened above, medially, “ with an obscure ridge below.” Measurements.—(Sent by collector with skin to Prof. Frank A. Ward). “ Height at shoulders, 1,703 millimeters ; height [to rump] just in front of hind legs, 1,602 mm.; total length [of head and body, without tail ?] 2,846 mm.” Skull: (measurements sent by Mr. J. F. Whiteaves, zoologist of Canadian Geological Survey).—Frontal width, between bases of horn-cores, 343 mm.; length of horn-core measured along superior curve, 293 mm.; greatest depression of superior are of horn-core below a line connecting the tip and superior base of core, 102 mm.; horns (on mounted specimen) measured along the inferior curve, 533 mm.; shortest distance from tip of horn to its superior base, 229 mm. Habitat.— W ooded uplands of the Northwest Territories, formerly from the east slope of the Rocky Mountains to the 95th meridian, and from latitude 63° to latitude 55°; probably ranging south along the Rocky Mountains to the United States. Remarks.—The great size, darkness of color, and character of horn and horn-core in the type of Bison bison athabasce, granting that it is typical of the form known as the Wood Bison, are quite sufficient to distinguish it from the plains animal and fully justify the opin- ions uf many hunters and travellers as to its separability from the latter. The characters of the skull alone are sufficient to warrant the distinction. In the type the frontal breadth between the bases of horn-cores is equal to that of the old male specimen of fossil bison (Pl. XII, fig. 2) from California, which Leidy figured as “ B. latifrons” in the Geological Survey of the Territories; and in this _respect is more than 50 mm. wider than the largest old male skull of B. bison in the museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences of 11 Prof. Macoun sends the following measurements from the mounted speci- men :—‘‘ Height at shoulder, 1,779 mm.; length without the tail, 2,821 mm. ; length of horn 458 mm. ; circumference of horn at base 318 mm.” 500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Philadelphia. In athabasce the relative length of the horns and horn- cores to the size of the skull is about the same or even greater than in antiquus, but on the other hand they are much more slender and recurved than in B. bison. In their abrupt curvature they resem- ble B. scaphoceras, but in their relative slenderness they are farth- est from that species of any of our American species except the straight and long-horned Jlatifrons. Judged solely by horn charac- ters their place in the chronological series would appear to be the latest of all our known species, with the minimum of calibre and the maximum of curvature ; but the weight of evidence favors their position between B. bison and the most recent fossil species. Below is given a list of the living and extinct species of American bisons now recognized as valid, with their original references and most important synonyms. . The type localities, probable geographic distribution and probable sequence in time are also given. Of the fossil species the following were probably contemporaneous or closely sequent: B. alleni, B. ferox” and B. scaphoceras in middle and later Pliocene time; B. alaskensis, B. latifrons and B. antiquus in earlier and middle Pleistocene time; and “B. latifrons” (so-called, of Leidy, from California) forming a connecting link in later Pleisto- cene time with B. bison through B. bison athabasce. 1. Bison alleni Marsh. Amer. Jour. Sci., 1877, p. 252 (= B. crampianus Cope, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1895, p. 456). Lower Pliocene of Kansas. Great Plains of Middle North A mer- ica. 2. Bison ferox Marsh. Amer. Jour. Sci., 1877, p. 252. Lower Pliocene of Kansas. Great Plains of Middle North Amer- ica. 8. Bison scaphoceras (Cope). Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1895, p. 457. Upper Pliocene of northern Nicaragua. Mountain regions of southern Mexico and Central America. 4. Bison latifrons (Harlan). Fauna Amer., 1825, p. 273. Pleistocene of eastern Kentucky. United States east of the Rocky Mountains. 5. Bison alaskensis Rhoads. Spec. nova (I. ¢.) (= B. crassicornis Richardson, _ Zool. Voy. Herald, 1854 (in part), pp. 42 & 43, Pl. XITI, figs. 1 & 2). Pleistocene of northern Alaska. Arctic America, east of the Mackenzie River and north of the Arctic Circle. 12 The status of ferox, especially in regard to its relations to latifrons, is hard. to determine. It is, however, close to latifrons, of which it probably was the- nearest ancestor, 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 501 6. Bison antiquus Leidy. Proc.-Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1852, p. 117, (= B. eraasi- cornis Richardson, Zool. Voy. Herald, 1854 [restricted type], pp. 40 & 41, Pl. IX). Pleistocene of eastern Kentucky. North America, from north- western Alaska to southeastern Georgia and Texas. 7. Bison —— sp. 2143 (—“B. latifrons’’ Leidy, Rep. U.S. Geol. Surv. Terr., I, p. 253, Pl. XXVIUI, figs. 4 & 5). Pleistocene of western California. Pacific slope, from Oregon southward. 8. Bison bison athabasce subspec. nova (I. ¢.), (= B. bison’Auct. in part.=“ Wood or Mountain Buffalo ’’). Recent of northern Athabasca, N. W.T. Wooded uplands of the Northwest Territories, from the east slope of the Rocky Mountains to the 95th meridian, and from lat. 63° to lat. 55°; probably reach- ing southward along the Rocky Mountains to the United States. 9. Bison bison (Linnzus). Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 72; (= B. americanus Gmelin, Syst. Nat. Linn. I, 1788, p. 204). Recent of Interior North America. Lowlands east of the Rocky Mountains and west of the Allegheny Mountains, the Great Lakes and Lake Winnipeg; and from the Saskatchewan River south to the Gulf of Mexico, near lat. 25°. EXPLANATION OF. PLATE XII. Fig. 1. Bison bison (L.). Old male; Col. of Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., No. 4,589; from the plains of the western United States. Fig. 2. Bison californicus sp. nov. type. Old male; Col. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila. No. 297; from Pilarcitos Valley, near San Francisco, California. Labelled “ Bison antiquus Leidy.” The original of Leidy’s figures of ‘ Bison latifrons” (sic), U. S. Geol. Surv. Terr., Vol. I, 1873, p. 253, Pl. XVIII, figs. 4&5. Fig. 3. Bison alaskensis sp. nov. type. Old male; Col. of Mus. Sci. and Art, Univ. of Penna., No. 13,754; from Tundra, near Point Barrow, Alaska. 18 During the foregoing investigations the writer was in frequent cor- respondence with Mr. F. A. Lucas, of the Smithsonian Institution, who is preparing an illustrated monograph of American fossil bisons, and has kindly given valued suggestions on controverted points. Having called his attention to the radical differences between the type of Leidy’s B. antiquus and his California specimen of so-called ‘‘/latifrons,’ Mr. Lucas now concurs in the opinion that they are distinct species, and that the California species should be given aname. It is therefore proposed that the name Bison californicus be applied to it, the type of the species being No. 297, Col. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila. For characters, etc., see Leidy references; also Pl. XII, fig. 2. 33 502 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Fig. 4. Bison latifrons (Harlan), type. Col. of Acad. Nat. Sci, Phila. From Big Bone Lick, Kentucky. Fig. 5. Bison crampianus (Cope), type. Col. of Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., No. 3; from Wellington, Kansas. Fig. 6. Bison alaskensis sp. nov., type. Rear view of specimen, No. 13,754 figured under No. 3, of same plate. Nore.—Figures 1 to 5 inclusive were photographed on same plate and as nearly at same facial angle as possible, to show their comparative size and the curvature of horn-cores. Figure 6 was photographed separately and on a larger scale, as will be noted on comparison with figure 3 of the same specimen. as 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 503 DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW FORMS OF PERIDERIS. BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. Perideris Kobeltin. sp. Shell ovate, ventricose, whitish under an olivaceous yellow cuti- cle, brownish in places. Surface obliquely plicatulate in the direc- tion of growth lines, and above the periphery decussated by numer- ous rather inconspicuous spiral impressed lines. Spire abruptly contracted above, mucronate. Whorls about 63, the earlier 23 forming a mamillar projection, the rest rapidly widening, last whorl swollen. Suture white from loss of cuticle, and minutely beaded. Aperture oblique, reddish inside; lip obtuse, brown; columella whitish, vertical rather straight, subtruncate below. Alt. 65, diam. 40, alt. of aperture 35 mm. Cape Palmas, West Africa. Type in coll. A. N.S. P. This species is evidently identical with Kobelt’s P. sauleydi (Conehyl. Cab., p. 42, pl. 13, f.1, 2). It is far from being the species so called by Joannis. It is likely that Kobelt had not seen Joannis’ original description and figure, from the fact that his reference to that author is altogether incorrect ; and thus the misidentification arose. Perideris Saulecydi var. normalis n. var. Shell resembling Achatina Saulcydi Joannis (Magazin de Zoolo- ‘gie, 1834, Classe V, pl. 50) in the general coloration, being white streaked with livid purple, with some bluish suffusion, the pen- ultimate whorl whitish with reddish flames. Whorls about 73, the earlier 38 forming a mamillar mucro, higher and more distinctly differentiated than in Saulcydi, those following forming a more taper- ing cone than in Sauleydi, the last not perceptibly constricted below the suture. Suture maryined below by a narrow crenate or beaded band. Sculpture: unequally, obliquely plicatulate, sometimes with subobsolete spirals on penultimate whorl, the last whorl with faint, obliquely descending, scar-like impressions at right angles to the growth-lines, Aperture oblique, dark purplish-brown inside ; parie- tal wall orange-brown from the retention of the cuticle by the parie- 504 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. tal glaze. Columella somewhat concave, passing gradually into the thin basal lip. . . Alt. 76, diam. 40, alt. of aperture, 36 mm. Alt. 74, diam. 40, alt. of aperture, 35 mm. “Taboo, Africa” (Robert Swift coll.in A. N.S. Phila.). This form differs from P. Sauleydi (Joannis) in being more elon- gated and slender throughout, the last whorl not concave above, aperture consequently not acuminate posteriorly as in that species ; the spire more elongated and tapering, and the terminal “ mamelon” more pronounced. It is also dextral; but as the apparent sinistrality of Joannis’ species may possibly (though not probably) be due to an artist’s failure to reverse, I do not place great stress upon this feature. Illustrations of this and the preceding form will appear in the Manual of Conchology in due time. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 505 PROCEEDINGS OF A MEETING HELD IN COMMEMORATION OF HARRISON ALLEN, M.D., AND GEORGE HENRY HORN, M.D. In compliance with a resolution adopted by the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia a meeting was held December 31, 1897, in conjunction with kindred societies, to commemorate the services rendered to science by Dr. Harrison Allen and Dr. George H. Horn. The Chair having been taken by Dr. Henry Skinner, Chairman of the Committee of Arrangements, the following papers were read :— BIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES OF HARRISON ALLEN AND GEORGE HENRY HORN. BY EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D. The period of the Academy’s history with which Doctors Allen and Horn are first identified, the years of the early ’60’s, was bright with both accomplishment and promise. Made notable by the work of the illustrious veterans who were still active and by that which might be hoped for from those who were just beginning their careers, it was probably the most brilliant epoch in the history of the so- ciety. But few of the great collections which have since come into prominence were in existence. The Smithsonian Institution was then rather a distributing agency than a store-house of scientific material, and museums everywhere were benefited by itsactivity. The United _ “States Government had not become, through the Agricultural De- partment, the National Museum, and the Geological Surveys, a formidable rival in the publication of scientific papers, and the work of Gill, Meek, Hayden, Coues, Stimpson, Kennicott, Yarrow and others was made known to the scientific world most promptly and accurately through the Proceedings of this Academy. In the old building at the corner of Broad and Sansom Streets, Leidy, easily first among equals, pursued his paleontological studies in a little, dark and dusty room on the first floor of the museum, his brilliant microscopical investigations being carried on more comfortably at home. The results were reported in either case to the meetings of the Academy, and could generally be depended on to render them interesting, even though nothing else were forth- coming. 506 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Cassin had the western room of the library filled with trays of mounted birds and scores of ornithological volumes which no one about the place dared to touch, for Cassin was very much of an autocrat and was impatient of rules. Books and specimens, how- ever, were made good use .of, especially on Sundays, for the exigencies of bread-winning left him but little time during the week for his favorite study. S. B. Buckley occupied the herbarium, a long, narrow, dark room in the southeast corner of the second museum floor. He had pre- sented and published some interesting observations on ant-life, and was then working up his collection of Texan plants, the publication of his results calling forth savage criticism from Asa Gray, which created quite a stir at the time and gave poor Elias Durand, the Director of the Herbarium, more than one bad quarter of an hour. The President, Isaac Lea, was reading by title his contributions to the genus Unio and other conchological papers, synopses of which were published in the Proceedings, to be afterward expanded into parts of the Journal, sumptuously illustrated at the expense of the author by some of the finest lithographs ever made in America. The place left vacant in 1850 by Samuel George Morton had been filled by James Aitken Meigs, who, after serving a brief term as Librarian, was devoting all the time he could spare from a rapidly growing practice to the study of anthropology. Thirty years later the Academy came into possession of the library he was then col- lecting and a portion of the fortune resulting from his successful professional work. The sound of the fierce battle between Lea and Conrad had died away to a distant reverberation, and the latter, as efficiently as his dyspepsia would allow, was describing fossil mollusca and making autograph drawings on stone of his new species. His activity was greatly stimulated by the facilities for publication supplied by the newly started American Journal of Conchology, and by the interest in his work displayed by the editor, George W. Tryon, Jr. Thomas B. Wilson had just presented the superb collections of birds which for many years were, and perhaps still are, the crown- ing glory of the Academy. They had been deposited from time to time since 1845, and Wilson had even made an addition to the Academy’s building for their arrangement, but they only became the absolute property of the society in March, 1860. We find the Curators at this time complaining that in spite of Wilson’s addition the building was rapidly becoming too small for the 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 507 collections, a disadvantage which, in November, 1865, resulted in the appointment of a committee “ to devise,” in the language of the reso- lution, “ methods for advancing the prosperity and efficiency of the Academy by the erection of a building of a size suitable to contain the collections.” In the intervals of cruises, Dr. Ruschenberger was introducing improvements in the administration of affairs, and to his energy and devotion is due the ultimate success of the Committee on Building then appointed. Some administrative reforms were indeed required, for although the Academy had been brought to the distinguished position it then held by the voluntary labors of those interested in the advancement of knowledge, the absence of responsibility was productive of serious disadvantages. ' Up to this time no one connected with the institution, except the janitor, had received continuous compensation for service rendered, although appropriations were made from time to time for special work as oe- casion required. The services of an Assistant Librarian were se- cured in January, 1862, at the munificent compensation of two dol- lars a week, and an assistant to the Curators was appointed some time after. Dr. Leidy, then, as during the rest of his life, Chairman of the Curators, had been heard to declare that if the Academy were in possession of everything it had ever owned, a building twice the size of the one then occupied would be required to house the collec- tions. The losses were due partly to the destructive action of time, partly to bad museum methods, and partly, it is to be feared, to a liberal interpretation of the law of mewn and tuum. The enthusi- astic young naturalists of the period were allowed to rearrange and disarrange the collections as they pleased, each according to his own ideas of classification. Infested birds were carried to the cellar by the hundred and baked in a hot oven until they became as brittle as punk. The insects, especially, were entirely neglected because of the activity of the recently founded American Entomological So- ciety and the serious disagreement then existing between Thomas B. Wilson and John L. LeConte. A valuable collection of insects was being rapidly reduced to dust, and an enthusiastic young ento- mologist of the time proposed transferring the few remaining good butterflies bodily to his own collection, so that they might be pre- served from destruction. It was not the Curators or the members of the Entomological Committee, but the Assistant Librarian who prevented the carrying out of his virtuous intention. As for the 508 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. library: a distinguished ornithologist has recently been heard to lament that in Cassin’s time he could take away any book he wanted. The by-law governing the case then, as now, forbade the removal of books from the building, and, although this gentleman doubtless returned all he borrowed, the same, it is to be feared, could not be said of others who violated the law. Although then without a cent of endowment, this department of the Academy was kept well up with the times by exchange of publications and the munificence of Dr. Thomas B. Wilson, The meetings were interesting and well attended, and the annual volume of the Proceedings, thanks to the absence of competition, had attained dimensions not since reached. The most hopeful feature, however, of that epoch, was the galaxy of young men who were then appearing on the scene, some of whom turned out to be brilliantly successful, while others were far from reaching the goal of their ambition. Cope had been elected a member in July, 1861, although prior to that he had been an active worker in the Academy. The Curators had reported in 1859: “The care of the herpetological cabinet, which for some time had lost the valuable services of Dr. Hallowell in consequence of illness, has now been undertaken by E. D. Cope, a young man who gives promise of much future usefulness both to the Academy and to Natural History.” He contributed three papers to the Proceedings that year, and seven in 1860. All his time was at this period devoted to herpetology, his work being done in a small room on the first gallery floor. It was filled to overflow- ing with books, bottles, the remains of luncheons, old clothes and other impedimenta. His personal peculiarities were quite as pro- nounced then as a later period of his career, and he already gave promise of becoming what he was afterward justly said to be: the greatest naturalist born on American soil. Directly beneath Cope’s quarters, in the northeast corner of the museum floor, was the mammalogical room where John Hamilton Slack, a man of great versatility, laid ambitious plans for a mono- graph of the quadrumana. As first proposed, it was to take the form of a dignified quarto or even folio, to be richly illustrated at the expense of the author, but it eventually appeared as a modest paper of sixteen pages in the Proceedings for 1862. His ability as a musician and amateur conjuror interfered with his scientific work. Versatility has its disadvantages. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 509 Tryon’s first paper had been contributed in 1861. He was an indefatigable worker, and gave up his interest in a lucrative busi- ness to devote himself to science. He was most generous in his appreciation and encouragement of others. Hestarted the American Journal of Conchology in 1865, and, in 1879, the Manual of Conch- ology, which is still issued by the Section founded by him. His business training and strict attention to details of management en- abled him, strange to say, to make both of these unpromising enter- prises, yield him a revenue, all of which, with much more, was, on his death, left to his favorite department of the Academy. In quite a special sense, therefore, his work continues. Gabb had been appointed a Jessup Fund student, and was en- gaged in those studies which enabled him to render good service on the Geological Survey of California, and to act as Director of the Survey of San Domingo. The income of the Jessup Fund had be- come available for the assistance of young naturalists in 1860, the first recipient of benefits being Charles Conrad Abbott, then en- gaged in the study of ichthyology, but since celebrated for his grace- ful contributions to the literature of popular natural history. Dur- ing the first years of the existence of the Fund, nearly all the young workers in the Academy, including the subjects of this notice, and several of more mature years, were assisted from the income thereof. The Jessup Fund was then, and continues to be, productive of most desirable results. Prominent in this group of aspiring young naturalists were Har- rison Allen and George Henry Horn. It is especially fitting, and, indeed, almost unavoidable, that the services rendered by them to science should be commemorated jointly, as their lives were laid in parallel lines to a singular degree. Horn was born in 1840, Allen one year later; they were pupils of the Central High School at the same time, classmates and members of the same graduating class in the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania; their work in the Academy began about the same time, they were both Jessup Fund students, they served contemporaneously in the medi- cal corps of the army during the closing years of the war; they were to a limited degree, collaborators in their scientific work ; they each held the office of Corresponding Secretary in the Academy, they were members of the Academy’s Standing Committees at the same time; they sat together at the Council Board until their work was done, and they died within ten days of each other—the elder after a 510 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. trying period of incapacity, the other in the full enjoyment, to the last, of those scientific pursuits which had rendered his entire life tranquil and happy. Harrison ALLEN was born in Philadelphia, April 17, 1841. He was admitted to the Central High School in February, 1855, from the Hancock Boys’ Grammar School. He then resided at No. 352 N. 6th St. In consequence of straitened means, he was compelled to leave the High School in March of the following year for a position in a hardware store, where, however, the conditions. were so uncongenial that he remained but a short time. A subse- quent experiment proved that life on a farm was quite as foreign to his inclinations as the commercial engagement. Impelled by his innate love of science, and taking advantage of the only avenue at first open to him in the desired direction, he then entered the dental office of Dr. J. Foster Flagg and there pursued his studies with such earnestness and fidelity as to secure for him- self the warm and enduring regard of his preceptor. His dental studies were, however, merely the introduction to his life work. He did not matriculate at the Dental College, and that he had no inten- tion of doing so is evident from a letter which the youth wrote to his mother in 1860, during his course in medicine. An extract is of special interest because of the definite aims and ambitions defined by him for his guidance on the threshold of his active life :—‘* You are sufficiently aware of my history,” he writes, “to know that it. was not my own choice in taking up dentistry, and that all along I employed my spare time in reading medical books. From this a conclusion could easily be drawn that I intended studying medicine. The truth is that I was marked for medicine; that was my earthly goal, and I intended to reach it through thick and thin. That was the resolution mentally formed and recorded, and I am now fulfilling it. . It is my ambition to be known as a good physician and a good man, and I know that many men having greater natural abilities and higher ambitions than I, have achieved much more than I ever will, and yet commenced at a much lower round of the ladder. I am hopeful, and intend to be industrious —I can say and do no more.” In 1861 he presented a thesis under the title “ Entozoa hominis,” and received the degree of Doctor of Medicine from the University of Pennsylvania. In July of the same year he published descrip- tions of four African bats, his first contribution to science. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 511 Short as had been his time in the High School, there is little doubt that his love of natural history resulted from the influence ex- erted by Dr. Henry MeMurtrie, who then filled the chair devoted to that subject. At least one collecting expedition in company with Horn and two or three other school-mates was referred to many years later by Dr. Allen as the occasion of lasting delight, and the fact that he named the Mexican bat which formed the subject of his second paper Centurio McMurtrii, after his old teacher, proves that he held him in deservedly kind remembrance. The immediate cause, however, of the first publication was probably the interest taken in the collections of Paul B. DuChaillu, which had just been secured by subscription for the Academy. Dr. Allen was elected a member of the Academy in 1862, his pro- posers being Messrs. Cassin, Cope and Cleborne. He had, however, very little time for natural history. After serving a year as resi- dent physician in the Philadelphia Hospital, he was commissioned as Acting Assistant Surgeon in the United States Army, January 31, 1862, and for the next four years was actively engaged profes- sionally in the field or in military hospitals. His first assignment was to the Broad Street General Hospital, Philadelphia, from which he was transferred, May 17th, to Cliffburne General Hospital, Washington, D.C. He was given the rank of Assistant Surgeon, July 30th of the same year, and until the February following was in the field with the artillery of the 3d Corps in the Army of the Potomac. He then served in the Douglas, the Lincoln and the Carver Hospitals of Washington, the Fairfax Seminary Hospital of Alex- andria, Virginia, and, from December, 1864, until September, 1865, he was in responsible charge, at the age of twenty-four years, of the Mt. Pleasant General Hospital in Washington. From September 12th to October 12th, 1865, he enjoyed a well-deserved leave of absence. On his return to duty he was again assigned to the Douglas General Hospital, where he remained until December Ist. A week later he resigned from the army with the rank of Brevet-Major. During his period of duty in Washington he spent much of his leisure time in the Smithsonian Institution where he was brought under the influence of Professors Joseph Henry and Spencer F. Baird, men to whom so many of the naturalists of that period were indebted for inspiration and encouragement. Of these months his friend and associate Dr. Theodore Gill writes : “ While he was in charge of the Fairfax Seminary Hospital I visited 512 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. him several times and stayed some days each visit. He used to bring or send an ambulance for me, and I remember the pleasure IT had in the country, going there. I was much struck with the ad- ministrative ability he displayed. Remember that he was a very young man for such a place as he held, having a considerable staft of assistants, all of whom, I think, were older than himself. He was a rigid disciplinarian, and I heard he was complained of for keep- ing aloof from his staff, but I am inclined to think he was wise in doing so. He did not join with the hospital surgeons’ mess, but had his meals served in a pleasant room, taking them alone or with members of his staff or others whom he specially invited for each occasion. His companionship was certainly very congenial to me, and I presume, from the frequency and urgency of his invitations, mine was to him. Our discussions were by no means confined to medicine or even zoology. They embraced a wide range of subjects, and I was often surprised to learn how multifarious were his sym- pathies and how wide bis range of reading.” On his return to Philadelphia he made an earnest but dignified canvass for the Professorship of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy in the Auxiliary Faculty of Medicine of the University, just then endowed by Dr. George B. Wood. He was endorsed by strong letters from American and foreign naturalists who recognized the merit of his published works. He had no social backing; the influ- ence he brought to bear on the Trustees of the University was legitimately based on his standing as a zoologist, and was in marked contrast to the campaign of at least one of his competitors. Dr. Allen was the successful candidate. He held the position to which he was then elected until 1879. His lectures on medical zoology were so well received that, at the request of the class, he pre- pared his Outlines of Comparative Anatomy and Medical Zoology, the publication of which was, however, owing to professional en- gagements, delayed until 1869. The volume is by no means the least important of the author’s works, and it is of special interest in the present connection inasmuch as the chapters on Hemiptera and and Cantharis were contributed by Dr. Horn. In the latter part of 1876, Dr. Francis Gurney Smith, the Profes- sor of the Institutes of Medicine in the University, was unable to con- tinue his course of lectures which was completed by Dr. Henry C. Chapman. The course of 1877-78 was delivered by Dr. James Tyson. On his resignation at the end of that term Dr. Allen was 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 513 appointed to fill the vacancy. He held the professorship until 1885, when he resigned because of increased professional work. He was emeritus professor of the Institutes until 1891, when, on the death of Dr. Leidy, he resumed his old position in the Auxiliary Faculty which he held until last year. He also served for one year as Director of the Wistar Museum. On establishing himself in Philadelphia at the close of the war, he at first engaged in the practice of general surgery. His love of minute detail caused him to concentrate his attention on the affec- tions of the upper air passages, his inclination to do so being, per- haps, obscurely the result of his early dental studies. So successful was he in his specialty that he soon became a recognized authority in laryngology and rhynology, the latter science having, it may al- most be said, originated in his diagnosis of disturbances of the nasal mucous membranes and his careful descriptions of departures from the normal anatomy of the facial region. His professional and zoological work were equally distinguished by untiring care in the elaboration of minute details, a characteris- tic as evident in his first descriptions of bats as in his most recent craniological studies. Had Dr. Allen been an artist instead of a physician he would have been a Meissonier rather than a Makart. The scope of Dr. Allen’s interest in professional and scientific work is clearly indicated by the positions he held in the Academy and elsewhere, a brief statement of which is all that can be here given :— He was assistant to Wills’ Eye Hospital from 1868 to 1870; Sur- geon to St. Joseph’s Hospital from 1870 to 1878 and visiting sur- geon to the Philadelphia Hospital from 1874 to 1878. He held the position of Professor of Anatomy in the Philadelphia Dental College from 1866 to 1878. He was Vice-President of the Pathological Society of Philadelphia in 1877; President of the American Laryngological Association in 1886, of the American Association of Anatomists from 1891 to 1893, and of the Anthro- pometric Society at the time of his death. He served as judge in the Section of Anthropology at the Columbian Exposition in 1898, and was a member of the American Philosophical Society, the Bos- ton Society of Natural History, the Biological Society of Washing- ton, the Philadelphia County Medical Society, the Neurological So- ciety of Philadelphia, the Historical Society of Texas, and Corre- sponding Member of the Society of Natural Sciences of Chili. He served as President of the Contemporary Club in 1894-1895. 514 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. It was in connection with the Academy, however, that nearly all of his extra professional work was accomplished. He was but little in- terested in administrative affairs, and was reluctant to accept official positions the duties of which might interfere with his favorite stud- ies. He served as Corresponding Secretary in 1867, and was a member of the Council at intervals from 1876 until his death. He also served on the Library Committee. He was instrumental in founding the Anthropological Section and was its Director until his death. He contributed his last scientific communication to one of its meetings. The character and extent of the work accom- plished in the Academy and elsewhere will be considered by com- petent judges of its value. Dr. Allen was married to Miss Julia Colton, Dee. 29,1869. His widow, a son and a daughter survive him. He found rest and re- laxation from his professional and scientific work in literature, mu- sic, and the sympathy and affection of a devoted domestic circle. His summers were spent at his home in Sciasconset on Nantucket Island, whence he would return in the fall invigorated by the out- door life of a lover of nature. In his intercourse with his professional brethern and his scientific associates, Dr. Allen was always helpful and appreciative. A certain reserve and dignity of bearing gave assurance of intellectual force which was fully realized on a close acquaintance with the man and his work. He was precise and careful in his statements, charitable in his judgment, and generous in his dealings with the poor, the weak and the sick. His religious convictions were earnest and definite. He was brought up as a Hicksite Friend, but later in life he accepted the doctrines of Trinitarian Christianity, and, in the spring of the present year, he was baptized according to the rites of the Protestant Episcopal Church. In the summer of 1895 he had an attack of indisposition which he seems to have regarded as a premonition of the affection which, two years later, proved fatal. Last April he underwent an opera- tion for appendicitis from which he survived only through the prompt action of his physicians in the administration of stimulants and the employment of artificial respiration. His summer at Scias- conset, seemed, as usual, to have strengthened his vitality. He re- sumed his professional work on his return to Philadelphia, and made frequent and sometimes prolonged visits to the Academy where he completed some anthropological investigations, the results of which 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 515 will be published by the Wagner Free Institute of Science and the United States Government. He presided at the meeting held November 12th in commemora- tion of his life-long friend the late Edward D. Cope, in the rooms of the American Philosophical Society. Some of those who were pres- ent on that occasion were painfully aware that Dr. Allen was far from well. Two days later, on the afternoon of Sunday, November 14th, he was seized with an attack of angina pectoris which resulted in death. In 1860 he had written to his mother: “it is my ambition to be known as a good physician and a good man.” Those who knew Dr. Allen best as a physician and a man, know with what completeness of fulfilment he had lived his life. GeEOoRGE Henry Horn was born in Philadelphia, April 8, 1840. His preliminary education was received in the Jefferson Boys’ ‘Grammar School, from which he entered the Central High School, July, 1853. He took the full course and graduated with the degree of Bachelor of Arts, February 11, 1858. The degree of Master of Arts was conferred on him by his Alma Mater, July, 1863. At the time of his graduation he lived at the southwest cor- ner of 4th and Poplar Streets, where his father was the proprietor of a drug store. Almost immediately after leaving the High School he matricula- ted in the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania. He took his degree in medicine in 1861, his thesis being entitled “< Sprains.” While yet a student of medicine he contributed his first papers to the Proceedings of the Academy. He did not immediately devote himself to the specialty in which he later became so distinguished, his first three contributions to science being descriptions of new species of recent and fossil corals and comments on Milne-Ed- wards’ classification of those organisms. There is every reason to believe that his incentive to the study of natural history was received, as in Dr. Allen’s case, from the profes- sors of the High School. In addition to MeMurtie’s lectures, Dr. B. Howard Rand, at that time Recording Secretary of the Acad- emy, was liberal in the distribution of tickets of admission to the Museum, and many of his pupils found profitable occupation for their Friday afternoons in visiting the collections. 516 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Horn was early thrown into association with Dr. John L. Le- Conte, whose prominence as a coleopterologist was undisputed. The mutual regard then established led to community of study and was. only interrupted by death. Dr. Horn’s fourth paper, also published in 1860, was on new spe- cies of North American coleoptera in the cabinet of the American Entomological Society. His later contributions to science, the ex- tent and value of which will be treated of by one eminently qualified to do so, were, with one or two exceptions, devoted to this specialty, as an authority on which Dr. Horn certainly had on rival in America at the time of his death. Having passed the required examination, Dr. Horn received a commission as Assistant Surgeon in the United States Army, March 1, 1868. He was attached to the 2d California Cavalry, Depart- ment of the Pacific, until July 14th of the following year, when he was commissioned as surgeon of the 1st California Infantry Volun- teers, remaining in that position until the term of service of the regi- ment expired, Dec. 3, 1864. He was again mustered into service May 22, 1865, as assistant surgeon of his old regiment, the 2d Cali- fornia Cavalry, and commissioned as surgeon of the 2d California Infantry, September 23, 1865. His service terminated with that of the staff of his regiment, April 16, 1866. During his military service in the west he improved the oppor- tunity to make extensive additions to his collection of coleoptera, and was intimately associated with the California Academy of Sci- ences, On his return to Philadelphia he devoted himself to the general practice of medicine, his field being in the northwestern section of the city, with which he had been identified nearly all his life, and where he was held in the highest esteem by those to whom he min- istered as a physician. He was especially skilful as an obstetrician, and hundreds of families felt that they had suffered irreparable loss when he retired from the duties of active practice a few years before: his death. Dr. Horn’s devotion to science was singularly undivided. Al- though every obligation of his profession was regarded by him as binding, he practised medicine merely as a means to anend. He found at once his relaxation and intellectual profit when, after an exhausting day of attendance on the sick, he was at leisure to pore over his cherished insect-cases until far into the night. Not having 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 517 married, he was not distracted by domestic ties from his favorite occupation, and for social engagements he cared but little. Art and literature were to him outside issues, very well in their way, but to be left to the cultivation of others. As a contributor to know- ledge, his function was well-defined, and recognition of his success as an entomologist was valued by him the more because of the sin- gleness of his interest. It is gratifying to know that such recognition was conveyed to him in abundant measure by those who knew of the enduringly accurate character of his work. He was one of the twelve honorary members of the Entomological Society of Belgium, one of the sixteen honor- ary members of the Entomological Union of Stettin, and one of the eleven honorary members of the Entomological Society of France. He was an active member of the Russian Entomological Society, Correspondent of the Boston Society of Natural History, the Bio- logical Society of Washington, the Kansas Academy of Sciences, and the Zoologico-Botanical Society of Vienna. He was also a member of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia, the Entomolo- gical Societies of New York, Washington and Newark, and honor- ary member of the Feldman Collecting Social. He was Librarian and one of the Secretaries of the American Philosophical Society at the time of his death. On the death of his valued friend, Dr. John L. LeConte, he was elected President of the American Entomological Society, a position which he held continuously until his death, combining with it the Directorship of the Entomological Section of the Academy. He received the title of Professor of Entomology from the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania. The position, it is believed, was entirely honorary, no active duties being attached to it. As might be supposed from the strictly defined limits of his field of scientific investigation, his work was more in connection with the American Entomological Society than with the Academy, although his interest in the latter was unflagging. He was elected a member July 31, 1866, on his return from the west. He served as Corre- sponding Secretary from 1876 to 1890. He was a member of the Council from February 25, 1875 to December 26, 1876. He was again elected in December, 1891, and held the position at the time of his death. He also served on the Finance Committee for 1893, and on the Publication Committee from 1875 to 1890, and from 1893 to the end. The duties of these several positions were per- formed by him with fidelity and discretion. o4 518 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. His relinquishment of active professional work was probably due to a consciousness of failing vigor, but the gravity of his condition was not manifest until December 26, 1896, when he was stricken with unconsciousness while engaged in playing a game of cards with some friends at the Columbia Club. Although he partially rallied from the attack and was able to attend the Nansen meeting in the © rooms of the American Philosophical Society, his work was done and the interval was one of patient waiting for the end. Among his few relaxations during his later years, had been those enjoyed as a member of a fishing club which occupied a comfortable house at Beesley’s Point, N. J. He took an active part in the management of the establishment, and the last months of his life were spent there, until a renewed attack of cerebral hemorrhage terminated in death, November 24th of the present year. The loss sustained by the Academy in the death of Drs. Horn and Allen is the most recent of a disastrous series beginning in 1891 with that of Dr. Joseph Leidy, and immediately preceded early in the present year by that of the brilliant naturalist, Edward D. Cope. The effect of such subtraction from the membership of the society must be acutely felt, but the work of these distinguished men lives after them, and we may be consoled by the hope that the influences which formed them, and which in no small measure emanated from this Academy, may continue to produce worthy successors who will be sustained and encouraged by the unselfish devotion to the cause of intellectual advancement of those who have gone before. DR. ALLEN’S ZOOLOGICAL WORK. BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS. So far as we have any record, Dr. Harrison Allen’s first and last papers on zoological subjects, as well as his last verbal communica- tion before a scientific body, were originally presented in this Acad- emy. Of seventy contributions to science, accessible to the author, fully one-half were first issued in the publications of this society. In systematic zoological work Dr. Allen’s publications number about thirty; in comparative anatomy, forty; those exclusively relating to Man number seven, while eight relate largely to the special subject of animal locomotion. With the exception of about ten of the seventy titles attributed to him, his papers are in the 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 519 nature of brief contributions to four of the more important A meri- can scientific journals and cover from one to four pages each. In many cases they were simply elaborations of verbal announcements first made at the meetings of this Academy. His monographic work comes under four titles, and it is worthy of special note that of the seventy titles appearing under his name, thirty-five relate almost exclusively to the Chiroptera or bats. Dr. Allen’s systematic work was confined wholly to the bats, a fact the more remarkable in view of his wide knowledge of and interest in many other families of the Mammalia. _ It is significant of his very early interest in this difficult and neglected group of animals, that his first published paper was printed in the Proceed- ings of the Academy in 1861 under the title, Descriptions of New Pteropine Bats from Africa. Ue here describes a new genus and three new species of African bats in the collections made by Du Chaillu and presented by subscription to the Academy. As a first effort this paper is surprisingly well prepared, both from the systematic and the anatomical points of view. Even granting his anatomical knowledge as a graduate of medicine, it is difficult to believe that the author had not made a close study of the bats previous to inspecting the Du Chaillu novelties. The theory that his interest in the Du Chaillu collections, coupled with the opportunity of entering upon a comparatively unworked field of original research, was the incentive of his life-long devotion to study of the Chiroptera, is probably correct. Only three short papers by him, all on the Chiroptera, appeared between 1861 and 1864, during his service in the United States Army. It was in Washington while thus engaged that he came under the inspiring influence of Prof. S. F. Baird, to which was probably due the issue, in 1864, of his first Monograph of the Bats of North America. Professor Baird having wholly omitted the Chiroptera from his great work on North American mammals, published by the Govern- ment in 1857, Dr. Allen was now able to supply a long felt need in the zoological literature of America. Confined as it was to a technical treatment of the species found north of Mexico, the monograph was limited to eighty-five pages of a volume of the Smithsonian Miscel- laneous Collections. Of the twenty species and eight genera recog- nized, one genus and six species were first described by the author. 520 "PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. In forming an estimate of this work it would be unfair to test it by later standards. We must allow much for the crude conceptions and scant knowledge of American bats then existing among the . most distinguished naturalists. The number of specimens then available for study in our museums was but a tithe of those now existing, and in the light of such facts Dr. Allen’s initial work, per- formed during his leisure hours, does him credit as the pioneer in this branch of mammalogy. In 1893 his second Monograph of the North American Bats appeared as Bulletin No. 43 of the National Museum. — This issue, more than twice the size of its predecessor, is based on more exten- sive suites of specimens than the first and summarizes the investiga- tions of himself and others, including Dobson, during the intervening thirty years. The book is well illustrated, new methods of ana- tomical comparison are introduced and the morphology in many cases is greatly elaborated. The results, from the standpoint of the systematist, are somewhat confusing, and it is evident that the author was at times led astray by a wrong conception of the laws of geographic variation and unduly biased by his theory of pedomorphism. His effort to set his nomenclature on an endur- ing basis is only partially successful, handicapped as he was by his association with old-school systematists and the small amount of leisure which active office practice allowed him for an exhaustive _ examination of the literature. As a compendium of our knowledge of North American bats up to that period, in some cases half-con- cealing yet half-revealing the truths which have recently been elaborated by Mr. G. Miller, Jr. in his Revision of the North American Vespertilionide,’ Dr. Allen’s last edition is a valuable and enduring work, full of original suggestion. It is the standard by which we must judge all future systematic work on the American Chiroptera. It is to be regretted that Mr. Miller should have neglected to do honor, in his Revision, to Dr. Allen’s long and faithful service in this special department of zoology. The success of the later naturalist in his monographie work has only been made possible by the years of patient research, the mistakes, the sugges- tions, and withal the earnest truth-seeking, of Dr. Harrison Allen. In comparative anatomy Dr. Allen published about forty papers, most of which are in the form of communications to learned societies on the anatomy of Man and the bats, and among these may be 1 North Amer. Fauna, No. 13, 1897. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 521 classed those relating to animal locomotion. In 1869 appeared his Outlines of Comparative Anatomy and Medical Zoology, a com- pend of his lectures delivered in the University of Pennsylvania as Professor of the branches treated of. The concise character of this little book, its simplicity of classification and treatment, and its suggestiveness to the student in original research, distinguish it from ordinary text books, and it may still serve as a valuable guide to instructors in anatomy. Notes on the Conformation of the Mammalian Skull and Studies in the Facial Region, also record observations indicating the special studies which Dr. Allen had been conducting previous to the year 1875 and which were bringing him into prominence as an anatomist- In his studies of animal locomotion Dr. Allen deserves special notice, standing as he does quite alone in his discussion of Prof. Muy- bridge’s instantaneous photography of animals in motion. This work was performed at the request of the University of Pennsylvania. He had previously studied anatomically the limbs of the mammalia, notably the wings of bats, with a similiar purpose in view. His paper was modestly entitled Materials for a Memoir on Animal Locomotion. On this unpretentious basis the whole essay is largely conducted, no theories or generalizations being indulged in where a more imaginative writer would have felt at liberty to roam at will. He confined his speculations on animal locomotion, as in his previous work, chiefly to practical suggestions for future investigation. In connection with this work we find several examples of newly- coined words and technical terms called for by Dr. Allen’s studies in minute anatomy. Without such additions to nomenclature a new branch of technical study such as the one undertaken by Muybridge and Allen could not be intelligently, and at the same time concisely, presented. In 1884 Dr. Allen published his System of Human Anatomy, a quarto volume of eight hundred pages, profusely illustrated, and representing an amount of learning and labor far out of proportion to its popularity and financial success. His Distribution of Color Marks in the Mammalia which appeared in the Proceedings of the Academy in 1888, is the most important con- tribution to the literature of the subject yet published by an Amer- ican author. He states his “ main object has been to contemplate color marks as the result of nutritive processes, controlled by recog- nized biological forces both in health and disease.” The paper is a 522 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. valuable record of observations made on the lines defined by previous writers, especially by Eschricht and Voigt, on the human subject. It forms a valuable summary of previous work, adding much mate- rial for future research, but advancing no hypotheses. In this the author was consistent with the cautious conservatism which charac- terized his life. Taking a comprehensive view of the zoological work of Dr. Allen in connection with our knowledge of his personality, we are most im- pressed with its conscientiousness united to an unselfishness only too rare among men of Science. | In a personal acquaintance with Dr. Allen as a student of zoology, the author was early impressed with his serious and deliberate, almost solemn, consideration of the subject in hand. i 20 PGIORTERe Gee ly «| ALOU Rurehaneiis eye retire: wee 1g Meigs Fund, hee 1540) (Chas brs Sractit oo) yo) eels U.S. Dept. aE peribuliare! Oi ible PAC MIS REV: | ia eh iis 14 PennsylvaniaState Library, 46 | U.S. Dept. of State, . . 13 540 Minister of Public Works, France, . : U. 8S. Dept. of Taber : Persifor Frazer Geological Survey of India Geological and Natural History Survey, Minn., Bernard H. Steiner Comité Geologique Russe, U. S. Treas. Department, Thomas Meehan, Department of Mines, Rete South Wales, U. S. Commission of igh and Fisheries, f Geological Survey of Mie: _ souri, Mie East Indian Gen ee Geological Surv. of Canada, Geological eee: of Ala- bama, Ohio State Taber y Clarence B. Moore : Governor-General, Néerlandaises . P. P. Calvert . University of Kansas U.S. War Department, Cal. State Mining Bureau, Mass. Commission of In- land Fisheries, ete. Norwegian Government Congrés Géologique Inter- nationale, Bentham Trustees, Gardens, Commision Gaolosien ae Mexico . S. R. Roberts, Government of Aseesune Republic, Indes Kew aft bo bo 09 W& 09 bo bo PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF Geological Survey of Iowa, Mr. Wetherill, W. W. Jefferis, W. E. Meehan, Geological Survey of New York, Trustees of the Melbourne Exhibition, 3 Geological Survey of Port bai 5 (2271) ne 9 ead ys L. Voission, ee Exposition International de Bruxelles, . Department of rimless Nova Scotia, Angelo Heilprin, Charles G. Sower, Congres International des Péches Maritimes, Benjamin Sharp, Samuel N. Rhoads, Uselma C. Smith, Mrs. Carvill Lewis, Wan Box a: Henry C. McCook, . Geological Survey of Rou- mania, Lewis Woolman, Samuel G. Dixon, : Geological Survey of Mary- land, U. 5. Fish Cominiasiont Lord Crawford, Adams Memorial Commit- Weer, Is WS. ic Fig Fit oc Committee on Botany, Pennsylvania Pharma- ceutical Association, Emil Holub, Lemcke & Buechner, New York, [1897. 2 2 2 2 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 541 These accessions were distributed to the several departments of the library, as follows :— Taian weit o. soto . 4,002 | Mineralogy, . . . «. « 18 Renew. 4, .. Lol | Physical Science, .° . 17 Botaty, . eee et OrmMibnOlOpy. -.. 5 matte ets 13 General Natural Bast Ory, 102, | Helminthology,. . . . 10 PPOTYCUILUTe,, . -. Os Viedrenmre. +.) “keer ees 9 intomolopy, 9°. 3 47 | Bibliography, 7 ‘Anthropology, . . . . 47. | Chemistry, 5 Mammalogy;: 2... . 31 | Geography, SOE: 5 Wenchology; so.ce es: a0" arneyclopedias: (Aik 2 t + Voyages and Travels, . . 30 | Herpetology, . 1 Ichthyology, . 297)|\) Miscellaneous; i! ~) 74 Anatomy and Phy Salo, 23 The slight falling off in receipts from the number reported last year is owing to the decrease of appropriations, made necessary by the large expenditures for 1896. To the same cause is due the com- paratively small number of volumes bound, which amounts to only 270, a large part of these being credited to the special funds, thus farther curtailing the amount available for the purchase of books. In the cases, secured by the removal last year of the stock of pub- lications of the Academy to the basement, have been arranged the books on Physical Science and Anthropology, the latter section of the library being more than doubled by the large collection of val- uable works included in the Meigs bequest. Extensive additions of case room are required in nearly every department of the library, the maintenance of the geographical arrangement of the journals and periodicals being increasingly difficult from year to year. The plan suggested in the last report of arranging journals devoted to special subjects in connection with the special departments of the library, does not seem to meet with the endorsement of those imme- diately concerned, so that no transfers have been made. A portrait in oil of the late Professor Edward D. Cope by C. A. Worrall, has been procured by subscription and added to the gal- lery. The Librarian improved the occasion of his attendance last July at the Second International Library Conference held in London, to inspect the scientific sections of a number of libraries there and elsewhere throughout the United Kingdom, with the result of being able to congratulate the Academy on the extent and convenience of . 542 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. arrangement of its collection of books which in both respecte compares favorably with those of much older establishments. In liberality of administration the Academy is especially deserving of recognition, as, apart from the fact that under the By-Laws the books must be consulted on the premises, it places on the reader none of the restrictions almost universally met with elsewhere. It is increasingly apparent that the growth and arrangement of the library are seriously interfered with by lack of means. If it were not for the care taken to secure the largest possible return from exchange of publications, the other resources at the disposal of the Library Committee would be entirely inadequate, and the opportu- nity for advanced study in the Academy would be materially cur- tailed. This would be now more than ever the cause of serious re- gret, because the library was never so much resorted to by students of kindred institutions as it has been during ‘the past year. Not only for such readers, but more especially for our own workers, it is essential that the latest scientific literature be placed promptly on our shelves and in such binding as to make it most convenient of access with the least wear and tear. To secure these ends at least double the income now at the disposal of the Library Committee will be required. . Acknowledgement is again due Mr. Wm. J. Fox for efficient ser- vice in the library, especially during the Librarian’s absence in Europe. All of which is respectfully submitted. Epwarp J. NOLAN, Librarian. REPORT OF THE CURATORS. The past year has been characterized by a greatly increased in- terest on the part of the general public in the Academy’s Museum, owing to the better facilities for the exhibition of the collections afforded by the new museum building, the opening of which was recorded in our last report. New cases have been placed on the first and second floors of the new building, and much has been ac- complished in perfecting the arrangement of the various collections. The Curators are able to report the specimens at the present time in an excellent state of preservation, although the impossibility of the systematic arrangement and proper display of the collections 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 543 in some departments, owing to the need of cases, seriously affects their examination and use by students. The most noteworthy change in the arrangement of the museum during the year has been the transfer of the wall cases on the bird gallery to the basement of the new building, where a commodious storage department has been arranged for the reception of the great bulk of the alcoholic preparations. The entire series of fishes and alcoholic mollusca have already been arranged in their new quarters, and are much more accessible to the student, besides being entirely protected from the dampness which, in their old situation, seriously affected the preservation of the labels. The entire collection of fishes, numbering upward of fifteen thou- sand, has been catalogued by Mr. Henry W. Fowler, and supple- mentary labels placed inside the jars to ensure the preservation of the data. The work of cataloguing and renovating the ornithological col- lection, which has been in progress for several years past, has been brought to completion. The remounted exhibition collection is ready for removal to the third floor of the new building, as soon as sufficient cases can be procured. A start has already been made in the furnishing of this floor, and one handsome plate-glass case has been placed in position, in which will be arranged a synoptical collection representing the principal orders of birds. A similar case has been placed in the Pennsylvania and New Jersey room for the accommodation of the Delaware Valley Ornithological Club Collection of local birds with nests and eggs, which is now nearly complete. For the storage of bird skins addi- tional space has been allotted adjoining the room of the Ornitholog- ical Section. In the mammal hall attention is called to the group of Alaskan Fur Seals, collected by Dr. Sharp and Mr. J. M. Justice, which has been mounted during the year, and is now displayed in a large plate-glass case. , Numerous other animals have been mounted by the taxidermist during the past year, all of which maintain the high standard of work which has characterized the specimens prepared for museum exhibition in the past few years. 544 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Foremost among these may be mentioned the Orang Utan, Striped Hyaena, Pacifie Walrus, Cheetah and Florida Crocodile. In the department of paleontology much valuable work has been accomplished. The large slabs containing the Icthyosauri have been removed from the old vestibule to the entrance of the new Museum on Nineteenth Street, where they can be seen to much bet- ter advantage. The collection of vertebrate remains from the Port Kennedy Bone Cave, upon which Professor Cope did his last scientific work, has been displayed in the Pennsylvania and New Jersey Room. The entire collection of American invertebrate fossils has been rear- ranged during the year, and placed in systematic order as regards horizons, while upward of twelve hundred specimens have been cleaned and placed in trays. Work on the Isaac Lea Eocene Collection has progressed regu- larly during the year, through the liberality of the Rev. L. T. Chamberlain, D. D. Mr. C. W. Johnson has been engaged in arranging the display collection, which has been increased to fill an additional ease provided by Dr. Chamberlain early in the year. Mr. Johnson and Mr. Burns have also done a considerable amount of field work which has added richly to the collection. Miss Anna T. Jeanes has presented two horizontal oak cases, which have been placed on the first floor of the new museum, in which a synoptical collection of minerals has been arranged for the benefit of students, while a portion of the old collection of minerals, which it is not desired to exhibit, has been stored underneath in the drawers. A collection of rocks from Philadelphia and vicinity, selected mainly from the State Geological Survey Collection, has been ar- ranged in the Pennsylvania and New Jersey Room, and a synopti- eal collection of rocks has been arranged in two cases in the old museum, both of which will prove of assistance to students of geol- ogy. Four additional cases have been added to the William S. Vaux Collection for the accommodation of exceptionally large crystals and masses of minerals, and an additional case to the Clarence B. Moore Archaeological Collection. Mr. Moore has spent much time in the field during the year, and has added many rare and interesting spe- cimens to this collection. The conchological department has continued to increase under the constant care of the professor in that department, and the rear- 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 545 rangement of a considerable portion of the bivalves has been made possible by the removal of part of the minerals from this gallery. Besides those already mentioned, there have been numerous large and valuable additions to the museum during the year, as will be seen in the appended list. Among them we would call attention to the valuable collection of marine specimens from California, presented by Mr. Harold Heath ; a collection of rocks and birds from South Africa, presented by Dr. Emil Holub, through Mr. H.G. Bryant; a collection of Coleoptera from Pennsylvania and New Jersey, presented by the Feldman Collecting Social, a collection of African insects and mollusks from Dr. A. Donaldson Smith; a collection of alcoholic mammals of North America from S. N. Rhoads, as well as the numerous valuable specimens received through the year from the Zoological Society of Philadelphia. The collection of marine invertebrates preserved in formaline has also been increased through the liberal- ity of Mr. F. W. Walmsley. Several important improvements in the museum building are aiso noteworthy, particularly the fitting up of the receiving room at the east end, as an addition to the library and the renovation of the Council Room. The Curators have also, during the year, vacated one of the small rooms on the library floor, and have allotted a large space on the basement floor of the new museum for the storage of publications. The Curators take this occasion to express their indebtedness to various members and to the Conservators of the Sections, for valu- able assistance in caring for the special collections, particulars of which will be found in their several reports. Important assistance has also been rendered by the students of the Jessup Fund. Much assistance has been given to specialists by placing the collections at their disposal, and in addition to the many who have made use of material at the Academy, specimens have been loaned to representatives of various scientific institutions throughout the country, including Anthony Woodward, Henry C. Mercer, T. Wayland Vaughan, Ered’k. A. Lucas, L. M. Under- wood, H. M. Smith, Walter Faxon, C. F. Millspaugh, H. C. Ober- holser, B. L. Robinson, T. W. Stanton, Robert Ridgway and others. Henry C. Coapman, M. D., Chairman of the Curators. 546 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. REPORT OF THE BIOLOGICAL AND MICROSCOPICAL SECTION. The Section has held ten meetings during the past year with slightly increased average attendance. Communications of general interest have been made at each of the meetings, diatoms and bacteriology receiving special attention. The Conservator reports the purchase of several new objectives. Donations to the museum were made by Dr. J.C. Morris, and a large aquarium was presented by Mr. Holman. The following commu- nications were made to the Academy: . “Demonstration of Absorption of Carbon Dioxide and of the Generation of Oxygen by Diatoms,” by T. Chalkley Palmer. “ Dentition of Snails,” by Professor Pilsbry. “Furs,” by Dr. Morris. “The Neuron,” by Dr. A. O. J. Kelly. “Structure of the Diatom Valve,” by F. J. Keeley. The officers of the Section are as follows: Director, . : : ; : J.Cheston Morris, M. D. Vice-Director, . : ; : T. Chalkley Palmer. Treasurer, . : : 4 ; Charles P. Perot. Conservator, , 4 : F. J. Keely. Corresponding Secretary, . . John G. Rothermel. Recorder, . , , : ; Charles 8. Boyer. CHARLES 8. Boyer, Recorder. REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION. The past year has been one of continuous growth in the concho- logical department of the museum, although no one accession of great size has been received. In the arrangement of the collection considerable progress has been made. The bivalves of the families Pholadidx, Teredidze, Myide, Mactride, Solenide, Donacidz and some allied groups have been transferred from the table cases to the rail cases formerly occupied by minerals, and systematically arranged therein. To the space thus gained, the terrestrial operculates have ‘ been transferred, and the species rearranged according to the latest monographs of the several groups. ‘The cases formerly occupied by the operculates, which had long since been outgrown by the increase of the collection, will now be utilized for displaying the Bulimulide, 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 547 which are at present being monographed in the Manual of Conchol- ogy; the collection of Helices having extended over the cases for- merly containing Bulimi. é Other museum work worthy of note has been a thorough revision of the Ampullariidz, Pinnidz, Pectunculus and Amphidromus of the collection, by Miss J. E. Letson, and a revision of the Arionidee and Cylindrellidze by Mr. E. G. Vanatta and the Conservator. The recent and fossil Scaphopoda of our collection have been studied by the Director and Conservator of the Section, and the specimens relabelled; the results of the study being embodied in a monograph of the group in the Manual of Conchology. The entire collection of alcoholic mollusks has been transferred from the mollusk gallery wall cases, to cases erected in the basement of the new building, where they have been arranged in systematic order. The routine work of identifying specimens for correspondents has as usual occupied considerable time; but as in former years a large number of species new to science have resulted from the time thus expended. 1,505 lots of specimens from 72 persons have been received, labelled and placed in the collection during the year. A detailed list of accessions will be found in “ Addition to the Museum.” The officers of the Section are as foliows : Director, . ‘ : ; : . Benjamin Sharp, M. D. Vice-Director, . : : . John Ford. Recorder and Librarian, . : . Edw. J. Nolan, M. D. Corresponding Secretary, . . . Chas.-W. Johnson. _ Treasurer, . : S. Raymond Roberts. Recocenile snbenitieal Henry A. Pirspzry, Conservator. REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SECTION. Six meetings has been held during the present year. The attend- ance has been guod and many interesting and valuable verbal com- munications have been made. ‘The year has been an eventful one in the history of the Section. More commodious quarters have been occupied and work in all of the orders of insects has been consequ- ently stimulated. ‘The collections are in better condition than ever 548 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. before and they are being well protected against museum pests. The Section has been fortunate in having aid from a number of its members interested in special branches of entomology. Dr. H. G. Griffith has done excellent work in the rearrangement of the exotic Coleoptera and Mr. Gerhard has worked industriously on the Mar- tindale Lepidoptera. A number of valuable collections have been presented and many small lots of insects. These are enumerated in the list of additions to the musenm. It is hoped that the display collection in the museum may be rapidly increased for the benefit of the visiting public. So far as the collections for study are con- cerned, little is to be desired, as in a number of the orders we have the finest collections of American species in the world. Ten numbers of the Entomological News have been published forming 256 pages and 11 plates. At the meeting of the Section held Dee. 28rd. the following were elected to serve as officers for the coming year: Director, : é Phi : : Chas. S. Welles. Vice-Director, : : E ; , Philip Laurent. Treasurer, . : p ; : : E. T. Cresson. Conservator and Recorder, . : : Henry Skinner. Secretary, é j ‘ : 5 : Wm. J. Fox. Publication Committee, . : : ; 1e 1 Henry SKINNER, Recorder. REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION. The Director of the Botanical Section respectfully reports that though the work of the Section has had to be performed almost wholly by the volunteer labors of its members, the general progress of the year has been satisfactory. Much valuable assistance could have been secured in the distribution of various collections awaiting their final arrangement, if the extra rooms had been fitted with the cases referred to in the Conservator’s report to the Section which is appended as part of this document. The cost of mounting speci- mens has been defrayed by the Academy. Our late lamented fellow member, John H. Redfield, knowing that the time must surely come when the Herbarium and its work would retrograde without the services of a salaried Curator, left his herbarium and library to the Section to be sold for the nucleus of a 1397. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 549 fund, the interest of which should go to the care and increase of the collection of plants. These have been disposed of, the Herbarium being secured for $1,700 by the Missouri Botanical Garden, and the books sold at auction. The fund will be known as the Redfield Me- morial Herbarium Fund. The investment now made will yielda small income next year, which will help in the purchase of new col- lections. No attempt has been made the past year to add to the fund, as it was not thought wise to interfere with the applications of the Academy for aid in other directions. The Section is free from debt, and has a small balance in its treasury. The officers for the ensuing year are: Director, . : : E ‘ : Thomas Meehan. Vice-Director, . é : : é Charles E. Smith. Conservator and Treasurer, ‘ é Stewardson Brown. Recorder, ; . A ; , Chas. Schiffer, M. D. Corresponding Secretary, : : Jos. D. Crawford. Respectfully submitted, THomas MEEHAN, Director. Report of the Conservator.—Notwithstanding the disadvantages under which the Botanical Department has had to work, the result for the past year has been fully up to those preceding. The mounting of the collections has been steadily carried on through the untiring efforts of the Director of the Section, and is now completed up to Gentianacez. It 1s hoped to have them all properly arranged by the end of the next season. The Lewis and Clark Collection has been carefully examined by Mr. Thos. Meehan and Professor B. L. Robinson of Harvard College. There is every reason to expect that before the next report shall be made, the much needed cases for accommodation of the rapidly ae- cumulating material will have been secured. The accessions of the year are recorded in the list of additions to the Museum. I wish to congratulate the Section on the good work of the year, and to thank all those who have contributed to its performance. STEWARDSON Brown, Conservator. REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND GEOLOG- ICAL SECTION. Ten meetings of the Section have been held during the year with an average attendance of more than nine members. 36 550 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. An active interest has shown itself at the meetings, communica- tions having been made by many of the members and by visitors. Of these may be mentioned several on geology, especially of the vicinity, on the composition of soils, on a new mineral called Tri- saltite by Mr. Goldsmith, on glacial striz and rubbings made from them, and on a large deposit of corundum, in gneissoid or granitic rocks in Ontario. Two successful excursions were enjoyed by the Section: one on May 27th to Media, Mineral Hill, and the Sharpless quarry and the other on October 23rd to the quarries, ete. near Avondale, Chester Co. The Officers of the Section are as follows :— Director, . : : z Theodore D. Rand. Vice-Director and Conservator, . : Wm. W. Jefferis. Recorder, . ‘ : f 5 ; Charles Schiffer. Treasurer, . : : ; John Ford. Respectfully submitted, THeEo. D. Ranp, Director. REPORT OF THE ORNITHOLOGICAL SECTION. It is gratifying to be able to report the completion of the work of renovating the mounted collection of birds in the museum of the Academy. This work was begun in 1892 and has progressed steadily ever since, though press of other museum work has often occasioned delay. As finally catalogued the collection, of practically the same ~ extent as at the time of the death of Dr. Thomas B. Wilson, numbers 24,492 specimens. Of this number 15,000 duplicates, including the types, have been unmounted and placed in tight cabinets, while the remaining series of 10,000 specimens has been arranged systematically in the large exhibition cases on the old Ornithological Gallery. The improve- ment in the appearance of the collection is marked and the reduc- tion in the number of the specimens exhibited makes it possible to dispense entirely with the old wall cases in which the specimens were so much in danger from mold and dampness. The labelling, except in the case of some of the larger birds, has been restricted to group or family labels. The cards are so quickly spoiled by dust in the old cases that it has been considered best to defer the general labelling until new cases are provided and the col- lection is removed to the new Museum building. 1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 551 All the specimens are numbered to correspond with the catalogue and all data have been preserved on the bases of the stands. The Conservator is now engaged in a careful study of the numer- ous type specimens contained in the collection, the results of which will be published in the Proceedings of the Academy, so that the im- portant facts relative to this famous collection may be properly pre- served. During the past year the completion of the work above described has involved the remounting of 500 specimens, the writing of 2,000 labels and the entry of 5,000 specimens in the permanent catalogue. Besides this the entire collection was rearranged in the exhibition cases to bring it into proper sequence. The Section’s quarters have been still further enlarged by the allotment of additional space on the floor adjoining its room to accommodate the additional cases of skins. The whole study-series has been carefully examined and found to be in excellent condition. The accessions for the year comprise an important collection of North Carolina birds presented by Robt. T. Young, a small collec- tion of African species from Dr. Emil Holub and numerous spec- imens received from the Zoological Society. The Delaware Valley Ornithological Club has also added many rare and artistic groups of nests and eggs to the collection of Pennyslvania and New Jersey birds, and by its meetings at the Academy, has been instrumental in keeping up a live interest in this branch of science. The Stone Collection of Pennyslvania and New Jersey birds numbering upward of 2,000 skins has been received on deposit and is at the disposal of students who may desire to consult it. In reviewing the work of the year the Conservator wishes to ex- press his acknowledgment of the valuable assistance rendered by Mr. Henry W. Fowler. At the annual meeting of the Section held December 20, 1897, the following officers were elected :— Director, . : : : ‘ : Spencer Trotter, M. D. Vice-Director, . : : F 3 George S. Morris. Recorder, ; : ‘ : . Stewardson Brown. Secretary, . : - : : William A. Shryock. Treasurer and Conservator, ‘ Witmer Stone. WiITMER STONE, Conservator. 552 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. REPORT OF THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL SECTION. Five meetings have been held during the past year, at which communications were made by Prof’s. Brinton, Allen, and Culin, and a special communication on “ Primitive Transportation,” by Prof. Otis T. Mason, of the National Museum, Washington, D.C. A committee was appointed to consider the question of obtaining space in the old museum hall for the collection of crania possessed by the Academy. Mr. John G. Rothermel was elected Treasurer, to suc- ceed Dr. M. V. Ball, resigned. The death of Dr. Harrison Allen left vacant the Directorship, which office he has filled since the or- ganization of the Section. At the December business meeting a quorum was not present, and the annual election could not he held, the officers of the Section being continued until the next meeting. The office of Director remains vacant. CHARLES Morris, Rocorder. REPORTS OF THE PROFESSORS. ANGELO HEILPRIN, PRoFEssoR OF GEOLOGY, reports that the work in his department during the past year has been confined mainly to its educational aspect. The regular spring course of in- struction was comprised in twenty-six lectures and eight field dem- oustrations, the attendance at which, while smaller than in the cor- responding period of the year before, was sufficient to indicate a live interest in geology and an appreciation of the opportunities that ‘were offered for practical study. As in previous years a large part of the classes was composed of school teachers. A special course of six lectures was delivered under the auspices of the Ludwick Insti- tute in November and December, with the largest attendance yet secured in the Academy, the record showing an average of 163 for each lecture. The condition of the collections in the department of geology re- mains unchanged. There is a deficiency of case-room, and imme- diate relief can hardly be looked for. Some rearrangement of the collections has been made under the direction of the Curators, both in the old and in the new museum buildings, but a large part of the specimens must still be placed in the drawers of the cases. Additions to this department of the Academy’s museum, and notably to the affiliated department of paleontology, have been re- 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 553 ceived from various sources, a number of them from former students of the courses of geology. While the generous gift of the late Prof. KE. D. Cope does not strictly concern the department of geology, as defined by the By-Laws, a reference to it cannot be omitted. Prof. Cope’s collections are uot only a monument to the indomitable en- ergy and scientific devotion of a master of his specialty, but of the utmost importance to the student of vertebrate paleontology. The collections should be secured for the Academy, to which they have been virtually proffered, and with which the name of the deceased has been most intimately associated. Dantet G. Brinton, M. D., PRoressor or ETHNOLOGY AND ARCH ®OLOGY, reports that during the spring of 1897, a course of free public lectures was delivered by him in the lecture hall of the Academy on the recent advances in the science of anthropology. The lectures were well attended, and an increased popular interest in this branch was manifest. The anthropological collections of the Academy have been ar- ranged in mostly new cases and exposed to public view in a favor- able portion of the recently constructed addition to the Academy building. The number of visitors who give attention to this portion of the collections of the Academy show that it is one in which the general public is much interested. BrenJAMIN SHarp, M. D., PRoressor oF INVERTEBRATE ZOOL- oGy, reports that during the past year he delivered two courses, one of ten and the other of six lectures, upon invertebrate zoology, under the auspices of the Ludwick Institute, and one lecture in the Friday Evening Course on “The Sea and its Influence upon Animal Life.” The additions to the museum have not been extensive, the most important being the collection of invertebrates made by the Alas- kan and Siberian Expedition. Henry A. Pitspry, PROFESSOR IN THE DEPARTMENT OF MOL- LUSCA, reports that he has delivered two courses of lectures upon Malacology during the year. Several reports upon particular groups of mollusks, both recent and fossil, based upon material in the collection of the Academy have been prepared and published in the Proceedings, together with others based upon material sent for investigation from abroad. Pro- gress has been made in the classification and arrangement of the 554 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. collection, the details of which may be found in the report of the Conservator of the Conchological Section. Henry Skinner, M. D., Proressor IN THE DEPARTMENT OF Insecta, reports fully on the condition of the entomological collec- tions, his statements being included in the report of the Entomologi- eal Section. He will deliver six lectures in the Academy’s Lud- wick Institute Course early in the coming year. 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ~ 585 The election of Officers, Councillors and Members of the Finance Committee to serve during 1898, was held with the following re- sult :— President, ; : y . Samuel G. Dixon, M. D. Vice-Presidents, . : . Thomas Meehan. Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D. Recording Secretary, ‘ . Edward J. Nolan, M. D. Corresponding Secretary, . Benjamin Sharp, M. D. Treasurer, . : ; . George Vaux, Jr. Iibrarian, . : : . Edward J. Nolan, M. D. Curators, : ; : . Henry A. Pilsbry. Henry C. Chapman, M. D. Arthur Erwin Brown. Samuel G. Dixon, M. D. Councillors to serve three years, Charles P. Perot. C. Newlin Peirce. Theodore D. Rand. Philip P. Calvert. Finance Committee, 5 . Charles Morris. Chas. E. Smith. Uselma C. Smith. William Sellers. Charles P. Perot. Councillor for unexpired term of two years, . : . Charles H. Cramp. ELECTIONS DURING 1897. MEMBERS. vanuary 26.—William Biddle Cadwalader, Charles J. Pennock. February 23.—Thomas H. Montgomery. March 30.—Bartram W. Griffiths, E. T. Stotesbury, Robert K. McNeely, Louis Weber, M. D. April 27—Henry Brinton Coxe, Ferdinand Philips, Eckley Brinton Coxe, Jr. ; May 25.—Sager Chadwick, June 29.—Alonzo H. Stewart, M. D., Chas. E. De M. Sajous, M. D. September 28.—Thomas H. Conarroe, M. D., G. A. Muller, Kath- erine Muller. October 26.—Daniel Baugh. November 30.—J. Waln Vaux. 596 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. CORRESPONDENTS. May 25.—Alexander Karpinski of St. Petersburg, Russia. November 30.—F ridtjhof Nansen of Christiania, Norway. COUNCIL AND STANDING COMMITTEES FOR 1898. COUNCIL. Officers. —Samuel G. Dixon, M. D., Thomas Meehan, Rey. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Benjamin Sharp, M. D., George Vaux, Jr., Henry A. Pilsbry, Henry C. Chapman, M. D., Arthur Erwin Brown. To serve Three Years—Charles P. Perot, C. Newlin Peirce, Theodore D. Rand, Philip P. Calvert. To serve Two Years—Thomas A. Robinson, Charles H. Cramp, Charles Morris, Isaac J. Wistar. To serve One Year.—Uselma C. Smith, Charles E. Smith, John Cadwalader, William Sellers. STANDING COMMITTEES. Finance. Uselma C. Smith, Charles Morris, Charles E. Smith, William Sellers, Charles P. Perot. Publications. Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith, Henry A. Pilsbry, Henry Skinner, M. D., Edward J. Nolan, M. D. Library. Charles P. Perot, Arthur Erwin Brown, Thomas A. Robinson, Henry C. Chapman, M. D., Dr. C. Newlin Peirce. Instruction and Lectures. Uselma C. Smith, Benj. Smith Lyman, Samuel G. Dixon, M. D., Philip P. Calvert, Samuel N. Rhoads. Committee of Council on By-Laws. Isaac J. Wistar, Theodore D. Rand, Arthur Erwin Brown and Benjamin Sharp, M. D. ba | 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 55 ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM. MAMMALS. Dr. Thos. Biddle. Tarsius fuscus dissected, in alcohol. Henry G. Bryant. Skin of marmot, Alaska. Dr. H. C. Chapman. Two specimens of Pteropus in alcohol. Em- bryos of Macropus and Canis dingo, dissected specimens in alcohol of Loris gracilis, Galago crassicaudata, Ornithorhynchus and Nyctecebus Dr. 8. G. Dixon. Lepus aquaticus, Alabama, (mounted). Dr. Emil Holub. Mounted Jerboa and Jackal and eight skulls of mammals, South Africa. Dr. W. E. Hughes. Atalapha borealis (mounted). Medico-Chirurgical College. Two skulls and odd bones of Elephant. Purchased by subscription. Male Orang Utan (Simia satyrus) lived in the Zool. Society’s Garden, Nov., 1893 to Noy. 1, 1897, mounted Nov., 1897. S. N. Rhoads. Collection of 60 jars of alcoholic mammals from N. America. Specimens of Lepus sylvaticus, New Jersey (mounted). Sigmodon hispidus floridanus (mounted). Three foetal Lynx rufus, Clinton Co., Pa. R. T. Young. Skin and skull of Fiber zibethicus. Zoological Society of Philadelphia. The following mammals which have been prepared as indicated. Mounted: Crab-eating Raccoon Procyon cancrivorus, Gazella muscatensis 9 , sacred Monkey, Semno- pithecus entellus ; Dusky Monkey, Semnopithecus obscurus ; Cheetah, Cynzxlurus jubatus 9 ; Campbell’s Monkey, Cercopithecus campbell ; Striped Hyzena, Hyxna striata ; Black Macacue, Macacus maurus ; Striped Wallaby, Macropus dorsalis 9 ; Coati, Nasua nasua; Carib- bean Seal, Monachus tropicalis ; Ocelot, Felis pardalis ; Bengal Cat, Felis bengalensis ; Brush-tailed Wallaby, Petrogale penicillata : also, to be mounted, Young Elk, Cervus canadensis; Fallow Deer, Cervus dama 8. Red Kangaroo female with young, Macropus rufus. Skins. Black spider Monkey, Sapagow vellerosus ; Prairie Dog, Cyno- mys ludovicianus; Two Common Seals, Phoca vitulina; Common Paradoxure, Paradoxurus; Brown Capuchin, Cebus futuellus ; Monkey (sp. undet.); Javan Civet, Viverra tangalunga, Barbary Ape, Maca- cus inwus. 558 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.. Osteological preparations. Skulls of all the mounted animals and skin specimens; also of Young Camel, Camelus sp. ; Prong-horned Antelope, Antilocapra americana. Disarticulated Skeletons of Pronghorned Antelope, Antilocapra amer- icana ; Two Gillespie’s Seals, Zalophus californianus ; Indian Buffalo, Bos buffelus; Coon-like Dog g, Canis procyonoides ; Brush-tailed Wallaby, Petrogale penicillata; Rhesus Monkey, Macacus rhesus > Javan Civet, Viverra tangalunga; Two Caribbean Seals, Monachus tropicalis ; Monkey (sp. undet. ). Rough Skeletons. Chamois, Rupicapra tragus; Indian Buffalo, Bos- buffelus ; Camel, Camelus dromedarius. BrirDs. H. L. Albright. Three specimens of Loxia curvirostra minor, Lycom- ing Co., Pa. (skins). Henry G. Bryant. Olor columbianus (mounted) and skin of Uria mandti. H. R. Deacon. Urinator imber, Seaville, N. J. (skin). Delaware Valley Ornithological Club Collection. Fifteen nests and sets of eggs of Pennsylvania and New Jersey birds and twenty mounted birds presented by members of the Club. Nest of Yellow- billed Cuckoo, (Coccyzus americanus) from Mrs. Edw. Robins, Goshawk, Accipiter atricapillus from Chas. A. Shriner ; Wood Ibis. (Tantalus loculator), from Dr. Park P. Breneman. Gannet (Sula bassana) S. B. Irwin and J. H. Cullin. Dr. Emil Holub. Ten mounted specimens of South African Birds and three skulls. R. B. Long. Mounted specimen of Bubo virginianus. Leander Rogers. Specimen of Ardea herodias (skin). Babu H. Sukhi. Chicken with four legs. H. Van der Wielen. Two skins of Bicknell’s Thrush (Turdus aliciz# bicknelli). Visitor. Specimens of Cardinalis cardinalis and Fringilla celebs. H. W. Warrington. Mounted specimen of Cathartes aura, Haddon- field, N. J. H. W. Wenzel. Skin of Piranga rubra from Philadelphia. W. C. Wetherill. Egg of Tinamou. R. T. Young. A collection of skins of North Carolinian birds. Four skins of Parus hudsonicus, Nova Scotia; skin of Sterna hirundo, Prince Edward Island. Zoological Society of Philadelphia. The following birds which have been prepared asindicated. Mounted: Carpophaga paulina; Skele- 1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 559 ton, Olor buccinator, Grus stanleyi; Skull and Sternum, Ciconia nigra, Phasianus reevesi ; Skin, Garrulax picticollis, Rhamphastos dis- colorus, Garrulus glandarius, Trupialis defilippi, Polytelis melanurus, Nucifraga caryocatoctes, Branta bernicla. Ardea virescens caught in Logan Square (mounted). REPTILES. Dr. Harrison Allen. Three jars of Reptiles. Dr. Thos. Biddle. Ophibolus doliatus, Pennsylvania. Arthur Erwin Brown. FHutenia vagrans and two specimens of Scelo- porus consobrinus. Dr. H. C. Chapman. Dissection of Sphenodon punctatus. Carapace and plastron of Chelopus insculptus. Edw. D Cope. Collection of reptiles from Vera Cruz, Mexico. Chas. E. Ridenour. Three young Anacondas. F. W. Walmsley. Ophibolus getulus and doliatus, New Jersey. H. W. Wenzel. Pseudemys rugosa, Philadelphia. Lieut. H. L. Willoughby, U.S. N. Crocodilus americanus, Florida (mounted). Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Two specimens of X7tphosoma rus- chenbergeri. . FIsH. Dr. Harrison Allen. Specimens of Echelus conger. Dr. H.C. Chapman. Dissection of Squalus, Astroscopus anophis, two young Cyclopterus, Polypterus bichir. Skeleton of the head of Lop- hius piscator. D. Morgan Eldridge. Head of Rabbit-fish (Lagocepialus). Wm. Ellis. Two specimens of Zoarces anguillaris. W. J. Fox, Series of Fundulus, Atlantic City, N. J. Harold Heath, Large series of fishes from Pacific Grove, California. Dr. C. P. Henry. Puffer fish (Tetradon), dried. Mrs. Tiel. Specimen of Cyclopterus lumpus. INSECTS. Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. 207 Orthoptera, 180 Diptera, 262 Hemi- ptera, 4 Coleoptera, 31 Neuroptera, 77 Lepidoptera, 160 Hymeno- ptera, all from N. E. Africa. Feldman Collecting Social. Sixteen boxes of Coleoptera, containing 656 genera, 1,326 species, numbering 3,828 specimens. Dr. Henry Skinner. Five hundred and ninety-six exotic butterflies. C. H. Hutchinson. Seventy-two butterflies mounted on plaster tablets. 560 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.. G. F. Russell. Two hundred specimens, various orders, collected in U.S. of Columbia. Prof. Ellison A. Smyth, Jr. Six exotic butterflies. Dr. Jos. H. Romig. Twenty Alaskan butterflies. Recent MOo.Luusca. T. H. Aldrich. Goniobasis from Tallapoosa river, Alabama. Four species land shells from Sumatra. Mr. C. F. Ancey. Helix subaperta, from Algeria. \ EK. H. Andrus. Five fresh-water species from Oregon. J.S. Arnheim. ‘Thirteen species shells from California and Alaska. N. T. Bednall. Acanthochites variabilis from Australia. W.G. Binney. Prophysaon and Hesperarion trom California. Frank Burns. Glandina truncata from Gregg’s Landing, Fla. Mr. F. L. Button. Four species land and freshwater shells, from Cali- fornia. E. B. Chope. Land shells from Florida. George Clapp. Polygyra profunda and exoleta from Virginia. Poly- gyra devia var. Clappi from Idaho. T. D. A. Cockerell. Four species land shells from California and New Mexico. H.8. Conrad. Helix nemoralis, New Jersey. J. C. Cox. Thirteen species of Jschnochiton and other marine shells from Australia. W. H. Dall. Nanina diadenia Dall from Malay Peninsula. Dr. Dolley. One species Tethys, from Bahamas. Bernard L. Douredoure. Cyprea and Umbonium. Mrs. H. E. Dwight. Dentaliwm sericatum. J. H. Ferriss. Sixty-three species land shells from Tennessee. John Ford. Abnormal form of Cyprea lynx from Singapore ; Cerion Fordii, from Bahamas; Littorina palliata, Greenwich Bay, R. I. Henry W. Fowler. Unio complanatus. Mr. Gaines. Nassa, from Tango, Japan. Mrs. E. M. Gaylord. Ariolimax and Purpura from Oregon. G. H. Gude. Vitrea alliaria Mull. Wilfred H. Harned. Polygyra albolabris, Lycoming Co., Pa. and Pearls from Ostrexa. Harold Heath. Thirteen jars alcoholic mollusks from Mazatlan, Mex. and Monterey, Cal. Charles Hedley. Three species from Australia. Miss E. J. Letson. Sixty-three land and fresh-water species from Buffalo, N. Y. Mr. H. N. Lowe. Four species from California. 1897. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 561 J.G. Malone. Limaz, Prophysaon, etc. from Oregon. William A. Marsh. Two species of Unio from Texas. E. H. Matthews. Centropristis .. . . 106, 108 Centurio. . oes ee Cephalacanthide ae 132 Cephalacanthus 132 Cepola 87 Cepolidee 87 Cepolis 10 Ceratina . . 351 Ceratodus . > Cerion . . . 19, 365--3867 Ceropales o> Sea Cervus . ste . «+, 20,)208 Cetengraulis .. . = +\ Saeae Cheetodipterus . 123 Cheetodon, 78, 103, 116, 123, 124 Cheetodontidee xe 123 Cheeturichthys . 86 Channa .. Snes 69 Chanodichthys ae 59 Chatoessus . 62 Chilomycterus 131 Chilopsis 138 Chinochlore 442 Chiolite 437 Chlarias . . . 57 Chlorichthys . . 119 Chlorion 375 Chlorite . : 435 Chloroscombrus 101 Cheetetes er ee Chonetes . 417, 449 Chromis. .. - Las Chromite : 429 Chrysanthemum 201 Chrysophrys . 76 Chrysopsis . . 192 Cirsium .. . 192 Citrus . 174 Clarias 57 Cleome 348 Clinus . 133 Claupanodon . 94 Clupea 63, 64, 66, 94 Clupeidee : 94 Cnemidophorus 463 Cobitidee . . 60 Cobitis 60 Coilia .. 66 Coleonyx 460 1897.] Collichthys Compressidens . Columbite Concinnum Condylura . . Congrus . Conocardium Conodon Corbicula Corbula . Cosmoceras Cornus . Corundum . . Corvina Coryphena Crabro 5 Crassatella . . Crotaphytus . Cryolite . . Cryptochiton . e Cryptotenia . Ctenosaura Culius . Cyanite Cyathophy lum Cybium .. Cyclas . . Cymbidium Cymbium Cynoglossus Cynoscion . Cyphaspis . Cyphonyx . Cyprzea Cyprina . Cyprinide . Cyprinus Cyrthia Dahlia Dardania Dasyatidee Dasyatis . . Decapterus . . Dentalium. . Dentex Desmine Diabasis . . Diacope. . Diamond Diapterus Didelphis Digitalis... 32, 7 294, 295, 186--188, . 429, Sle sy lee , 122, . 887, _. 299 » 465--472, . 24, 207, NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 567 Diodon 130 Diodontidze 130 Diodontus . . 141 Diorite 420 Diporom. 7% SS eee Disthene 429, 442 Ditrupa . . iy ope eee ae Dorcelaphus . . . 25, 208, 311 Dormitator . abe Dorosoma 62, 63 Dorosomatidee . 4 ee Drepane. . 78 Drepanide . 78 Drymezeus 22 Dules . : » »Jprteli@6é Eatoniella . . . 360, 480 Echeneidide . . . 132 Echeneis :, ots Ela Edotea . . . 391--408 Eleolite . 2 aya? Eleotris 84, 132 Elephas . . . 483 Eleutheractis J EOF Elopidee 63, 94 Elops . 94 Embolite . . 438 Engraulidide . . 64, 95 Engraulis 64, 65, 95 Entomis . . 445, 447 Ephippide. .,... . « .95) aia Epidote . . . 418, 435, 437, 442 Epinephelus . 78, 104, 105 Episiphon . . a 3 . 465 | Eques . 116 | Equula 73 | Erethizon 210 Eriphyla ea Ges Erythronium . . 161, 162 Esocidee 7 OO Fmeo Esox 94,97, 98 Essonite . . 442 Estheria . 427, 455 Eucinostomus Pet cree 3 Euclase . . 438 Eudothyra . 417 Eunotia . 144 Euomphalus . 445 Eupomacentrus 116 Eutomis. . 426 Evotomys . 27, 206, 211, 212, 214 Beéldspar >... Gils 419 Felis 32, 222 568 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Fiber . 27, 212, 309 | Helvine . ~ AST Fistularia : 70 | Hematite 417, 429 Fistulariide . 70 | Hemiramphide 69, ag Fluorite . 437 | Hemiramphus : 9 seeeeiees Heemulide . _ 7, 109 | Lactophrys . 128 Hemulon 109 | Lactuca. : LO 2 Halistylus . 298 | Lagocephalus . . 81, 128 Hamulus : 475 | Lamium ges 845) Hapsidophrys . 464 | Lamna . 428 Harpe : 118 | Larrea : 355 Harpodon . . 67 | Lasionycteris . 224 Helianthus . 193, 201 | Lateolabrax 73 Heliases 117 | Lauricoche 292 Helicella 859 | Leiognathide . 73 Helicide . . . . 11 | Leiognathus 73 Heliophytum . 169, 170 | Lejeania 359 Heliotropium .. . 169-172 | Leperditia . 414 Helix 10, 19 | Lepidodendron 427 1897.] Lepidotrigla Leptocephalidee Lepus : Lethrinus Leuciscus Liatris Lilium Lima Limicolaria Limonacanthus Lingula . Liriodendron Lissoacme Listvenite Lobotes . Lobotidee Lonicera Lophiidee Lophiomus Lophius . Lutianide . Lutianus Lutjanus Lutra Lutraria Lycium . Lycodontis . yu ; Maclura. Macrodium . Macronyx . Macropteronotus Magnetite . Magnolia ; Malacanthide . Malacanthus Malachite Malaconite . Martite . Mastacembelus Meekella Megalops Megellania . Melichthys . Menticirrhus Mephitis Merista . Mesodesma Mesoprion . Miassite . Microcline . Micropogon 83 sé Gaal 25, 209, 305 Sa ihiphsnG 59, 60 192 172 428 358 te ee 428, 454 202, 203 _ 487, 441, 444 | . 198, 202, 203 ae eee 437, 444 . 69 410 68, 94 | 329, 330 126 ageklier| 31, 219 447 . 293 . 74, 108 Sy aaete 437, 442 115 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Micropteryx Microtus Misgurnus . Modiola Molybdenite Monacanthidee Monacite Monazicoid Monedula . Monopterus Moringua ' Moringuidee | Mugil Mugilidee | Mulgedium Mullide . | Mulloides | Mullus Mureena . Murzenesocidee Murzenesox Mureenichthys . Murzenidee | Murchisonia Mus | Muscovite Mustela . Mutilla . Myceteroperca Mygnimia Myliobates . Myliobatidze | Myride . Mystus Nacella . Neesiotes Narcine . Narcobatidee Natrix Nautilus . Neomeenis . Neopetrzeus Neotoma Nepheline Neptunea Novacula Notidanus . | Notocyphus ' Notogonia , 26, 212, 304, Monacanthus . Monopteride. . Monticocerus . 569 101 306-308 60 428 437 329 92 464 410 108 22 214 437 428 428 233 230 570 69 69 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF Nycticejus . 224 Nysson . 379 Ocinebra 296 Ocyurus 108 Odontoscion 115 | Ogcocephalidee 133 Ogcocephalus lead Ass Olcostephanus . 406, 407 Oligodon 455, 456 Oligoplites . ee LO Oncidium 184 Ophichthus 62, 93 Ophichthyide . 62, 93 Ophichthys . 62 | Ophicephalidee . Ophicephalus . ; Ophisurus 62, 93 Opisthonema . 94 Oppelia . 456 Opuntia . er ieee ers | (0) Orthis . 427, 447, 449 Orthite . aera ke Mig Mebain Orthoceras . 410, 411 Orthoclase . ; - . 448 Orthosesah s Ge-7 ht AST eASs Osmerus 26 Sri ‘Sten: Osmia ... . . . 384-346 Ostraciide . 128 Ostracion .) “428 Ostreea . . 829, 330 Otodus . . 428 Otolithus Ae Sie Oxalis S 16d 162 Oxybelus «Fe 386 Oxynoticeras 407, 455 Pagellus 4.) oe Pagrus Ry ei Paleoanodonta 455, 456 Paleeomutela 455, 456 Paleoniscide . . 455 Paralichthys 87 Parascalops 223 Parophrys . 88 Passaloecus . 141 Pavia Pha “itets: Pecten 329, 330 Peltandra . . 164 Pentamerus 414, “420, 496, 427, ral 447 Pentstemon ; 173 Pepsis 280-283 Perca 99, 104, 109 [1897. Percolabrax ee Perdita . 358- 350 Perideris . . 003. Perisphinctes . . . 456 Peromyscus 27, 212, 304, 306, 809-314 Pterometopon . us HOS Phacops 427 Phaius ; 184 Pharmacosiderite . 458 Phenacite 437 Philypnus : ~ bee Phlox . : 178, 180, 181 Photinula . « s SORES Phyllodactylus 460 Phyllotheca . 427 Pinna . 3 4330 Pisidium . 291, 292 Pisodonophis ~ 162 Pistacite . : . ogee Plagioclase . : 437, 438, 443 | Plagioptycha 10 Plagusia . -~ (2s Planiceps . 261-263 | Platessa 88. Platinum 429 Platophrys . 133. Platycephalidee 82 Platycephalus . 82 Platyceras 415 Platysomus . 101 Pleurodonta 10 Pleuronectes 90 Pleuronectide . 87, 133 Pleuronichthys . 88. Pleurotomaria . . 427, 445, 4AT Podium . : 373. Peeciliidee 97 Polycaulus . s0 38m Polydactylus 71, 98 Polynemidee ype fle Polynemus o MASS Pomacanthus . . 124, 125 Pomacentridee (7; 4s. Pomacentrus 77 Pomadasis . ‘ 75. Pompilus 249- 259, 265 Potamopyrgus. . ge SOG Pouschkinite . . 442 Priacanthide . V4 MON Priacanthus . . +4; LOK Priocnemis . . 266-275. 1897.] Bromage §2 6. fs '. «OG | Priononyx . 378 Prionoputis §.:. . . . 84 Prionotus ae) he Se ale Presmoaster, © 6 St. . | OS Pristopoma. . . a To Procyon . : 31, "219, 310 Prodozamites ; arm 5 4/¢ Productus 408, 410, 411, 417, 427, 449 Promicrops 105 Pronorites 427 Protocardium . 456 Psammobia 428 Psen . eo Ore Pseudagenia . 235, 286 Pseudorhombus . .. . 88 HCCTOHN Sra ts Wis 43 ween Pteromys "815-324 Pteropodide . . ."* 36 Putorius . 31, 217, 310, 311 Pyrgopolon : 475 Pyrochlore. . Bune? fas Quartz 418, 429, 435, Quartzite 418, a Quercus IY Re eis Sh 62 72 ELS (0) Rabdionite . 444 Rachycentride 108 Rachycentron . 103 Raia ade a ene PROS Raya ss : 93 Reithrodontomy Ny 304, 309 Seemiors) 6.8. ee ee memopstide (4 ON Le Ont. MO UALIS). 2 4. 4. “Sle. Oa einolophide. +. | . d6 4 varies ane S Ore 7 2 te Rhomboplites. . 108 Momus: |. ..°. *. Sf, 10d IS ss 2038 Rhynchonella . Onl ye SG Rhypticus 106, 107 Rissoa 360 Rissoina . 360 Rissoinine . 481 Rubus B00 ECDL e: NG eS 437 paaneicnthys ... . . . 6f Bilaecigees sf i.) '. OS) OT Salanx Pa Ans : Salius . 263-276 | Salix . 193 | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67 | 571 Salnio!) ss. 4404 ers) 1 Ob Samarskite . be CR? MEST Sardinella: y. i505 4%. 1. *605° 94 Sardinia. “4 fai) fee Be Saurida 2 + “aie tees GS SHUTUIS*! 2, fa) if boar Oe Sealops... 3 ‘s 0.1 ge "ee, eee Sealpellum . vi fe oes Scapheutes . 380 Scapolite 437 Scaridze 119 Scarus : 119, 121 Scatophagidee SFE acs or ee Seatophacus 4.) 24 .°2 *2 7 #9 Sceliphron . 373, 374 Sceloporus . . 461-465 Schistose 418 Schizodus 4. ee Ee | Schwagerina 410, 416 Sciadopitys . 3) lee tO Scizena 75, 76, 1038, 182 Scizenidee ~ OnE Sciuropterus 31, 206, 217, 311, 314-326 Sciurus . oi 216, 310 Scoliodon .... 91 SCOMMER Boe kal «8 = 72, 73 peomberomerus ,° .--. 72,299 Seombridwas: 4) +.1:. 7 > 72,99 Scorpezena at ey Een Scorpzenidee Pore eye Selene 4s, Pe Semelen=s 6 toul6 2 8.92) 295 | Serpulide . ; _ ey Serranidwien?. wt. 7d, 104 SECCAMUS) | rl tas tinc wch 73 Sempmmay 4. t1..4a 8 66 Sibon 464 Seema anes. ht) ee ee aL (i Rrecpardeat "Fa a 4 OT! aE SHoamities tes Laws fon. en Ue Sillagamideae Vote Mh 87 ulleOm tia totes ae OF Silphium £702 191. 192 (Seipnespenia +505. Go. OF Simmer el SSR Sodalite . 487 Solem ou, ©. «. |. *. 88, des Soremms ame 6 6.) 1. 88S Sonchus Se outacy” i 192 DOLE =F.) 4 0. 3d, 293, 304, 311 Sparidee . 216, REL 572 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. Sparis . = . 107, 409 Daraxaeum. |. . 385 Sparisoma 119, 120, 121 | Tarpon » 2 oe Sparus . 76, 107 | Tarsius . 34--55 Spheeralcea ape 352 | Tatea . 360--362, 480, 481 Se al gag ; 135 | Taxodium = LOD Sphene ce," gaan | “helama,.. «at66 Spheroids . . 129, 180 | Tentaculites . . 427 Sphex . . » « . « 8¢6--3878 | Tetradon . 81 Sphyrena . 2... ae bie -98°|| Wetraodon ‘ -\ eee Sphyrmg. +2. -. 2 ae. “9 | | Metraadentidis, - . 81,128 Sphyrnide. . wise) (Oia! Detrodon,: . 128 Spirifer, 410, 417, 420, 426, Teuthidide . owt ls 427, 445, 447, 449 | Teuthis 79, 126 Spiziferina . ‘3 PALO SN Dherapon ee Spirorbis . . . 158--159 | Theraponidee 2 yes Sporus sie eee 104 | Thracia . 292. Squaliobarbus ...... 59) Thrissa » ieee Squalus . ; . 56, 91 | Thryssa 64, 65 Staurotide . 415 | Tillandsia «| eee Stigmaria 427 | Titanite 437, 442 Stigmus . 379 | Topaz. 437, 438 Stizus . . Se slemooe | orpedo » |. eae Stolephorus . 64, 95, 96 | Tourmaline . 415, 437 Streptaxidee : . 477 | Trachicephalus. > Meat Streptaxis . ; 477--479 | Trachinocephalus . 685 ae Streptorhynchus . . . 449 | Trachinotus . . 103 Stromateide . ; 73, 103 | Trachinus. so OF Stromateoides .:).0.. «> 2) Ws | “Erachurops: . 73, 100 Stromateus ‘ 78, 103 | Trachypus . ae Strombus . <. 2°. op. 2904) “Eriacanthide: we. Strophomena. . . . 426 | Trizenophorichthys 85 Sturnella 146--152 | Triznopogon Bel) Sturnus . . 146 | Trichirus . . 100 Syacium . 188 | Trichiuride . eo!) Syenite é 436 | Trichiurus 72, 100 Sympholis. . 463 Trichosoma . . 64, 65 Symphurus ce? 1383 | Trichiuride . See SMA O TIS Pe Joke aoe ois ee eet Oa ADI eee 83, 132 Synanceia . . 81 | Triglide . 83, 182 Synaptomys, 25, 26, 211, 304--307 Trigonopsis . . aol Synaptura . . . . 90 | Trimorphodon . . 464 Syngnathide << .°... . -9% | Griphasia.. me re Syngnathus te all 1S pee eibonides ye 8)" Synhalonia 3847, 348 Trophon . 329, 330 Synidotea . 389 | Trygon 57, 9s Synodontide . . 67, 96 | Trypauchen . . onitem Synodus 2 .° =.) % “< 2396 /eieypoxylon: & 383--386 Syringopora. . 427 | Tschewkenite . pated Tachysurus, <-. 4. ove eDarbomilla 296 Tamias 30, 215 | Turritella 329, 330 Tanacetum pst E)"/ . 192 | Tylosurus 1897.] Ulema Ulmus Umbrina Upeneoides Upeneus Uralite Uranoscopidee Uranoscopus Uroconger . Urocyon . . Urolophus . . Urosalpinx Ursus Uta . Uvularia ‘81, . 31, 220, 113 185 115 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Vanilla Vespertilio . . Vesperugo . . Vesuvianite Viasta . Vomer Vulpes Xenocypris Xyrichthys .. . Xystema Yttrotantalite . RUSE a cane Zeus Aircon. Aizipiig), 3 east _ 38, 227, "28, 29, 573 184 228 224 442 211 eo sien AOD 437 190 574 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897. GENERAL INDEX. 1897. Additions to the Museum, 557. Allen, Harrison, M. D., Observa- tions on Tarsius fuscus, 34. Premolars and form of Skull, 145. Announcement of death of, and minute of appreciation, 458. Minute from Anthropo- logical Section, 481. Compara- tive measurements of Skulls, 482. Proceedings of a meeting in commemoration of, 505. Anthropological Section, report of, 552. Banes, Charles H., announcement of death of, 11. Bement, William B., announce- ment of death of, 356. Benedict, James E. 7 e s ~ ’ - il , 1a SD : 7 PLATE VIII. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1897. PROC. ACAD. ' L\ HMhearh, vel HEAR ON CRYETOCHITON. fi PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1897. PLATE IX. PILSBRY. NEW AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSKS. PILSBRY AND SHARP, SCAPHOPODA OF SAN DOMINGO. i Le ia! XI. PLATE /. PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 189 HUTTE TOT mmm LOTTE 16 PILSBRY AND SHARP, SCAPHOPODA OF SAN DOMINGO. if ane ee ete ats & Roa ; 1 Dy’ Wie oo a AAD) HVE MEET NS Uae WY } le : Abin i i hala re ow d as : y | Py AR Dy Aad i ae et Ply aes A ‘ . 4 ‘ i! an ih ‘ ‘wh i : \ ~, “i a a ‘ T fi uf 4 t { , \ ( ~ ‘ ‘ ! pe F \ F th oe ‘ “ ; ‘ ih F Ul i) i A , Ova’ 2 ah ; PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1897. PLATE XII. RHOADS ON AMERICAN BOVIDE. ta | hs ae aL tu); ny i ih 2 2 Py r J it ed : 7 a ven "7 ; vapw ba an 1 ' is All ‘ ‘ % 1 —. f eaten ah K 2 say ‘ hf Am Mas 3) Sai Pa QH Aeademy of Natural Sciences oe of Philadelphia A2 Proceedings v.49 Biological & Medical Senals PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY tet ” - a5 Sy =" : SEN ae . zs <, - Shetty Sica eee aie wee 4 EAA :